Workplan and Technical Requirements

CHAPTER 1
PRELIMINARY WORKS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
Article 1 General ........................................................................................................................ 1
Article 2 Site Cleaning up ........................................................................................................... 1
Article 3 Site Remeasurement ................................................................................................... 1
Article 4 Basic Benchmark ......................................................................................................... 2
Article 5 Building Shelf (Bouwplank).......................................................................................... 2
Article 6 Water and Electricity Supply ....................................................................................... 2
Article 7 Fire Fighting Equipment .............................................................................................. 2
Article 8 Drainage ..................................................................................................................... 3
Article 9 Contractor Office and Workplace Area ....................................................................... 3

CHAPTER 1
PRELIMINARY WORKS
Article 1 General
This section covers as a complementary means for the smooth conduct of the work in proper.
1. To secure the location of any disturbance.

2. Establish or build a Temporary Office, Warehouse and Worker Barracks.
3. Establish equipment, facilities and auxiliary work machines to ensure the work smooth and
in proper.
4. Carry out measurements to determine the expected field and other measures related to
the work of this building and install delimiter work area (bouwplang).
5. Provide First Aids Box and its completeness equipment.
6. Access road to the project site.
Article 2 Site Cleaning up
1. The project site/ field must first be cleared of grass, shrubs and tree roots.
2. Before any other work begins, the project site/ field should always be maintained, kept
clean and leveling flat.
Article 3 Site Remeasurement
1. The Contractor must re-measure and reconstructions of the site with information on the
height level of the land, the location of the trees, the location of the land boundaries with
the tools that have been officially formalized validated.
2. Mismatches that may occur between the shop drawings and the actual project site/ field
situation should be immediately reported to the Planner/ Supervisor for his decision.
3. Determination of altitude and angle is only done with Waterpass or Theodolith which the
accuracy can be justified.
4. The Contractor shall provide Theodolith/ Waterpass and the officers who serve them for
the purposes of the Planner/ Supervisor checks during project implementation.
5. The management of elbow angles with prism or merchandise in principle of the Phytagoras
Triangle is only permitted for small parts approved by the Planner/ Consultant Supervisor.
6. Any measurement and preparation work is included in the Contractor's responsibility.
Article 4 Basic Benchmark
1. The location and number of basic benchmarks shall be determined by the Planner or
Supervisory Consultant.
PRELIMINARY WORKS Page 1

PRELIMINARY WORKS page 2
2. The standard of benchmark is made of a concrete of at least 20 X 20 cm, firmly

inserted into 1 m deep with a protruding portion above the surface of the soil to facilitate
further measurements and at least 40 cm above the ground.
3. Basic benchmarks shall be made permanent, irrevocable, clearly marked and preserved
wholly until there is a written instruction from the Planner/ Consultant Supervisor to
dismantle them.
4. Any manufacture and installation work are including the Contractor's responsibility.
Article 5 Delimiter Board of The Work Implementation Site Area (Bouwplank)
1. The delimiter basic board of the work implementation site area is installed on a 5/7
meranti wood rafter stuck or equivalent in the ground so that it can not be moved or
altered, within a maximum of 2 m from each other.
2. The measuring board is made of meranti wood or equivalent, with a thickness of 3 cm, 20
cm wide, straight and shriveled flat on the top side (waterpass).
3. The height of the top of the base benchmark board shall be the same as the other, unless
otherwise requested by the Planner / Supervisor.
4. The base benchmark board is installed as far as 300 cm from the outermost foundation.
5. Upon completion of the installation of the implementation board, the Contractor shall
report to Planner/ Supervisor.
6. Any manufacture and installation work are including the Contractor's responsibility.
Article 6 Water and Electricity Supply
1. Water supply for the project work shall be provided by the Contractor by making a well
pump at the project site or supplied from outside. Water must be clean, free of dust, free
from mud, oil and other damaging chemicals. Water supply shall be in accordance with the
instructions and approval of the Planner / Supervisor.
2. Electricity for the project work shall be provided by the Contractor and obtained from the
local temporary connection of PLN (State Electricity Company) during the construction
period. Use of diesel for power is only permitted for temporary use with the consent of the
Supervisor.
Article 7 Fire Fighting Equipments
1. During construction, the Contractor shall provide fire extinguisher complete with its
contents, with a minimum of 4 (four) tubes, each tube having a capacity of 15 kg.
2. If the implementation of the building development has ended, then the fire extinguisher
shall become the property of the Owner as the task giver.
Article 8 Drainage
1. Considering the topography/ contour of the land in the site, the Contractor shall establish
a temporary duct which serves for the disposal of existing water.
PRELIMINARY WORKS page 3
2. The direction of the water flow is directed to the lowest surface area on the site or to an
existing channel in the disposal area.
3. The provision of a temporary channel shall be in accordance with the instructions and
approval of the Supervisor.
Article 9 Contractor Office and Workplace Area
1. The size of the Contractor's office and the Workshop/ Workplace area as well as the
shelves of materials, tailored to the needs of the Contractor by prioritizing safety and
hygiene and equipped with firefighters.
2. Especially for the place to store materials such as: sand, gravel, must be made a box that is
fenced off the board walls which is quite tight, so that each material is not mixed.
CHAPTER 2
STRUCTURAL WORKS
TABLE OF CONTENT
Page
Article 1 Soil, Excavation And Landfill Works ............................................................................. 1

1. Scope of Works ................................................................................................................ 1
2. Excavation ....................................................................................................................... 1
3. Landfill/ Hoarding ............................................................................................................ 2
Article 2 Sandfill/ Sand Hoarding Works .................................................................................... 2

1. Scope of Works ................................................................................................................ 2
2. Material Requirement ..................................................................................................... 3
3. Work Implementation ..................................................................................................... 3
Article 3 Lane Concrete Works .................................................................................................. 3

1. General ............................................................................................................................ 3
2. Material Requirement ..................................................................................................... 3
3. Works Implementation.................................................................................................... 3
Article 4 Foundation Structural Works ...................................................................................... 4

1. Stone/ Rock Foundation Works ....................................................................................... 4
2. Bore Pile Foundation Works ............................................................................................ 4
3. Pilling/ Pile Cap Works ................................................................................................... 12
Article 5 Concrete Works ......................................................................................................... 16

1. General .......................................................................................................................... 16
2. Scope of Works .............................................................................................................. 16
3. Materials ....................................................................................................................... 17
4. Concrete Molds ............................................................................................................. 18
5. Concrete Quality ............................................................................................................ 18
6. Prelimenary Experiment ................................................................................................ 19
7. Mortar Mixturing and Its Equipment ............................................................................. 19
8. Casting Preparation ....................................................................................................... 20
9. References ..................................................................................................................... 20
10. Transportation and Casting ........................................................................................... 21
11. Concrete Compaction .................................................................................................... 22
12. Construction Connection ............................................................................................... 22
13. Embedded Things in Concrete ....................................................................................... 22
14. Things Planted in Concrete ............................................................................................ 23
15. Work Defects ................................................................................................................. 23
16. Concrete Testing............................................................................................................ 23
17. Temperature ................................................................................................................. 23
18. Ready Mixed Concrete .................................................................................................. 23
19. Concrete Surface Treatment and Repair ....................................................................... 24
Article 6 Floor Concrete Rebates (Without Reinforcement) .................................................... 24
1. Scope of Works .............................................................................................................. 24
2. References/ Standard .................................................................................................... 25
3. Materials ....................................................................................................................... 25
4. Concrete Mixtures on The Project Site .......................................................................... 25
5. Implementation of Works/ Installation ......................................................................... 25
6. Casting Preparation ....................................................................................................... 26
7. Casting ........................................................................................................................... 27
8. Flatness Tolerance ......................................................................................................... 27
Article 7 Steel Structures ......................................................................................................... 27

1. General .......................................................................................................................... 27
2. Materials ....................................................................................................................... 28
3. Fabrication..................................................................................................................... 28
4. Erection ......................................................................................................................... 31
5. Steel Painting ................................................................................................................. 34
CHAPTER 2
STRUCTURAL WORKS
Article – 1 Soil, Excavation and Landfill Works
1. Scope of Works
a. This work includes excavation and landfill/ sand dumping (as shown), such as soil
excavation for Poer/ Pile Cap and Tie Beam/ sloof as well as excavation and other
dumping/ landfill for drainage and Mechanical/ Electrical work
b. All soil excavation and land reclamation/ backfill shall be carried out in accordance
with the Drawings and all instructions provided by the Supervising Consultant (SC)
during the course of the work
c. Manpower, equipment and other tools provides to carry out this work with good and
perfect results.
2. Excavation
a. Excavation works for foundations, sloofs and pile cap etc. may be carried out in a
conventional manner and all necessary equipment shall be provided by, whether
involving equipment for preparatory work or equipment for its own excavation work
and the necessary assistive devices
b. Before the excavation works can be performed, the Contractor shall submit a written
application to the Supervisory Consultant stating the date of commencement of the
excavation work, a technical description of the method of excavation to be carried out
c. In carrying out this excavation work, the Contractor shall/ should undertake the work
of prevention or soil lumbarity, stagnant ground water work, remedial work in case of
lumbarity and the like
d. All excavations should be carried out until the length of the excavation, depth, slope
and curvature as specified in the Approved Shop drawings are obtained
e. If the depth of excavation is exceeded the required depth as set forth in the Drawing,
the Contractor shall accumulate and re-solidify it with pebbles/ gravel, and all
additional costs resulting from it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor
f. If the condition of the soil at the depth specified in the drawings is in doubt, the
Contractor shall promptly report the results to the Supervising Consultant in writing, in
order to take the necessary steps, all costs incurred by such circumstances shall be
taken into account in the course of employment and implementation
g. Ground surface that has been dug and has reached the depth of the plan must be
compacted back to get a solid surface, flat. Soil compaction is used by soil compactors
previously approved by the Supervisory Consultant
h. The Contractor shall report the results of the finished excavation work and in his
opinion may already be used for the installation of the next foundation/ work to the
Supervising Consultant. For approval
i. All soil excess excavation must be removed from the field site to a location approved
by the Supervisory Consultant. The contractor is responsible for obtaining the landfill
and paying the required fare
STRUCTURAL WORKS Page 1

STRUCTURAL WORKS page 2
j. Stagnant water in the field site, or in drains and excavations during the execution of
work from water springs, rain or leaking pipes should be pumped out at the
Contractor's expense
k. The obstacles encountered during the excavation
1) All tree roots, buried tree trunks, unused concrete or brick foundations, unused
septic tanks, unused drainage pipes, large boulders found at the time of
excavation should be removed at Contractor's expense
2) Hollow ground from obstacles encountered must be reconstituted with a ratio of
10 concrete sand : 1 cement
3) General installations that are embedded and still functioning such as drainage
pipes, drinking water pipes, gas pipes, electrical wires encountered during
excavation are kept undisturbed or damaged
4) Where this is encountered, the Supervising Consultant shall be promptly notified
and obtain further instructions to issue the installation before the adjacent
excavation is continued
5) In the event of damage to the above installations, the Supervisory Consultant shall
promptly be notified and all damages shall be fixed at Contractor's expenses.
3. Landfill
a. What is meant here is the dredging/ hoarding work where the planned soil surface is
higher than the original soil surface, as shown in the shop drawings
b. All areas to be covered should be cleared of all shrubs, roots, garbage, building debris
and others before the commencement of the project
c. The soil used for cleaning should be clean of organic materials, plant sections, waste
and so on. The soil used for heaps and subgrade should be checked first in the soil
laboratory approved by the Supervisory Consultant
d. The loading/ backfill should be conducted layer by layer with a maximum thickness of
20 cm for each layer, then compacted until it reaches the maximum density tested by
the sandcone tool
e. The execution of hoarding accumulation can be used in a roller machine and in areas
which the Supervisory Consultant deems harmful or at a distance of approximately 45
cm from the channels or boundaries or works that may be damaged are used
stampers.
Article 2 Sand Work
1. Scope of Works
a. This article describes all of the sand work that the Contractor should undertake, such
as sand dumping under Pile Cap, Sloof, floor, under pavement and so on, as well as the
job of compacting the sand, as shown in the drawing
b. Sand-fill/ sand hoarding shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements set
forth in SNI 15-0351-1989
c. Manpower, equipment and other tools provides to carry out this work with good and
perfect results.
2. Material Requirements
The dredging sand to be used shall be clean and hard enough, in accordance with the
requirements stated in SNI 15-0351-1989.
3. Work Implementation
a. Prior to sand-fill the Contractor shall be required to inspect the height of the ground or
construction underneath it to ensure that the altitude is in accordance with the
drawing, and that the soil underneath has been compacted to obtain a flat and dense
surface
b. The results of this examination should be reported to the Supervisory Consultant, who
will immediately conduct the examination. Based on the results of the examination.
The Supervisory Consultant shall refuse or give his consent for the execution of the
work of sand-fill
c. Sand-fill should be carried out by spreading, leveling and mechanical compacting until
obtained thickness and height corresponding to shop drawings
d. The sand-fill should not be closed by construction or other work prior to approval by
the Supervisory Consultant. The Supervisory Consultant shall be entitled to dismantle
the work thereon, if the dredging sand has not been approved by the Supervisory
Consultant
e. The thickness and peil of the sand-fill should be in accordance with the drawing, if not
specifically stated in the drawing, the minimum thickness of sand = 10 cm.
Article 3 Lane Concrete Works
1. General
This article describes all lane concrete work, such as under the foundation work, sloof and
the like as set forth in the shop drawings
Lane concrete should be made of a mixture of cement, sand, gravel if not specifically
mentioned in the drawing should be made with a mixture ratio 1 cement : 3 sand : 5
gravel or B-0quality equivalent
3. Terms of The Work Implementation

a. Before the lane concrete is made the soil layer under it must be compacted and
leveled with a compactor and layered of sand-fill
b. The lane concrete, prior to the approval of the Supervisory Consultant may not be
closed by other work. The Supervisory Consultant shall be entitled to dismantle the
work thereon if the lane concrete has not been approved by him
c. The thickness and peil of the lane concrete should be in accordance with the shop
drawing, if not specifically stated in the shop drawing, then the minimum lane
concrete thickness = 5 cm.
Article 4 Foundation Structural Works
Scope of Work in this section includes the work of Rock Foundation, Pile Cap and Tie Beam.
1. Stone/ Rock Foundation
a. General
1) This chapter describes all the work of the stone/ rock masonry installation,
referred to as the foundation, as stated in the shop drawing
2) The stone/ rock masonry shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements
set forth in SNI 03-0394-1989.
b. Material Requirements
1) The stone used must be hard, dense, solid and has a compact structure with bright
colors and free from defects.The rounded stone should not be used
2) The portland cement used for the masonry work shall comply with the provisions
of this Terms and Conditions of The Structural Works (RKS)
3) The sand used for this must be clean and solid, and meet the requirements
specified in SNI 15-0351-1989
4) The water to be used for stone masonry shall comply with the provisions of this
Terms and Conditions of The Structural Works (RKS).
c. Work Implementation
1) The stone foundation shall be carried out by means of a mortar 1 part Portland
cement : 5 parts of Concrete Sand or appropriate mentioned in the drawing and
shall be installed and shaped until the required dimensions and height are
obtained, as illustrated in the shop drawing
2) The stone must be placed in such a way that there is sufficient bite between the
stones, with the smallest possible amount of free space. Before being installed, the
exterior is moistened sufficiently. Once installed, the outer part of the rock must
be rough blasting with the same mortar until all the stone surface is closed. Before
installation can be carried out, the Contractor shall establish and install auxiliary
logs (wood beam profiles) and stretch the auxiliary threads in a shape according to
the shape of the foundation to be installed. The stretched threads should be flat
straight level. The helper and these yarns must be approved by the Supervisory
Consultant before the stone installation can begin.
3) Stone installation exposes must be randomly installed by mortar and must be
performed by experienced special masons. During the installation of the stone
may need to be formed to obtain a thin and flat grout
4) This work shall be carried out by using mortar and sand with a mixture of 1: 5
5) Before being installed, the stone should be moistened enough, and the grout
between the exposed stone should be scraped in an adequate way
6) During installation, the already installed stone has to be washed frequently, to
prevent it from dirt and mortar.
2. Bore Pile Foundation Works
a. General
1) Bore Pile foundation used on building of Laboratory buildings at Tegal Boto
Campus
2) This work shall be undertaken by a Bore Pile Specialist Contractor and having
sufficient equipment and experienced supervisory staff for similar work so that
quality work can be produced as required with the carrying capacity in accordance
with the specifications and shop drawings of plans made By Structural Planner
3) The Contractor shall enclose an organizational structure with experienced
personnel for this work as indicated by the Curriculum Vitae from the personnel
concerned. The Contractor shall also provide a Declaration Letter that ensures that
the personnel concerned will always remain in the employment during this period
of work
4) The Contractor shall enclose the method of execution as well as the list of tools to
be used in this project taking into account the existing soil conditions, the ground
level location, the nature and quantity of land encountered, the nature of the
equipment to be used and the required facilities at Preliminary stage and in the
next stage
5) The contractor prior to commencement of work shall submit 2 (two) copies to the
Supervisory Consultant, namely :
 Equipment schedule, including the number of tools/ drilling machines to be
used
 Plan of bore pile per day
 Manpower schedule
 Material schedule.
6) The Contractor is responsible for carrying out the bore piles with the number, size
and location as seen in the drawings of the foundation pillars made by the
Structural Planner. The depth of the bore pile is calculated from the original soil
surface when the Soil Investigation is made as seen from field data obtained at the
time of the drilling work. The actual length used as the scope of the offer is as per
the drawings.
In carrying out this bore pile drilling work The Contractor is required to take and
store soil samples from :
 The base of the drill hole
 1/2 meter above the bottom of the drill hole
 1 meter above the bottom of the drill hole
 1 1/2 meter above the bottom of the drill hole.
 Any changes in the soil layers found during drilling.
Examples of such soil should be kept in a regular rack in sequence, wrapped in
plastic and ready to be displayed at all times.
7) Changes to the specifications or shop drawings of the plans without the prior
written consent of the Supervising Consultant are not permitted.
Any consequences of changes to the Structure Specification and Drawings without
the prior written approval of the Structural Consultant Planner shall be the
expenses and responsibilities of the Contractor.
b. Project Site Introduction

1) The contractor should know the Project Site well before starting his work which
include :
 The existing elevation is related to the elevation in the drawing plan
 Soil layer condition
 The depth of the Groundwater
 Existing of buildings/ facilities/ utilities and or adjacent the Site
 Equipment and facilities required for the smooth running of the work
 Other matters that may affect the implementation of the work.
2) The Contractor shall also recognize the conditions of public roads, road load
constraints and other restrictions/ provisions that may affect the smoothness of
transport/ equipment to and from the site
3) The Contractor shall also be responsible for the necessary licenses for such
transportation purposes
4) The Contractor shall be required to match the project site conditions with the
drawing of the plan (shop drawing and shall be required to report in writing to the
Structural Planner for a determination/ decision.
c. Project Site Measurements

1) Contractor before commencement of work, Careful and experienced surveyors
should do the measurement of the layout by using theodolite
2) Contractors are obliged to report in writing to the Structural Planner if there is any
differences in the elevations/ sizes of the project site to which the drawing plans
(shop drawing)
3) The Contractor shall be required to measure/ determine the existing facilities/
utilities in the project site and to report them in writing to the Supervising
Consultant
4) Any additional cost required to protect/ maintain available facilities/ utilities,
including replacing damaged due to contractor errors, the responsibility of the
Contractor.
d. Scope of Works
Scope of work of this Bore Piles (pillars) foundation are :
 Procurement of all labor, materials, tools and all equipment needed to complete
this work
 PDA (Pile Dynamic Analysis) Test
 Drilling of Bore Pile holes including the used of casing if required
 Provision and installation of bore pile reinforced poles
 Disposal of soil/ mud away from drilling site and cleaning
 Provision and casting of the bore piles.
e. References
For all work, the materials should be carried out in accordance with the General
Requirements of Building Materials in Indonesia (PUBBI-1982), Technical Specifications
and Description which are printed on shop drawings. All concrete work must be carried
out in accordance with the specifications of REIFORCEMENT CONCRETE WORK and SNI
03-2847-2013, unless there are special changes to be mentioned later.
Prior to carrying out the work, the Contractor shall examine all Architectural,
Mechanical/ Electrical and other related drawings. If there are differences or
peculiarities, the Contractor shall report such matter in writing to the Supervisory
Consultant.
f. Implementation of Making the Bore Piles

1) After the location of the bore piles to be created, determined and approved by the
Commitment Maker Official (PPK) and Supervising Consultant, the bore piles work
may begin.
Prior to this work the Contractor must prepare a Drilling Record form that has
been approved and approved by the Commitment Maker Official (PPK) and
Supervision Consultant. The contents of the drilling record are written, such as in
item c.
2) The first stage is drilling work

a) Drilling work can be done by using the Flight Auger Drilling Machine and
drilling tools such as Bucket Auger, Core Barrels, Clean out Bucket. Before the
work begins, the configuration of the tools or method of implementation must
have obtained written approval from the Commitment Maker Official and
Consultant Supervisor
b) These tools and equipment should be used for drilling through water, hard
beds, large rocks, rock chips, hard clay, gravel and sand
c) If the strength of the wellbore wall is expected not strong enough to withstand
erosion, need to be used temporary steel casing with a length that suits your
needs and/ or Bentonite. The connection of the casing must be waterproof
d) Soil conditions for this project can be seen in Soil Investigation Results
e) Drilling shall be carried out until it reaches the required soil layer, whereby its
characteristics are determined on the basis of Soil Surveillance Results. At the
time of drilling, a record of the elevation and type of layers of soil layers
should be observed. Furthermore, the soil samples shall be taken from each
elevation and stored in such a way that the original properties of the soil are
unchanged
f) The soil samples shall be indicated at any time as required by the Planner and
the Supervisor
g) To achieve maximum work result, the Contractor are required to place an
experienced expert with drill pole for bore pile work. New drilling was
suspended after obtaining written approval from the Commitment Maker
Official and Consultant Supervisor. Although it has been approved, but the
responsibility for the quality of the work result is entirely the responsibility of
the Contractor
h) After the drilling is complete it should be noted the depth achieved.
3) The second stage is the cleaning work of bottom ground drill from avalanches and
mud that occurs at the bottom of the borehole.
a) This work is absolutely necessary to be done by the contractor because the

landslide and sludge may affect the carrying capacity and the behavior of the
bore pile
b) The way in which this cleaning work is done depends on the method and tools
used (with Casing and/ or Bentonite)
c) This cleaning work may be terminated upon receipt of a written approval from
the Supervisory Consultant. The time of cleaning and depth of the drill hole
after cleaning is done should be noted.
4) The third stage is the setting/ mounting of reinforced from the drill pole.
a) The reinforced of the drill pole shall be ready to be threaded for inclusion into
the borehole after the cleaning work has been completed. If the reinforcement
is not ready then the drill hole cleaning work should be re-done until it is ready
for inclusion. On the outer side of the reinforcement shall be tofu concrete/
square with thickness of 7 (seven) cm in some places to obtain a good
concrete blanket on all parts of the drill pole
b) After the reinforcement of the drill pile is re-done the measurement of drill
hole depth performed by the Contractor and witnessed by the Supervisory
Consultant
c) If there is a reduction in the drill bit depth compared to the depth at the time
the cleaning is done, then the installed reinforcement must be re-issued and
the cleaning work must be performed again. Not allowed to continue in the
next stage of work before this stage is approved in writing by the Supervising
Consultant.
5) The fourth stage is the casting concrete into the drill hole work.
a) After the reinforcement work is done, the concrete mixture slab to be used
must be ready at the work site, so that the casting is done immediately after
the reinforcement work is approved by the Supervising Consultant
b) This casting shall be done to completion, shall not postpone the work of this
casting
c) If the foundry is not completed for any reason then the drill bit is deemed to
be ineligible and the Contractor shall replace the pole with a new drill bit
which will be determined by the Planner Consultant. All risks due to this are
the Contractor's expenses
d) To prevent this, the Contractor should be able to estimate the amount/
volume of concrete mix that will be used in prepared boreholes
e) A record of volumes which are expected to be used with the actual volume of
mortar used. The time and duration of casting should be recorded
f) There is an important point to note in the implementation of this drill mast
work, i.e., if the first stage has already begun then this work must be
completed until the last stage and there should be no delay between the
stages of the work.
g. Reinforced Rebar Steel

1) General requirements for reinforcing steel, refer to the CONCRETE WORK chapter
on this specification and for the length of the reinforcing steel see the drawing of
the Planner's plan taking into account the required cuttings
2) The reins used for this work are in accordance with the implementation drawings
(as built drawings)
3) The reinforcement basket shall be placed at the center of the borehole and shall
be fitted firmly so that there is no shifting/ displacement during the casting period
4) The minimum concrete blanket should be 7 (seven) cm.
h. Concrete Works
1) The general terms of Concrete Works refer to the chapters of reinforced concrete
work on this specification
2) The composition, stirring, transporting and casting of concrete shall conform to
the specifications of Reinforced Concrete Works
3) The required concrete quality as specified in the plan drawing (shop drawing), with
slump (10 ± 2 cm)
4) The concrete shall not be cast before the drilling work and the stages are approved
by the Supervisory Consultant
5) Tremie pipes used must have a minimum diameter of 20 cm and the receiving
hopper must have capacity at least equal to the capacity of the pipe supplied with
the concrete. The bottom of the tremie pipe should be covered with a tape plate.
Before the foundry begins, throw a small pebble into the pipe, when a clash
sounds with the cover plate, it means that the closing plate is still in place and not
leaking
6) The position of the Tremie pipe shall be arranged so that the base of the pipe is at
least 1.5 m below the surface of the concrete at each casting stage. Concrete
casting must be continuous without stopping
7) The actual volume of concrete used should be recorded and checked with volume
calculations on paper to believe that there is no "necking" or "caving" in the
borehole
8) If the actual concreted volume is smaller than the theoretical volume, the
Supervisory Consultant shall have the right to request "Sonar Logging" to be
performed by the company which having experience in the matter and obtain
written approval from the Supervising Consultant. All fees for "Sonar Logging" are
the responsibility of the Contractor.
If the results of "Sonar Logging" indicate imperfections of drill poles, such as
"necking" or "caving" etc., the drill pole is considered a failure and must be
replaced with new Drill Pill at Contractor's cost.
9) Concrete Pile Drill shall not be disturbed for a minimum of 21 (twenty one) days
from the time of casting.
i. Drill Position Tolerance

1) The maximum deviation to the position of the foundation pile hrs satisfies the
following conditions :
 The maximum deviation is measured in each horizontal direction to the bench
grid line : 10 cm
 The level deviation from the top side plan of the pole, max. 5 cm
 Vertical elevation axis tolerance = 1 : 200
Specifically for this single-pole drill tolerance must be taken careful, since a slight
deviation from this tolerance is fatal and the Contractor shall replace the failed
drill pole with a new drill bit which will be determined by the Planner Consultant.
2) All additional costs incurred due to changes in the number of drill piles, the design
of the pole head, the foundation beam in terms of material, time and cost of re-
planning resulting from the errors/ failures of the Contractor in carrying out the
drill pole, all become the Contractor's expense.
j. The Making Drill Bore Masts in Order

1) Prior to drill-making work undertaken Contractor shall establish reference number
of all drill poles following sequence of drilling plan and shall obtain approval from
Furthermore, the drawings approved by the Supervising Consultant should be
reproduced and placed in the Supervisory Board keet to facilitate monitoring by
the Supervising Consultant.
Drawings with these drilling sequences should be approved by the Supervisory
Consultant before drilling work begins.
2) The construction of a new bore pole located next to the newly-casted bore pole
shall have a minimum grace period of 7 days and must obtain approval from the
k. Chiseling Displays Head of Drill Pill & As Built Drawing

1) After the drill mop work has been completed the Contractor shall cut the top
concrete of the drill bit to be cast to the required cut-off level by considering the
length of the reinforcement cuttings for the purpose of joining the pile cap at a
minimum of 40 x the diameter of the reinforcement
2) As soon as the work is completed the Contractor shall make "As Built Drawing"
from the location of the drill pole and compared to the location of the drill pole
plan. "As Built Drawing" is made with CAD
l. Excavation Material Waste

Excavated materials resulting from drilling holes should be removed from employment
site. The disposal site of excavation material shall be determined by the Supervisory
Consultant upon the directions of the Task Giver or the Local Government. In the
Contractor's offer should already have to take this into account.
m. Back-fill/ Soil Recurrence

The contractor must recover with sand or dirt excavated as a result of the drilling work
upon completion of drilling until it reaches the lower level of the pile cap and
compresses it.
n. Tidy Up The Reins

During the upper side flattening of the drill pole, the Contractor shall trim and align the
reinforced piles prepared for connection with the pile cap.
o. Drill Poles Disclaimer

Drill masts that are not properly implemented and did not meet this specification shall
be rejected by the Supervising Consultant.
Contractors are required to make replacement poles at no additional cost, even if
poles of different sizes are required as a result of the above error.
p. Drill Pole Making and Drilling Record

The Contractor shall produce a regular Drilling Record of each drill pole making and
shall provide 6 copies of the result of the data collection already signed to be
submitted to the Supervisory Consultant on a daily basis.
Drilling records must include but not limited to :
1) Drilling Data/ Drilling The Holes

 Bored Piles Number
 Date
 Start and Finish of the drilling time
 Drilling Method (Dry / Casing / Slurry without Casing)
 Hole Diameter
 Type and lenght of the casing
 Upper Elevation of the drill holes
 Base Elevation of the drill holes
 Soil types and its elevation
 The position of Drill holes against the plan point of the drawing plan/ shop
drawing
 Elevation from the top side of the Supporting Land/ Bearing Layer Report
 Drilling Elevation in the Supporting Land/ Bearing Layer/ Rigid Plate Report
 Slope of the drill holes.
2) Drill/ Bore Holes Clean Out
 Weather & Air Temperature
 Sludge/ Sediment thickness
 Cleaning Method
 Inspection Method
 O/ O Cleaned
 Depth of the Ground Water Level
 Clasification and condition of the Supporting Land/ Bearing Layer Reports.
3) Bar Bending
 The number and diameter of the main reinforced
 Diameter and distance/ spacing of the stirrups
 Circuit Diameter/ Rebar (reins) Cage
 Reinforced Lenght.
4) Reinforced Placement
 Reinforced Placement Method (Dry/ Cased/ Slurry – Displacement)
 Tremie Model/ Dropchute
 Diameter and Tremie Lenght.
5) Casting
 The time of the Ready Mix (cement mixture) arrived
 The time of the casting done
 Sampling for the Cube/ Cylinder Test
 Concrete Volume as Designed
 Poured/ Cast Concrete Volume
 Elevation of the Drill/ Bore Poles casting when the casing removed
 Final Elevation of the Drill/ Bore Poles casting
 Rebar/ Reins Elevation (before and after the casting).
Also note the disturbances/ difficulties that may occur at the time of drilling to be
made as complete as possible.
Drilling Records prepared by the Contractor and after a thorough inspection may
only be signed by the Supervisory Consultant.
The drilling record after being signed by the Contractor and the Supervisory
Consultant will be a valid data that will be used for various purposes, among
others, as a data for the evaluation of the Drill Pill which is having problems/
quality doubt.
q. Reinforced Concrete Work Tests

The unit costs offered by the Contractor should include the costs required to perform
the test as required. The type and quantity of materials to be tested can be seen in the
specifications of Reinforced Concrete Work.
r. Technical Specification of The Drill Poles

 Drill Pill Foundation size : There are 2 (two) kinds of diameter of drill pile
foundation, that is 60 cm & 40 cm diameter, (according to the shop drawing)
 Concrete quality : The concrete quality for the drill poles is f’c = 20.75 Mpa or K-
250
 Retarder : Must be taken how long the trip to and discharging in the project site
with minimum of 2 (two) hours
 The reinforced rebar steel used must comply with the Indonesian Industrial
Standard (SII.0136.84) namely :
o Threaded reinforcement rebar steel with diameter > 10 mm (dia. 10mm ;
13mm ; 16mm and so on)  BJTD 40 (threaded reins rebar steel)
o Reinforced rebar steel with diameter < 10 mm  BJTP 24 (plain
reinforcement).
3. Pilling/ Pile Cap Foundation Works
a. General
All materials and work must meet the terms of both the terms, general terms for the
work of the structure, the specific requirements for concrete piles.
b. Pilling/ Erection Terms and Conditions
 The erection should be done using a diesel engine tool because the blow is
generally more in line with the pole axis, compared to other mechanical staplers.
Other erection methods may be performed after approval by the Supervisory
Consultant
 The pile should be available in the field/ project site before the start of the
eruption work
 Steps/ stages of erection should be carried out by experts specially imported from
the erection company
 Implementation of the erection should be well coordinated by the pilot with the
Contractor, the Supervisory Consultant
 Piling The concrete pile should be such that the shop drawings so can be obtained
for good, solid and maximum pile foundation
 Prior to erection should request written approval from the Supervising Consultant
 The contractor shall provide a complete stakeholder which can ensure the
execution of the pole in the right position, either vertically or from axis to asylum.
The stake should be good, so that during the erection there is no need for
improvement
 During the erection implementation the Contractor shall provide two measuring
instruments and check the pole position of the pole pile exactly coordinate in
accordance with the drawing and ensure the pole is aligned to the vertical axis
 Diesel or a hammer drop apparatus or other heading apparatus adapted to the
hammer weight conditions according to pile dimensions, in the selection of the
most important stake means the actual energy of the resulting saplings
 For the calculation of calendering on the erection should be based on this actual
energy, using the formula :
2WH W 1
R = ------- x -------- x ---
S+k W + P SF
Dimana :
W = Carrying capacity of the pile (tons)

E = Weight of tool (tons)
P = High-falling hammer (M)
S = Weight of pile (tons)
K = Penetration of the final blow (M)
SF = Elastic shortening of the total of the head piles, poles and ground / M
Security Figures, taken the usual 3
Note :
1. Before determining how much calendering will be determined, what first need
to know are :
 How much actual energy the stake is importing
 Is the energy eligible for erection
 The total amount of temporary elastic compression of pile, helmet and

soil.
2. If does not met, the weight of the hammer (energy) must be replaced.
 The head pole should be given protection so as not to be damaged when
it is fixed. Pile cutting must be horizontal at the height of the cutting point
corresponding to the shop drawing
 In any pole eradication, the permissible pole position coordinate error is a
maximum shift of 75 mm (seventy-five millimeters) .When more than this
limit there shall be a control calculation of all the consequences with the
Planner's approval and all expenses incurred by the Contractor
 In each erection, the pile must enter the ground vertically. The errors that
occur should be taken into account and the repairs to the Contractor's
expense. To prevent this, the entry of the pole should always be followed
from start to finish
 When there is found a pile that has entered into the soil until the required
depth, but does not meet the calendering, then the erection must be
continued to the depth with the calendering counter in accordance with
the required
 When the pile is fixed at a depth that has not been reached in accordance
with the design but has reached hard layer, the pole can be stopped on
condition, the bearing capacity of the pole from the calendering result has
reached the required carrying capacity. By taking the basic calculation of
the value of SPT = which is in the report soil investigation
 Prior to erection plotting, each pile should be assigned :
o The order number of the manufacture
o Manufacture date/ the pile age must be fulfilled
o Line marks/ strips every 1 m (one meter) along the pole.
 The use of heading type and weight of the hammer should be adjusted. In
case of damage to the pole due to erection, the Contractor shall
immediately replace it
 The piling linkage is to use steel welded plate or in accordance with the
manufacturer's stylists
 The erection of each point must be done until it reaches the hard layer
depth/ according to the drawing and must leave the pole head at least 80
cm above the pile cap base level. The head of the unused pole piles of
Concrete at breaks and peeled for iron is attributed to a sequence of pile
cap sequences
 Dimensions of pile sizes according to the ones shown in the drawings
 Under the lane concrete is covered with sand and compacted. The
thickness of sand-filed in accordance with shop drawings
 Mixture of the lane concrete, pile cap foundation and other is 1 pc : 3
sand : 5 gravel with thickness according to shop drawings
 If there are puddles and dirt in the excavation, at the time of casting the
lane concrete and Pile cap, the water must be removed by the pump
machine so it is completely dry and clean.
c. Bore Pile Specification
1) In principle using prestressed concrete piles, Dimensions of pile sizes according to

the figures shown in the drawing are Minipile 25 x 25 cm, Length 6.00 m
2) Piling is used in several buildings on Campus Jubung
3) For pile joints adjusted to project site/ field conditions and ease of mobilization.
Prior to arrival the Contractor shall inform the Supervising Consultant regarding
the piles to be used
4) The quality of pile concrete is a concrete compression strength of at least
f'c = 41.5 Mpa or K-500.
d. Pile Punch Cuttings
1) In order to the pile cutting sticks that enter into the pile cap, made what it shows
in the shop drawing
2) The cuttings were casted first, then the pile cap was then installed. This is
important so that the casting is not disturbed by the pile cap reins, the cuttings
columns and the blocks.
e. Dynamic Pole Carrying Capacity Test
1) Scope of Works
Included in the scope of this work is the implementation of dynamic testing, the
provision of test equipment and the test report results. The number of piles tested
by dynamic means of 2 pieces as specified in the BoQ of each building, where the
pole to be tested PDA (Pile Driving Analyzer) is the used pole. For pile location to
be tested in field, determined by Supervision Consultant based on consideration of
calendering result and project site work implementation
2) Terms of Implementation
Testing in a dynamic way is done to estimate the axial bearing capacity of the pile
foundation, therefore the requirements that must be met are :
a) Prior to the execution of the tests, the Contractor may submit an
implementation proposal for approval by the Supervising Consultant
b) The instrument equipment used must be functioning properly and accurately,
so before the test is conducted, the Contractor must be able to show the valid
calibration certificate on the equipment
c) Given the carrying capacity of the pile consisting of friction and bearing, the
test with the PDA can be done at least 2 weeks after the pole is stuck
d) In the implementation of re-strike or re-drive testing as much as 3 - 8 times
(blows). The re-strike was stopped after a sufficiently good recording quality
and relatively high energy hit
e) In Pile Driving Analizer testing shall be performed by a competent Specialist
Contractor on the work
f) Atleast not later than 5 (five) days after the test, the Contractor shall submit
the result of Pile Driving Analizer to the Supervising Consultant
g) The report should clearly states :
 Location of the Pole in test

 Date of the erection
 Sticked Pole depth
 Diameter of the pole
 Energy of the stake
 Date of the test execution
 The carrying capacity of the pile which includes the carrying capacity due
to friction and bearing capacity
 Documentation at the time of the test execution.
f. Contractor Responsibility
The Contractor is fully responsible for the quality of work performed. The approval or
attendance of the Supervisory Consultant in the project site/ field shall not reduce the
responsibility of the Contractor.
Article 5 Concrete Works
1. General Terms and Condition
a. Concrete construction requirements, technical terms and conditions, concrete

implementation generally become unity in the technical requirements section of
this book. Unless otherwise specified in this technical requirements book, all
concrete work must conform to the following standards:
1) SNI 1727-2013, the Minimum Load Rule for Building Design and Other
Structures
2) 2) SNI 1726-2012, the Procedures for Planning of Earthquake Resilience for
Buildings and Non Building.
3) 3) SNI 1729-2015, which is Specification for structural steel building.
In the event of any discrepancies between the foregoing rules then Indonesia's
decisive rules
b. The Contractor shall perform this work with high accuracy and suitability in
accordance with these technical requirements, drawing plans and instructions
issued by the Directors/ Construction Management. All non-compliant work shall
be dismantled and replaced at the Contractor's own expense
c. All materials must be in a new state of the highest quality as per the requirements
and approved by the Board of Directors/ Supervisors. And the Board of Directors/
Trustees shall have the right to request the testing of such materials and the
Contractor shall be responsible for all expenses. All material not approved by the
Board of Directors/ Construction Management within 2 x 24 hours must be
removed from the Project.
2. Scope of Works
a. Includes all the work required for the execution of concrete work in accordance
with the drawing of the plan (shop drawings) including the procurement of
materials, wages, testing, and auxiliary equipment
b. Procurement, detailing, fabrication and installation of all reinforcement and parts
of other work embedded in concrete
c. Design, execution and dismantling of concrete references, completion and
maintenance of concrete and all types of work that support concrete work
d. The types of reinforced concrete works that are constructed are the main
structures, such as :
1) Pile Cap and Concrete Sloof
2) Portal Column
3) Portal Beams and Supporting Beams
4) Ring Beams
5) Concrete Console and Boardshelf
6) Floor Plate and Concrete Platform
7) Concrete Stairs
8) Cantilever.
3. Materials
a. Cement
1) All cement used is Portland Cement type in accordance with the requirements of
Portland Cement Indonesia SNI 2049-2015, NI-8/1964. Sll 0013-81 atau ASTM C-
150 dan produksi dari satu merk
2) The Contractor must send a factory statement stating the type, quality of the
cement used and the Manufacturer's test certificate stating that it meets the
above requirements
3) The Contractor shall place the cement in a good warehouse to prevent damage.
Cement that is clot, sweeping, mixed with dirt or water/ moisture is not allowed to
be used and must be removed immediately from the project site
4) The use of cement shall be in accordance with the order of delivery
b. Coarse Agregat
1) In the form of crushed stone obtained from stone breaking with specifications
according to ASTM C-33 and has the largest size of 2,5 cm
2) Aggregates should be hard, not porous, and cuboid-shaped. If there are flat grains
then the amount does not exceed 20% of the volume and should not be subjected
to pulverization to exceed 50% weight loss according to the Los Angeles Abration
(LAA) machine test
3) The material must be clean of organic, alkali reactive substances or substances
that damage the concrete and have the following gradations :
SIEVE SIZE % SIEVE THROUGH

1” 25.00 mm 100
¾” 20.00 mm 90-100
3/8” 95.00 mm 20-55
No. 4 4.76 mm 0-1
c. Fine Aggregate
1) May use natural sand or sand produced from rock breakers and must be clean of
organic matter, sludge, alkaline substances and does not contain more than 50%
of substances that might damaging concrete
2) Beach sand is not allowed to be used and sand must consist of sharp and hard
particles and has a gradation like the following table :
SIEVE SIZE % SIEVE THROUGH

3/8” 9.50 mm 100
No. 4 4.76 mm 90-100
No. 8 2.8 mm 80-100
No. 16 1.19 mm 50-85
No. 30 0.19 mm 25-65
No. 50 0.297 mm 10-30
No. 100 0.149 mm 5-10
No. 200 0.074 mm 0-5
d. Water
The water used should be clean and clear of no oil or salt and substances that can
damage the concrete or steel reinforcement.
e. Reinforcement Steel
The reinforcing steel used shall comply with the requirements of PBI N1-2 1971, with
characteristic melting stress (Sau) = 2400 kg/cm² or U24 steel for diameter ≤ 12 mm
and steel with characteristic melting stress (Sau) = 3900 kg/cm² or steel U39 for
> 12mm diameter. The assignor or the Board of Directors/ Supervisor will perform a
test of tensile test and "Bending" for every 10 tons of reinforcing steel, at Contractor's
expense.
f. Mixing Material
1) The use of mixers (Admixture) is not permitted without written approval from the
Board of Directors/ Consultants Management and Consultant Planner
2) Where the mixing material is to be used, the Contractor shall conduct weight
comparison experiments and W/C ratio from the addition of the mixer
(Admixture). Crushing test results from the laboratory authorized to concrete
cubes aged 7, 14, and 21 days must be reported to the Board of Directors/
Consultants Management for approval.
4. Concrete Molds
Can use class II of wood, multiplex with minimum thickness of 9 mm or steel plate, with
condition to meet the provisions mentioned in SNI 01-2024-1990.
5. Concrete Quality
a. The quality of concrete for building construction shall comply with the following
compressive strength requirements :
1) Base Foundary Concrete Quality
f’c = 20.75 MPa or K-250  for Drill Poles
2) Building Concrete Quality
a) For Tegal Boto Campus
 f’c = 29.05 MPa or K-350  for Pile Cap, Sloof, Column, Beam, Lane
Concrete
 f’c = 14.53 Mpa or K-175  Lane Concrete and Precast Column
b) For Jubung Campus ( Campus Building < 2 floors )
 f’c = 20.75 MPa or K-250  for Pile Cape, Sloof, Column, Beam, Lane
Concrete
 f’c = 14.5 MPa atau K-175  untuk Lantai Kerja dan kolom praktis.
c) The quality of the concrete should follow the elaboration of SNI 6809-2014
d) Slump (Concentrated Density) for this type of construction based on testing
with standard Slump Test Method SNI 6809-2014
e) If no vibrator is used with high vibration frequency, the above price can be
increased by 50% with a note not exceeding 150 mm and must be backed up
by a mortar trial mix.
6. Preliminary Experiment
a. In order to obtain the quality of concrete as required, the Contractor shall conduct
trials at an independent Laboratory designated by the Board of Directors/ Constuction
Management as the assignor, in preparation of a preliminary experiment in the field
until a comparative comparison of the quality of the concrete is to be used
b. Any change of the type of materials used, the Contractor shall conduct experiments at
the Laboratory to obtain the required concrete quality
c. The test specimen prepared and procedures in this experiment shall follow the
provisions of SNI 2458-2008, SNI 2493-2011 dan SNI 4810-2013
d. If the experimental results in the laboratory and the slump test have not shown the
quality in accordance with the demand, then the concrete work should not be
implemented
e. Preliminary experimental results in the project site/ field shall be in accordance with
laboratory experimental results.
7. Mortar Mixturing and Its Equipment
a. The Contractor shall provide equipment and having sufficient equipment tools
accuracy to establish and supervise the quantities of each concrete material formation
with the approval of the Board of Directors/ Constuction Management
b. Arrangements for the transportation, weighing and mixing of materials shall be subject
to the approval of the Board of Directors/ Constuction Management and all operations
shall be controlled and monitored continuously by an experienced and responsible
inspector
c. Mixture stirring should be done with a Concrete Mixer (Batch Mixer) or Portable
Continuous Mixer. The stirring machine must be completely empty before receiving
the ingredients of the next mortar and should be washed if not used for more than 30
minutes
d. Concrete-forming materials should be mixed and stirred for 1.5 minutes after all the
ingredients are in the mixer. The stirring time shall be increased, when the engine
capacity is greater than 1.5 m3 and the Board of Directors/ Supervisor is authorized to
increase stirring time if the ingredients turn and stirring methods fail to obtain a
mixture of evenly uniform colored. The resulting concrete must be uniform in
composition and consistency in each mortar mixture
e. The stirring machine is not overloaded beyond the specified capacity. Water should be
poured first for further added during stirring. Not allowed to excessive stirring which
requires addition of water to obtain the desired concrete consistency
f. The Contractor is permitted to place a Mixing Plant or obtain concrete from a Ready
Mix Plant provided that it can prove that the quality of the concrete complies with all
the provisions of this requirement. The Contractor must submit a Ready Mix concrete
specification to be used in accordance with the desired quality of concrete, before the
work begins.
8. Casting Preparation
a. Before the foundry is started, all parts to be casted should be clean and free of dirt and
loose concrete parts. Parts to be planted in concrete have to be installed (pipes for
electrical, plumbing and other equipment installations).
b. Molds or walls installation which to be associated with concrete shall be moistened
with water until saturation and reinforcement shall be installed properly. The old
previous concrete fields to be cast must be roughened first and then cleaned of any
loose dirt
c. Shortly before the concrete is cast, the fields on the old previous concrete must be
swept with a bonding agent with the rules of the manufacturer
d. The Contractor shall maintain the condition of the parts until the foundry permit is
given by the Board of Directors/ Constuction Management.
9. References/ Concrete Formwork
a. A reference plan/ concrete formwork is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. The
mold shall be in accordance with the shape, size and boundaries of the plot of the
planned concrete results, and shall not be leaky and shall be sufficiently stiff to spot
the occurrence of displacement or sliding of the buffer. The reference planning and
construction should be planned to withstand loads, lateral pressures and allowable

pressures such as the Recomended Practice for Concrete Formwork (ACl.347-68).
b. Material formwork using 18 mm thickness multiplex and camphor wood or equivalent.
The reference surface/ formwork should be flat and smooth and there should be no
indentations, holes or deflection. The connection to the mold is kept straight and flat
in the horizontal and vertical directions
c. Buffering poles should be planned so as to provide the necessary support in the
absence of overstress or displacement of parts of the loaded construction. The
structure of the supporting pole must be strong enough and rigid to support its own
weight and loads on it
d. Prior to pouring, the mold should be scrutinized to ensure the correctness of its
location, its strength and no decline and development when the concrete is poured.
The mold surface must be clean of all kinds of impurities, and given a Mold Release
Agent to prevent the adhesion of the concrete to the mold. Implementation must be
careful to avoid contact with reinforcing steel that can reduce the adhesiveness of
concrete with reinforcement. After the above work is completed and ready for casting,
the Board of Directors must obtain approval to be able to move to the next job
e. Concrete molds may be disassembled with the written consent of the supervisor, or if
the concrete age has exceeded the time as follows :
1) The side of the beam is 48 hours
2) Beam without construction load 7 hours
3) Beam with construction load 21 hours
4) Lane concrete/ roof/ stair 21 hours.
f. With the approval of the Board of Directors/ Constuction Management, the mold can
be dismantled earlier if the test results from specimens having the same condition as
the actual concrete have reached 75% of the strength of the concrete at the age of 28
days. Any permission granted by the Board of Directors/ Constuction Management,
does not reduce or freely the Contractor's responsibility for damage caused by the
dismantling of the mold
g. Dismantling of the mold should be carried out carefully so as not to cause defects on
the concrete surface. In the event of a concrete form that is inconsistent with the
drawing of the plan/ shop drawing, the Contractor shall make repairs or re-establish
h. The surface of the concrete shall be clean from the rest of the molded wood and on
parts of the construction buried in the ground, the mold shall be removed and cleaned
before the loading is carried out.
10. Transportation and Casting
a. Transportation time must be calculated carefully, so that time between mixing and
casting is not more than 1 (one) hour or there is no significant binding difference
between the already casted and the casted concrete
b. If the time required for transportation exceeds the specified time, a retarder shall be
applied with the consent of the Supervisor/ Controller
c. The Contractor shall notify the supervisor at the latest 2 (two) days before the
concrete casting is carried out. Approval to carry out concrete casting relates to the
implementation of molds and installation of reinforcing steel and evidence that the
Contractor shall be able to perform uninterrupted foundry
d. The concrete mix should not be poured if the time since the water mixed on the
cement and the aggregate has gone through 1.5 hours and this time may be reduced,
if the Supervisor considers necessary under certain conditions
e. Casting must be done in such a way as to avoid segregation and change of
reinforcement position. How to dispose with auxiliary tools such as gutters, pipes,
chutes and etc. must be approved by the Supervisor and the tools should always be
clean and free from the remnants of hardening concrete
f. Stirring should not be dropped freely from a height of more than 1.5 meters. Where
possible we should use a fully loaded pipe with the base immersed in the freshly
poured slurry
g. Vibration should not be implemented on concrete that has undergone an initial set or
that has hardened within limits where the concrete will become plastis due to
vibration
h. All foundation of the base of concrete construction that touches the ground should be
given the ground floor as thick as 5 cm in order to guarantee the seats of
reinforcement well and prevent the absorption of cement water by the soil
i. When the concrete casting has to stop while the concrete has become hard and does
not change shape, the part must be cleaned from the cement water layer and the
particles are released until a sufficient depth, so that the concrete is obtained solid.
Immediately after the casting stops, the mortar attached to the reinforcement and the
mold must be cleaned
j. All casting shall be conducted during the day and if it is expected that the casting of a
part can not be completed at the start of the day, it shall not be executed, unless
approved by the Board of Directors / Supervisors can be done at night with the lighting
system already prepared and qualified.
11. Concrete Compaction
a. The Contractor is responsible for providing equipment for the transport and disposal
of concrete with sufficient viscosity to obtain sufficiently solid concrete without the
need for excessive vibration
b. Full concrete compaction must be carried out with a Mechanical vibrator and operated
by an experienced person. The vibration is sufficient to prevent over vibration and is
not allowed to vibrate with the intention to drain the concrete
c. In tight damping areas, vibrations are performed with a high frequency vibrating
device to ensure good concrete filling and compacting. The vibrator should not touch
the reinforcements, especially on the reinforcing bars that have started to harden.
12. Construction Connection
a. A drilling plan or schedule shall be prepared for the completion of one construction
thoroughly, including approval of the location of construction joints. Under certain
circumstances and urgent, the Board of Directors/ Constuction Management may
change the location of the construction joints.
b. Construction joints surface should be clean and roughened by peeling the entire
surface until the solid surface of the concrete is obtained
c. Construction joints should be cultivated in the form of slashes. Where possible avoid
erect construction joints, if required, approval of the Board of Directors/ Constuction
Management is required
d. Before the casting continues, the surface of the concrete must be moistened and given
a layer of grout/ bonding agent immediately before the concrete is poured.
13. Embedded Things in Concrete
a. Channel/ piping, sleeve placement should be such that it does not reduce the strength
of the structure with respect to SNI-2847-2013, NI-2 article 5.7
b. It is not permissible to plant pipes to the concrete structure when shown in the
drawing
c. If the installation is blocked by the installed steel reinforcement, the Contractor shall
immediately consult with the Board of Directors/ Constuction Management
d. Reinforcing steel is not allowed to be shifted or bent to facilitate the installation
without the permission of the Board of Directors/ Constuction Management.
14. Things Planted in Concrete
a. All parts or equipment planted in concrete such as an anchor, hook and other work
related to concrete work, must be installed before concrete casting is done
b. Parts or equipment must be strongly tethered in position so as not to be displaced at
the time of casting concrete
c. The main contractor must notify the other party to do the work before the foundry is
done
d. Empty cavities or parts that must remain empty on objects or equipment to be planted
in the concrete are not filled at the time of casting, should be sealed with material or
size as needed easily removable after casting.
15. Work Defects
a. If the completion of the work, materials or expertise in any part of the work turns out
to be incompatible with the requirements in accordance with the technical
requirements, then the section should be classified as a work defect
b. All such classified work must be dismantled and replaced as desired. All dismantling
and recovery of work classified as such defects and all expenses incurred are wholly
borne by the Contractor.
16. Concrete Testing
a. In general, concrete testing shall follow the provisions of SNI-2847-2013

b. For each type of concrete there shall be a test, which is worked out in a day with
volume up to 5 m3
c. For one test it takes 4 (four) pieces of cube-shaped specimen size of 15cm x 15cm x
15cm.
d. One test item will be tested at 7 (seven) days and the results will be reported
immediately to the Supervisor, while 3 (three) other test items will be tested at 28
days. The test results are the average results of the three specimens. The average
concrete strength limit shall be equal to or greater than the characteristic strength of
250 kg/cm2 for the concrete quality of 20.8 Mpa or K-250, no test specimen shall be
tested less than 60 kg/cm2
e. If necessary, it can be added with one more test item left in the field, left to undergo
the same treatment process as the actual situation.
17. Temperature
a. The temperature of the concrete at the time of casting may not exceed 32 ° C. When
the temperature of Jf is between 27° and 32° C.
b. If at the time of concrete manufacture is in a climate that can lead to a concrete
temperature exceeding 32° C, then the Contractor shall take effective measures, such
as cooling aggregate or casting at night.
18. Ready Mixed Concrete
a. Where the concrete is in the form of ready mixed concrete, the concrete shall be
obtained from sources approved by the Board of Directors/ Supervisors, with the
dosage, mix and delivery method that meet the requirements specified in ASTM C94-
78a.
b. The concrete mix shall be made in accordance with the ratio of the mixture that has
been tested in the laboratory and shall be consistently controlled jointly by the Board
of Directors/ Supervisors and Supplier of Ready Mixed Concrete. Acceptable minimum
strength of concrete is based on test results held at the Laboratory
c. Ready Mixed Concrete Terms and Conditions :
1) Ready mixed concrete temperature before casting may not exceed 30° C. The
addition of additives in the process of ready mixed concrete must be in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions and with the approval of the Board of
Directors/ Constuction Management.
2) When two or more additive types are needed, the implementation must be done
separately. In practice it must comply with ACI 212.2R-71 dan ACl 212.1R-63
3) Once the temperature within the concrete reaches the maximum, the concrete
surface shall be covered with canvas or other insulating material, to maintain heat
such that no noticeable heat difference exists between the inner and outer parts
or the sudden drop in temperature inside the concrete
4) Furthermore, after the above-mentioned covering material is opened, the surface
of the concrete shall still be protected against abrupt understanding.
d. Each stages of casting shall be made of specimens of concrete cube with amount in
accordance with SNI 2847-2013
e. Testing slump concrete arrived in the project site minimum 7 cm by slump test in
accordance with SNI 2847-2013
f. Stirring the mixture should not be more than 2 hours since leaving the batching plant
and the stirring machine must continuously.
19. Concrete Surface Treatment and Repair
a. The concrete must be protected from the effects of heat, so there is no rapid
evaporation
b. Preparation of protection for the possibility of rain, should be noted
c. Concrete must be moistened for at least 7 consecutive days after casting
d. Filling in imperfect (porous) areas with mixture of cement mortar after the opening of
the reference should only be made after obtaining approval and the knowledge of the
Board of Directors
e. If the imperfections can not be fixed to produce the surface expected and accepted by
the Field Directors/ Project Manager, they shall be dismantled and replaced by re-
concretion at the cost of the Contractor
f. The imperfections are irregular, broken/ cracked, bubbles, porous, potholes, bulges,
and others that do not fit the desired shape.
Article 6 Floor Concrete Rebates (Without Reinforcement)
1. Scope of Works
These requirements include concrete work, formwork and installation of cast plastic
backing and other work related to this work..
2. References/ Standard
All design, implementation and material work, if not specified in these requirements must
be based on SNI 6818-2013 provisions
3. Materials
a. Formwork
Timber for buffering and concrete rebate edge casting boards must use class II Meranti
or better species. For casting boards, you can use Meranti or multiplex boards. At the
bottom of the concrete rebate, above the sand fill the base must be coated with cast
plastic with a minimum thickness of 0.35mm.
b. Cement
Cement used accordingly to SNI 2049-2015.
c. Sand
Sand must comply with the requirements in SNI 15-0351-1989
d. Gravel
Gravel or split stone must comply with the requirements in SNI 03-4428-1997.
e. Additional/ Additive Materials

Additional material (admixture), if it is to be used, must obtain approval from the
SUPERVISOR CONSULTANT.
4. Concrete Mixture on The Project Site

a. The project site/ field mortar concrete is equivalent to the quality f'c = 14.5 Mpa or
K-175 in accordance with SNI 6818-2013 supplied by the Contractor. Concrete must be
produced by mechanical mixing using concrete mixer
b. The composition of the concrete mixture shall be approved by the Supervisory
Consultant.
5. Implementation of Works/ Installation

a. Formwork Works
 The structure of the concrete edge forming of the rebates must be firmly designed,
so that at the time of manufacture, foundry, maintenance and dismantling, the
rebound concrete does not expand and has the shape, size, position, alignment, lot
according to plan
 Bounding edge areas that are prone to bloating / expanding should be given extra
strengthening so that the formwork structure is solid. Formwork joints should be
tightly coated and given a leak-proof coating
 On the sand surface should be covered with 0.35 mm thick cast plastic. In the cast
iron connection section should be overlaping as wide as 20 cm which is attached
with a plastic seal tape or folded overlap and staples so as not to cause the
concrete end result to be damaged
 Rebate concrete edge formwork surfaces should be cleaned of all dirt with water
so that all areas are wet before casting is done
 Demolition of column formwork must be done at least 8 hours after final casting is
done, for beam side done at least 3 days, for plate and beam done at least 14 days.
If dismantling will be carried out earlier than such provision, a written consent of
the Supervising Consultant shall be requested by including the calculation of the
strength of the concrete against the burden of carrying on and after dismantling.
b. On Site Rebate Mixture Concrete Work

 All mixed materials and mixed sizes shall be made by means of weighing or
measuring tanks with the approval of the Supervisory Consultant
 Mixed volume mixer scale measure equipment for large volumes of work,
manufactured on the basis of a size of 1 cement slab, made of wood or other
appropriate material and sufficient to function as a cement and sand measure
scale, sturdy, robust and durable construction. For a work with a small volume the
combustion can use a bucket made of plastic or from an iron plate
 Mixing should be done with a concrete mixer or otherwise specified by a
Supervisory Consultant
 During concrete casting, the Contractor shall construct concrete cylinders, made at
the foundry for examination in concrete testing laboratories. Laboratory facilities
are provided by the Contractor with the approval of the Supervisory Consultant. At
the beginning of concrete up to 60 m3 shall be made at least 3 (three) sets of test
specimens and 1 (one) backup set
 The viscosity of the concrete is checked by slump testing. The concrete mixture for
this slump test should be taken directly from the stirring machine using a bucket or
other device that does not absorb water. Testing this slump with an iron cone
head, diameter below 20 cm, diameter more than 10 cm, cone height 30 cm. The
cone is filled with the same 3-ply concrete slabs, each stabbed with steel iron
diameter 16 mm thirty seconds after the top of the cone is evenly distributed, the
cone drawn up and the concrete cone drop is measured. The allowable decrease is
10 ± 2 cm.
c. Rebate Readymix Concrete Work

The quality of mixed materials and quality control for readymix work is the
responsibility of the Contractor. Laboratory and concrete testing equipment provided
by the Contractor.
6. Casting Preparation
 Before mixing begins, the Contractor shall make a mixed design computation for the
required concrete quality (Concrete Mix Design)
 Prior to the time of concrete casting, the Contractor shall report to the Supervisory
Consultant for inspection
 Approval of the commencement of casting will be provided by the Supervision
Consultant upon inspection
 The contractor is required to draft a concrete rebate casting plan area until the entire
work is completed by noting the cast parts (date, area code, cube code, test slump,
casting time and so on). The points of casting connection shall be determined by the
Supervisory Consultant
 Holes or placement of water, plumbing, electrical and other pipes should be carefully
prepared and the Contractor should check mechanical and electrical drawings
 For parts related to practical columns, the walls and other pairs should be provided
with an adequate anchor and requested by the Supervisory Consultant. In this case the
Contractor shall check the shop drawings.
7. Casting
 Concrete should be cast as close as possible to the mold plane to prevent separation of
materials due to the transfer of mortar to the casting area
 Compacted concrete by having to use a mechanical vibrator, placed vertically
Pemadatan beton dengan harus menggunakan alat penggetar mekanis (vibrator),
diletakkan vertical 90o and only in special circumstances allowed to tilt up to 45o
 Compaction with punch or shaking from outside the formwork should not be done
 Since the foundry begins, the work must proceed without stopping. Stopping can only
be done at places approved by the Supervisory Consultant
 For each foundry joint it is required to use a special additive to it and its use in
accordance with the conditions specified and approved by the Supervising Consultant
 The surface of the concrete shall be protected from draining too fast/ unevenly, by
wrapping/ covering the wet burlap or plastic damped or watered continuously during
the first 24 hours or by other methods approved by the Supervisory Consultant
 For vertical casting the maximum height for each casting is 1.5 m
 Special basic concrete rebate from finishing epoxy flooring coating, the quality of
concrete rebates must be minimum f¹c = 14.5 Mpa or K-175. The surface is well
balanced and finely plastered, so that the surface of finishing epoxy flooring is flat and
as thick as 500 microns.
8. Flatness Tolerance
a. The tolerance of deviation at the concrete work end result should not be more than
the following :
b. Lot and surface plane fields and field meeting areas :
 2 mm deviation every 3 meter square

 Maximum deviation width of 15 mm on the whole plane.
Article 7 Steel Structures
1. General
a. Steel Structure Works are parts in which shop drawings as the plan are expressed as
steel structures, as well as parts which by their nature use of steel, such as columns,
beams, roof trusses, wall frames and so on
b. For the execution of such work the Contractor shall draw shop drawings of steel
structure drawings including details of installation, cutting, bolting, bolt holes, welding,
stiffener, measurements and others that are technically required, especially for
fabrication and installation
c. The chosen Contractors which used if there is any should be known and approved by
the Board of Directors / Supervisors
d. The Contractor shall perform steel work in accordance with the 1983 Steel Building
Planning Regulations of Indonesia.
2. Materials
a. Profile steel and pipe in accordance with SNI 7563-2011

b. Ordinary Steel Bolts according to SNI 1729-2015
c. The welding electrodes follow the SNI 03-1729-2002.
3. Fabrication
a. General
Labors, the builders and workers are to be employed should be those who understand
their field of work and those skilled in the field who are capable of performing the work
properly in accordance with the Directors' directives and thoroughness is essential to
ensure that all parts are compatible with each other at the time of installation. The Board
of Directors of the Supervisor shall have the complete freedom to conduct a job
inspection. No work is dismantled or prepared for shipment before review and approval.
Any work that is defective or incompatible with the shop drawing of this plan or
specification will be refused and should be promptly corrected. Any work that is defective
or incompatible with the drawing of this plan or specification will be refused and should
be promptly corrected. The fabrication/ manufacturing contractor shall provide at his own
expense all the work, scaffolding equipment and so forth required in the job inspection
relationship. The fabrication/ manufacturing contractor shall introduce the Montage
Contractor for any time to inspect the work and to obtain information on the means and
other related to the time of installation in the workplace. The Montase Contractor does
not have the authority to provide instructions on how to manufacture the products.
b. Measurement Patterns
The measurement (pattern) and other equipment required to ensure the accuracy of the
work shall be provided by the Fabrication Contractor. All measurements should be made
using approved steel bands. The measurements of the steel work shown on the shop
drawing are considered sizes at 25° C.
1) Straighten
Before any other work is done on the plate, all plates should be checked for clarity
evenly. All the rods are checked for the straightness, shall be free of twisting, if
necessary should be fixed so that when the plates are arranged it will look completely
arrayed tightly
2) Cutting
Steel work can be cut by cutting scissor, sawing or welding cutters. The surface
obtained from the cuts shall be completed elbows against the cut, proper and flat
plane according to the required size
3) Permitted Tool and Grinding Machine Works

When the plate is cut, sawed or cut with cutting weld, the cutting is allowed to cast as
much as 3 mm of metal, on a 6 mm thick plate also on a plate larger than 12 mm thick
4) Cutting with Welding Cutter

The welding cutting is mechanically driven and directed by a pattern as well as moving
at a steady pace. The edge produced by the cutting wire should be clean and straight
and to smooth the cut edges it should be used grinders. The grind moves in the
direction of the cutting weld, the edges must be finished in such a way that it is free of
all iron impurities
5) Welding & Weld Supervision Work

The welding work shall be done by the welder, under the direct supervision of a
person who, according to the opinion of the Board of Directors/ Construction
Management, has the appropriate training and experience for the operation of such
work. The Contractor shall submit to the Supervisory Board of Directors for approval,
then the method shall not be altered without further approval.
Specific details concerning the preparation of the connection, the manner of welding
of the type and size and strength of the electric current for the welding shall be
proposed by the contractor to obtain the approval of the Board of Directors of
Supervisor before the electrical welding works can be performed. The size of the
electrode, current and voltage, and the speed of the electric arc used in the electricity
shall be as stated by the electric welding plant and shall not be deviated without the
written approval of the Board of Directors/ Construction Management.
Plates to be welded shall be free of iron impurities, oils, paints, rubber or other
coatings that may affect the quality of the weld. Weld with crack shrinkage, cracks in
the base material, perforated and less precise location should be removed.
6) Drilling
a) All holes shall be drilled for the entire thickness of the material. If there is
possibities, all plates, pieces and so on should be clamped together to create a
hole and drill through the entire thickness at once. When using a fitting bolt on
one of the holes then this hole is drilled smaller and then enlarged to reach the
actual size.
b) Another way is that the trunks can be perforated by themselves using a patterning
drill machine. After drilling, all the iron impurities must be removed and the plates
and so on can be removed if necessary.
The diameter of the bolt hole, except for the fitting bolt, is 1.50 mm larger than
the diameter shown in the shop drawing. The diameter of the holes for the bolt
fitting shall be within the given tolerance.
In this case using a non-drill-fitting hole penetrating as well as the entire thickness
of its elements, the hole can be drilled to a smaller size first and then during the
experimental montage.
7) Montage in The Workshop (Trial Montage)

a) Before being elevated, steel work shall be installed temporarily (trial montage) on
a Contractor Manufacturing workshop area which is sheltered from the weather
for inspection by the Board of Directors on alignment and precisely all parts and
connections
b) If there is a difference in position, then adjacent rods shall be mutilated together
in the desired position complete with their plates, transverse girders and all
reinforcing rods. Temporary connections should be thoroughly connected
thoroughly by approved means such as wartel, jack, bolts
c) Sculpting at montage is only to bring the parts to the desired position and not to
enlarge the hole or damage the material.
8) Giving Mark fo The Final Installation

a) After the montage of the experiment and after obtaining the approval of the
Supervisory Board, but not yet released, each part must be clearly marked (with
sculpture and paint). Paints of different colors are used to distinguish the same
parts
b) 2 (two) copies of the shop drawing which shown the marks in proper, the
Fabrication Contractor give to the Board of Directors of the Supervisor and the
Montase Contractor of the building with free of charge, upon delivery of the work
of the steel.
9) Painting in The Workshop

a) After dismantling, as a successful continuation of the experimental montage, the
surface of all steelwork, except on parts which worked with tools machine and on
the platen, shall be thoroughly cleaned so as to be clean the metal by sandblasting
or by means of Others approved
b) After all surfaces are clean and dry, or basic materials with a single layer of
wheeze, or other protective materials when specifically specified for such work.
10) Hand Over For Final Installation (Project Site Montage)

a) Provision of Bolts & etc.
 Fabrication/ Manufacturing Contractors shall supply the full amount of bolts,
nuts, bolt rings and so on necessary to complete the project site/ field work
with an additional 5% for each of the nut, bolt and the bolt ring size
 The Fabrication/ Manufacturing Contractor shall also provide a complete set of
bolts with nuts and rings, as much as 50% of the total number of hard steel
bolts required in the project site/ field for one span
 Upon on delivering, the Fabrication Contractor will submit/ deliver for free, to
the Board of Directors of the Supervisor and the Montase Contractor, and the
location of which shall be used on the work of all bolts submitted.
b) Bolts, Nuts and Bolt Rings (Other than The Hard Steel)
 All bolts and nuts, black or fitting bolts shall have a forged head, precisely
concentric and elbows with its trunk, with hexagonal and nuts head (except
when other head types are required in shop drawings)
 The bolt shaft must be straight, fine and good. When a bolt is fitted, the
diameter should be like the diameter shown on the shop drawing and must be
carefully grouped according to the length of the threaded stem. The diameter
of the bolt ring hole is 1.50 mm larger than the diameter of the bolt
 Steel bolt should be a black bolt that is 1.50 mm smaller than the diameter of
the hole where the bolts are used
 Hard steel bolts, nuts and bolt rings, when required to be provided by a
montage contractor for use in employment shall be of the same size as the
shop drawing.
c) Transportation and Handling

Transport and handling manner of the steel bar work shall be in accordance with
the manner approved by the Board of Directors prior to delivery, to ensure
protection from damage, special attention is required in packing and retrofitting
during transport, handling and montage of the steel work.
d) Hand over, Acceptance and Maintance The Works

 The Manufacturing/ Fabrication Contractor is responsible for maintaining the
safety of the steel work. And repair all damages until handed over and
accepted by the Montage Contractor. The Montage Contractor will accept all
steel work in the project site, or at any other location of delivery as required
and where will disassemble, transportation to the project site where necessary
and keep it safe from damages until it is finally installed.
 The Montase Contractor will deliver the receipt in 2 (two) copies for all Hand
over, and is responsible for any warehouses and rental of the warehouses that
may occur due to his negligence and failure to accept the steel work if so
requested.
 Immediately upon accepted of the handover of the steel work, the Montase
Contractor, shall promptly notify the BoD or its Deputy, any loss or mismatch
of the steel bar and shall also report in writing to the Board of Directors any
damage and prohibited, or failing to do so Thus, he shall fix any damages and
defects that occurred before and after the handover, at his own expenses.
4. Erection
a. General
1) The Montase Contractor shall provide all necessary scaffolding and equipment and
establish it in the workplace, installing and rivet the bolt and/ or welding of all
metal work shall not be installed before how to instal, tools and so forth shall be
approved by the Board of Directors.
2) All work must be done carefully and be carefully installed, the drift used has a
diameter smaller than the bolt hole, and is used to carry the parts in its proper
position as required below. Excessive use of hammerhead which may damage or
disrupt the material is not permitted.
3) Any errors in workshop work that make it difficult for montage work and make it
difficult to dismantle parts of the work using moderate drift should be reported to
the Board of Directors/ Construction Management.
4) Surfaces worked with tools machine should be cleaned before installation. Koppel
and field connections are generally filled with drifter and auxiliary bolts of 50%
before being riveted or bolted permanently. In this installation and disposal, at
least two holes in each group are filled with drift parallel when possible, and at
least 40% of the holes are filled with bolts.
5) Furthermore at least 10% of the holes in a group are riveted or permanently
bolted before the montage or drift bolts are removed (removed).
b. Drifts, Stamp Setting Bolts and etc.
1) The Montage Contractor shall provide for its own use all parallel drift montage
which may be required and shall remain its property and be removed from the
workplace upon completion of the work at its own expense.
2) After completion the work of all excessive bolts, setting bolts and so on shall be
handed over to the BOD at the expense of the Montase Contractor.
c. Parallel Drift for Montage
Threaded stem of the parallel drift on Montage is made according to the required
diameter, and the length is not less than the amount of thickness of material to be
drifted by the drift plus one drift diameter.
d. Steel Frame
A steel frame rod is mounted on such a pedestal, so that the steel frame can form an
opposing deflection as shown in the plan drawing. The pedestals are not removed
before all the connections (except short connections at their peak), have been made
permanent. The installation of a permanent bolt shall not be undertaken without the
approval of the Supervisory Board, and in general such approval shall not be granted
until such landscape has been installed with transverse girders, reinforcement rods,
and stamp bolts as required. Once the steel frame is installed, a new connection of the
top bar is made permanent.
e. Use of Hard Steel, Bolts for Final Installation :
1) Installation
a) Each installation is made together with a bolt so that the various parts and
plates meet tightly with each other thoroughly. A total of 50% of the holes
shall be filled with a minimum of 10% bolt, or on each cut and plate of at least
two holes filled with parallel drift. Hard steel bolts should be fitted with
required bolt rings, a bolt under and a bolt bottom the bolt head nut. It should
be noted that the bolt ring is attached with its concave facing out.
b) Insert and tighten hard steel bolts arranged in such a way that it is always tight
and can not be started before the connection has been inspected and
approved by the BOD or its representative.
c) The nuts shall be tightened only to the plane perpendicular to the aperture.
The lower field of the bolt head of the bolt should not deviate from the plane
perpendicular to the bolt axle of more than 3.50 degrees, using a raperd bolt
ring may be performed where necessary. Bolts protrude through a nut not less
than 1.5 mm and not exceeding 4.5 mm. The stamp bolts used for starting
bolts can be used on the connection.
2) Bolts Tightening
a) Hard steel bolts can be tightened by hand or by keys driven-machine.
b) The wrench must be of an approved type and may indicate when the required
torque is reached. The wrench should be frequently checked and must be adjusted
to achieve the required tension or torque or as directed by the Board of Directors/
Construction Management.
3) The required tension on Bolts

The following table provides the attainable tension on the hard steel bolts with the
various diameters used in the work. These values are obtained as follows :
a) Column (2) denotes the required tension on each of the bolts mounted on the
work fields, required as 85% of the broken load test on the bolts.
b) Column (3) and (4) are columns (2) plus 15% and state the tension to be
achieved by calibration of other mechanical or wrench impacts, sparing of 15%
for various techniques shall be requested by the Supervisor Directors.
c) Column (5) is the approximate number of torques required to drive the nuts
against the tension in Column (2), with the following assumptions and estimates :
Torque = 0.0175 X Bolt diameter X Bolt tension

(lbs.ft) (inches) (lbs)
80 % of the
Bolts
experimental Calibration Load Torque
Diameter
load
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Inches Lbs Lbs Tons Lb.ft
¾ 24.000 27.450 12.29 315

7/8 30.400 34.450 15.61 465
1 39.900 45.880 20.48 700
11/8 47.650 54.800 24.46 940
Checking the tension/ torque connection is done by the Montage Contractor and
the Board of Directors of the Supervisor will conduct a torque checking test in the
project site/ field. Any loose bolts should be adjusted according to the need.
Special attention should be given to the tightened bolt group which may be loose,
and tightened back to achieve the required tension.
5. Steel Painting
Examples of such materials and goods, stored by the Supervisor or the Owner as the
assignor to serve as the basis of rejection if the materials and goods used are not in
accordance with the quality and its nature.
a. General
All steel constructions to be installed need to be painted in the factory with approved
base paint except in the areas to be worked with machine tools e.g. for placement.
Field paint consists of :
1) The cleaning of all field connections and areas that have been painted in the
workshop, as directed by the Board of Directors, which has been damaged at the
time of transport or installation by other fields as ordered by the Board of
Directors/ Construction Management, where the underlying base paint has been
damaged.
2) The use of basic paint and similar materials as required in the workshop painting in
the fields listed on 1 above.
3) The use of final paint as required on a particular work, for all open fields of steel
work.
b. Cleaning
The surface cleaning of the building's steel work should be clean and peeled by
sandblasting or by means of Others approved, to become a clean metal, by removing
all the grease, olie, rust, mud or anything else that is sticking to it. The surface area of
the cleansed surface should be able to be simultaneously covered with a base paint
and painted immediately after cleaning, before oxidation occurs. In case of oxidation
(corrosion) the surface must be cleaned again before basic painting is performed.
c. Painting
1) Paints may be used with approved handwritten or in the manner as required by
the Board of Directors/ Construction Management.
2) Painting can not be done in foggy, damp or dusty weather or in other bad weather,
unless necessary measures are taken in accordance with the opinion of the BOD to
counter the effects of the weather on the work.
3) The surface to be painted should be dry and dustless. The next layer is not given
before the previous paint layer has dried completely. The covering layer is applied
over the base paint within approximately six months but not faster than 48 hours
after basic painting. When this happens then the steel surface needs to be cleaned
again or painted again as described above.
4) The paint (including spraying when ordered by the Board of Directors) should be
swept firmly on the steel surface, bolts at each corner, plate joints, grooves and so
on, then spread the paint firm evenly and proper.
5) Any part which can hold water, or may be permeated by water, filled with thick
paint, or when ordered by the Board of Directors, by using waterproof cement or
other approved materials prior to the completion of the base paint.
6) Every finished layer should look the same and covered evenly. The firm evenly use
of paint is up to 12.5 m² per liter for the next layer.
CHAPTER 3
AHITECTURAL WORKS
CONTENTS
ARCHITECTURAL WORKS
Page
Article 1 Scope of Architectural Works

1. Floor Works ........................................................................................... 1
2. Wall Works ............................................................................................ 1
3. Ceiling Works......................................................................................... 1
4. Doors and Windows Works ................................................................... 1
5. Painting Works ...................................................................................... 1
6. Sanitary and Fitting Works .................................................................... 1
7. Fitment Works ....................................................................................... 1
8. Façade Works ........................................................................................ 1
Article 2 Non Structural Concrete Works
1. Concrete Quality ................................................................................... 2
2. Materials Requirements ........................................................................ 2
3. Terms of Implementation ...................................................................... 3
Article 3 Non Structural Iron Works
1. Scope of Works...................................................................................... 4
2. Material Requirements ......................................................................... 4
3. Terms of the Implementation ............................................................... 5
Article 4 Assembly Works
1. Light Brick Wall Assembly Works........................................................... 5
2. Light Brick Wall for Radiolagy Laboratory Assembly Works .................. 6
3. Gypsum Partition Wall Assembly Works ............................................... 7
4. Granite Tile Wall Assembly Works......................................................... 8
5. Ceramic and Homogenous Tile Assembly Works................................... 10
6. Vinyl Floor Covering Works ................................................................... 12
7. Waterproofing Installation Works ......................................................... 16
Article 5 Plastering Works
1. Plastering on The Light Brick Wall Works .............................................. 17
2. Plastering of Lightweight Brick Wall in Infectious Room Works ............ 18
3. Concrete Plastering Works .................................................................... 19
Article 6 Metal Door Works
1. Scope of Works...................................................................................... 20
Article 7 Fire-Resistant Doors Works
1. Scope of Works...................................................................................... 21
Article 8 Aluminum Frames, Glass Aluminum Doors and Windows Works
1. Scope of Works...................................................................................... 22
Article 9 Ceiling Works
1. Ceiling Frame Works.............................................................................. 23
2. Gypsum Ceiling Cover Works ................................................................ 23
Article 10 Hanger and Locker Works
1. Scope of Works ................................................................................... 25
2. Materials Requirements ..................................................................... 25
3. Terms of Implementation ................................................................... 26
Article 11 Painting Works
1. Walls Painting Works .......................................................................... 26
2. Ceiling Painting Works ........................................................................ 28
3. Steel Painting Works ........................................................................... 29
4. Floor and Walls Painting Works .......................................................... 30
Article 12 Railing Works
1. Scope of Works ................................................................................... 31
Article 13 Handrail Works
1. Scope of Works ................................................................................... 32
3. Installation .......................................................................................... 33
Article 14 Sanitair Works
1. Scope of Works ................................................................................... 33
3. Installation .......................................................................................... 34
Article 15 Toilet Partition/ Cubicle Works
1. Scope of Works ................................................................................... 35
3. Installation .......................................................................................... 36
4. Terms of Maintenance ........................................................................ 36
5. Terms of Acceptance .......................................................................... 36
Article 16 Sound Silencer Insulation Works
1. Scope of Works ................................................................................... 37
Article 17 Concrete Desk
1. Scope of Works ................................................................................... 37
2. Materials and Installments ................................................................. 38
Article 18 Aluminum Composite Panel (ACP) Installation Works

1. Scope of Works ................................................................................... 38
2. Control of Works ................................................................................. 38
3. Components ....................................................................................... 38
4. Materials ............................................................................................. 39
5. Implementation .................................................................................. 39
Article 19 Curtain Wall with Aluminum Frame Works

1. Scope of Works ................................................................................... 40
2. Control of Works ................................................................................. 40
3. System Description ............................................................................. 41
4. Wind Pressure..................................................................................... 42
5. Structure Requirements...................................................................... 42
6. Air Leak ............................................................................................... 42
7. Water Leak .......................................................................................... 42
8. Soundproofing .................................................................................... 43
9. Materials and Products ....................................................................... 43
10. Shop Drawings .................................................................................... 44
11. Fabrication and Assembling ................................................................ 45
12. Delivery and Project Site Storage ........................................................ 45
13. Implementation (Installation on Structural Building).......................... 45
Article 20 Curtain Wall Glass Works

1. Scope of Works ................................................................................... 47
2. Control Works ..................................................................................... 47
3. Materials ............................................................................................. 47
4. Implementation .................................................................................. 47
5. Protection ........................................................................................... 48
Article 21 Sealing Works

1. Scope of Works ................................................................................... 48
2. Control of Works ................................................................................. 48
3. Description.......................................................................................... 49
4. Materials and Products ....................................................................... 49
5. Implementation .................................................................................. 49
Article 22 The Roof Closing Works

1. Scope of Works ................................................................................... 49
3. Terms of The Installation .................................................................... 49
CHAPTER 3
ARCHITECTURAL WORKS
Article 1 Scope of Works

The scope of this architectural work provides the manpower, materials/ equipment and tools
that needed for the implementation of the Building Project of the Integrated Laboratory
Building of Jember University, which includes the following tasks :
1. Floor Works
a. Granite tiles flooring work
b. Homogeneous tiles flooring work
c. Ceramic tiles flooring work
d. Epoxy flooring work
e. Screeding and water proofing work
f. Stepnosing work.
2. Wall Works
a. Lightweight brick
b. Partition work
c. Plastering and smoothing
d. Ceramic tiles work.
3. Ceiling Works
a. Gypsum ceiling work
b. Calsiboard ceiling Work.
4. Doors and Windows Works

a. Door Frame and Metal Door work
b. Aluminum Frame, Door and Window work
c. Cubicle Panel work.
5. Painting Works
a. Wall painting work
b. Ceiling painting work
c. Water Proofing work
6. Sanitary and Fitting Works

a. Squat Closet work
b. Sitting Closet work
c. Washbasin and Faucet work
d. Tap/ fauchet work
e. Mirror work
f. Floor Drain work.
ARCHITECTURAL WORKS Page 1

ARCHITECTURAL WORKS page 2
7. Fitment Works
a. Stairs Railing work
b. Void Safety Railing work
c. Washbasin Table work
8. Façade Works
a. Aluminum Composite Panel
b. Curtain Wall
Article 2 Non Structural Concrete Works
1. Concrete Quality :
The quality of concrete for Non Structural Concrete work is fc = 20.754/ 20.8 Mpa (K-250).
2. Materials Requirements
a. Portland Cement
1) Must comply with the terms and conditions specified NI-8
2) The recomended cement are Semen Gresik or Semen Tiga Roda
3) It is not permissible to replace the cement brands which approved by the Board of
Directors/ Consultant Management for no apparent reason
4) Replacement of cement with other brands must be approved by the Board of
Directors/ Consultant Management.
b. Sand for concrete
Sand should be clean and free of organic materials, mixture of mud, clay and so on and
must meet the requirements of sand grain composition and hardness as required.
c. Coral/ Split
1) Must be clean, good quality not porous and has chunk size and gradation
2) Storage/ accumulation stack of sand and coral concrete before the material mixed
must be separated from each other, so it can be guaranteed and known that these
two materials are not mixed to get the correct comparison of concrete mix.
d. Water
1) Must be clean fresh water containing no oil, alkaline acids and other organic
materials and must comply with NI-3 section 10
2) If it is deemed necessary, the Board of Directors/ Consultant of the Construction
Management may request to the Contractor that the water used shall be water
that has been inspected in an official materials inspection laboratory.
e. Rebar
Used U-24 quality concrete rebar, the bar must be clean of oil/ fat coating, free from
defects such as shales and other impurities. The rebar cross section is round and meets
the requirements of both size and quality .
f. SNI-2847-2013 Terms
Contractors are required to comply with the provisions concerning Concrete Works as
specified in SNI-2847-2013 and where it is deemed necessary to check the quality of
the materials to be used in the official and legal inspection laboratory at the
Contractor's expense
g. Operating Procedures
1) Regulation of structural work SNI-2847-2013; NI-2
2) Indonesia Portland Cement Regulation SNI 2049-2015; NI-8
3) Local Government Development Regulations
4) Oral and/ or written instruction and warning whicih given by the Board of
Directors/ Construction Management
5) American Society for Testing and Material (ASTM)
6) American Concrete Institute (ACI).
3. Terms of The Implementation

a. Reinforce Concrete Bar
1) Installation of concrete reinforcement shall be in accordance with the As Built
Drawings
2) Reinforcing concrete shall be securely bonded to ensure that the rebar does not
moves from it position during casting and shall be free of formwork boards by
installing concrete decking.
b. How to mixed the mortar

1) Mortar mixed should be using a mortar mixing equipment or a molten concrete
2) The comparison for Portland mortar cement, sands and corals/ splits must
approved in advance by the Board of Directors/ Consultant of the Construction
Management and the quality as specified in the description and terms shall be
obtained
3) During the mixing of the material, the viscosity of the concrete mixture should be
monitored by checking the slump on each new mixture. Test slump of at least 5
Cm and maximum 10 Cm.
c. Casting The Concrete

1) The Contractor is required to perform the preparatory work by cleaning and
watering the mold until saturation, inspection of the sizes, altitude, reinforcement
examination and retaining placement
2) Concrete casting should be done as best as possible using a vibrator to ensure that
the concrete is solid enough, it should avoid the occurrence of corals/ splits that
may weaken the construction
3) If the concrete founding will be discontinued and will be continued on the
following day then the foundation stops must be known and approved by the
Board of Directors/ Consultant of the Construction Management.
d. Formworks
1) The formwork board shall be installed in accordance with the form and size
according to the As Built Drawings. Material of the equivalent Meranti wood board
type that meets the requirements of NI-2 section 5.1
2) The formwork shall be fitted with retrofits so that it is sufficiently strong for the
position during the casting
3) The formwork should be tight, no gaps, no leaks, slippery surface, free of dirt such
as saw blade, wood pieces, soil and so on before casting and should be easily
disassembled without damaging the casting
4) Preamble of new formworks shall be made after fulfilling the requirements
stipulated in SNI-2847-2013.
e. Wire Ties
1) Steel Rebar wire buckles made of soft steel and zinc plated, with wire diameters
larger or equal to 0.40 mm
2) Must meet the requirements specified in SNI-2847-2013.
f. "Miscellaneous items" :
Holes and openings that are left on the concrete of the former work path when the
concrete must be filled with concrete. Used concrete as specified and with surface
smoothing.
Article 3 Non Structural Steel Reinforced Works
1. Scope of Works
This work includes the installation of rebar to frames, poles anchor, roofing truss plate,
steel plate, as well as all the details mentioned/ shown in As Built Drawings.
a. Use U-24 quality steel bar concrete
b. The cross-section of concrete steel materials are round.

a. The making of reinforcement/ bar bending and its installation shall be in accordance
with those specified in the Shop Drawings
b. The Contractor shall be responsible for the perfection and correctness of all specified
requirements
c. The Contractor shall follow all instructions concerning the requirements of the
equipment, whether contained in the worksheet description and requirement or
listed in the Shop Drawings
d. If there might be any damage to the installation result, the Contractor shall be
required to repair it without compromising the quality, the entire repair of all works
shall be the responsibility of the Contractor
e. An anchor installment and other formations must be fused with a concrete slab, the
installation must be precise and strong in it place.
Article 4 Assembly Work
1. Lightweight Brick Wall Assembly Work
a. Scope of Works
Lightweight brick wall works are covering light masonry work for building walls and
all the details shown in Shop Drawings or as directed by the Board of Directors /
Construction Management Consultant.
b. Materials Requirements
1) Lightweight bricks installed are the best quality materials of Autoclaved
Aerated Concrete (AAC) equivalent to Hebel. The terms of lightweight brick
must comply with the provisions in SNI 6897-2008
2) Lightweight bricks used are a nominal size of 20 x 60 x 10 cm, angled, equal size
and color
3) Mortar material in lightweight brick masonry work using instant cement
equivalent of MU-301, as well as other additives required in accordance with the
recommendations of the manufacturer.
4) Delivery of instant mixed mortar material should be in seal. Storage of this
material in the warehouse must follow the terms of recommended storage
conditions by the manufacturer.
c. Terms of The Implementation

1) The materials that are going to be used, before being installed, the sample
materials must first be submitted to the Board of Directors/ Construction
Management Consultant, a minimum of 3 (three) samples of the different
products, for approval
2) Before the installation are done, the concrete floor surface where the light brick
will be installed must be clean and completely flat - measured by waterpass.
Attach sufficient instructions regarding the surface flatness, so that the light
brick assembly are made completely flattened
3) Mortar thickness suggested in the installation of lightweight brick is 10 mm
(millimeters), or as recommended by the manufacturer
4) Installation of light brick should be done in gradually, each stage of the wall
assembly must not exceed 1 meter
5) The new assembly works should be continued after the previous assembly works
actually hardened
6) Light brick wall assembly works is followed by practical cast column. Light brick
wall surface with an area of up to 12 m2, must be added with the columns and
beams reinforcing practical with column size 13 x 13 cm, with the primary of 4
reinforcement bar, minimum Ø 10 mm, bugle Ø 6 mm at a distance of 20 cm,
the distance between the each columns are made up to 3 (three) meters or an
area of 12 m2
7) The place where the anchor frames are must be cast with the mixture of
1 mortar cement : 2 sand : 3 gravel as bond
8) Perforations due to the light brick masonry by the scaffolding are in not justified
9) Part of the light brick masonry associated with each piece of concrete work
should be given a reinforced cutting steel rods Ø 10 mm with distance of 75 cm,
were first planted well on the concrete work and the part that is embedded in
the light brick masonry of at least 30 cm, unless otherwise determined by the
Board of Directors/ Construction Management Consultant
10) Light Brick walls assembly should be straight, and completely perpendicular to
the floor as well as a flat field. Flatness of the wall is measured by water pass
11) Light brick installation work which forms the spaces that are sterile (LAB), and
compartment spaces, installation of the light brick walls may be filled up to the
platform or beam
12) On the part of the brick walls that are exposed to installations such as ducting,
wastewater/ clean water sewer/ plumbing, or other installations, the wall work
assembly must be included in the category of radiative space, sterile and
compartments, must be done towards completion of certain supporting
materials that can meet the requirements of these spaces, so it may avoid the
danger of radiation leaks that is radiative, fire leakage in compartments, and air
leaks in sterile room requiring of air cleanliness quality accordance to the quality
control in specific requirements level of cleanliness class.
2. Light Brick Wall for Radiology Laboratory Assembly Works
a. Scope of Works
The brick walls assembly works is covers the work of light brick masonry for the walls
of the radiology room and all the details indicated in the shop drawings or as directed
by the Board of Directors/ Construction Management Consultant.
1) Light bricks installed are the best quality materials equivalent to Hebel. The
terms of light brick must comply with the provisions in SNI 6897-2008
2) Light bricks used are a nominal size of 20 x 60 x 10 cm, angled, equal size and
color
3) Mortar material in light brick masonry work using instant cement equivalent of
MU-301, as well as other additives required in accordance with the
recommendations of the manufacturer.
4) Delivery of instant mixed mortar material should be in seal. Storage of this
material in the warehouse must follow the terms of recommended storage
conditions by the manufacturer.

Management Consultant, a minimum of 3 (three) samples of the different
products, for approval
2) Before the installation are done, the concrete floor surface where the light brick
will be installed must be clean and completely flat - measured by waterpass.
Attach sufficient instructions regarding the surface flatness, so that the light
brick assembly are made completely flattened
3) Mortar thickness suggested in the installation of lightweight brick is 10 mm
(millimeters), or as recommended by the manufacturer
4) Installation of light brick should be done in gradually, each stage of the wall
assembly must not exceed 1 meter
5) The new assembly works should be continued after the previous assembly works
actually hardened
6) Light brick wall assembly works is followed by practical cast column. Light brick
wall surface with an area of up to 12 m2, must be added with the columns and
beams reinforcing practical with column size 13 x 13 cm, with the primary of 4
reinforcement bar, minimum Ø 10 mm, bugle Ø 6 mm at a distance of 20 cm,
the distance between each columns are made up to 3 (three) meters or an
area of 12 m2
7) The new light brick wall assembly work may be continued after the previous wall
assembly has actually hardened
8) The place where the anchor frames are must be cast with the mixture of
1 mortar cement : 2 sand : 3 gravel as bond
9) Perforations due to the scaffolding on light brick masonry assembly are not
justified
10) Part of the light brick masonry associated with each piece of concrete work
should be given a reinforced cutting steel rods Ø 10 mm with distance of 75 cm,
were first planted well on the concrete work and the part that is embedded in
the light brick masonry of at least 30 cm, unless otherwise determined by the
11) Light Brick walls assembly should be straight, and completely perpendicular to
the floor as well as a flat field. Flatness of the wall is measured by water pass
12) Light brick installation work which forms the spaces that are sterile (LAB), and
compartment spaces, installation of the light brick walls may be filled up to the
platform or beam
13) On the part of the brick walls that are exposed to installations such as ducting,
wastewater/ clean water sewer/ plumbing, or other installations, the wall work
assembly must be included in the category of radiative space, sterile and
compartments, must be done towards completion of certain supporting
materials that can meet the requirements of these spaces, so it may avoid the
danger of radiation leaks that is radiative, fire leakage in compartments, and air
leaks in sterile room requiring of air cleanliness quality accordance to the quality
control in specific requirements level of cleanliness class.
3. Gypsum Partition
a. Scope of Works
Gypsum partition walls assembly works covers partition walls which separating the
space inside the main building complete with the metal frame. This partition wall
works is in accordance with all the detail shown in Shop Drawings or as directed by
the Board of Directors/ Supervisor Consultant.
1) Materials used are 12 mm Gypsum with the best quality equivalent to
Jayaboard.
2) The Gypsum materials must be elbows/ squared, should have average thickness,
and with no any defectives
3) The gypsum requirements must meet the provisions of the NI-10 and PU BB
1970 (NI-3)
4) Hollow metal framework of the partition is 2 x 2 cm and 4 x 4 cm, the frame
thickness must follow the order to match the specifications and what specified
in the Shop Drawings
5) Supporting materials such as compound and textile fabric tape/ strimin and
gypsum screw used in accordance with the technical recommendations of the
gypsum manufacturer
6) The materials used must be the best quality, with the product of the branded
manufacturer that has been tested to function for the Indonesia climate, and are
the local products which are previously approved by the Board of Directors/
Supervisor Consultant.

Management Consultant, at least 1 sheet of gypsum and 1 hollow shaft, for

approval
2) The partition wall mounted to the ceiling and hung by using strong hanger
according to the standard, namely steel wire with a lead screw Ø 0.3 / 0.4 mm
3) Gypsum mounted in 2 surface. Hollow metal framework placed within 60 cm
alternately between metal framework of 2 x 4 cm and 4 x 4 cm
4) The distance between the gypsum screws should not more than 40 cm. The
connection between the gypsum sheets are flattened by using compound, and
must be smoothly polished in order to flatten
5) The installation process should use angled aluminum and vertical checking must
also has to be done by using thread/ strand. For horizontal checking should use a
hose filled with water to obtain an equal level
6) Perforations due to the scaffolding on the brick wall assembly are not justified
7) To the hole where the door frame or window frame must be made angled and
sturdiness in accordance with the widths of the door frame or window frame
8) Not allowed to installed any broken pieces of gypsum
9) Implementation of the installation of gypsum partition walls should be careful,
neat and completely perpendicular to the platform as well as forming a flat
surface field
10) Partition walls assembly works can be acceptable/ submitted when the surface
of gypsum is flat and ready to be finishing coated with materials (paint or
wallpaper).
4. Wall Granite Tile Wall Works
a. Scope of Works
Granite Tile wall works covers the entire work on the exterior and interior wall of the
main building complete with angled bracket frames. Granite wall works is in
accordance with all details shown in Shop Drawings or as directed by the Board of
Directors/ Supervisor Consultant.
b. Material Requirements
1) Granite Tiles used for wall finishing are ex. Granito, or equivalent. The granite
type in this work used : Polished (shiny)
2) Granite Tiles installed should meet the regulatory requirements/ standarization
of materials: General Requirements for Building Materials in Indonesia (PUBI)
1982, SII and SNI
3) The materials used must be the best quality, with the product of the branded
manufacturer that has been tested to function for the Indonesia climate, and are
the local products which are previously approved by the Board of Directors/
Supervisor Consultant.

1) The materials that are used before being installed must first be submitted for
example, to the Board of Directors/ Construction Management Consultant, for
their approval
2) The unapproved samples should be immediately replaced by the Contractors at
no extra cost. The samples should be accompanied with a laboratory test report
or certificate on the name of each material. Costs required for laboratory tests
by the Contractor must already be included in the bidding document
3) Contractor should have experts and specializes consultant in granite, whom as
experts who joined the business entity or association of cooperation in the
handling of the project (expertise in the panel installation/ granite tiles by
means of dry/ wet system)
4) Contractor whom implements the work must have full automatic equipment
(cutting machine, polishing machine, circle cutting machine); as stated by a
written statement by the Contractor and shown to the Client/ Owner
5) Prior to the installation of the granite tiles, the base surface of the brick wall/
lightweight concrete block or concrete wall should be in a state of flat surfaces
and are ready to be assembled with granite tiles.
5. Ceramic and Homogenous Tile Assembly Works
a. Scope of Works
The scope of this work includes all installations of items which are the Homogenous
Tile and Ceramic floors and building walls or the detail shown in Shop Drawings or as
directed by the Board of Directors/ Construction Management Consultant.
b. General Terms
1) Prior to installation, the Contractor must submit an example of Homogenous Tile
or Ceramic, a minimum of 3 (three) examples of each use to be able to decide,
agreed and approval by the Board of Directors/ Construction Management
Consultant
2) The contractor must first submit shop drawings for the approval of the Planner
Consultant/ Construction Management, and the Owner/ Client as the basis for
implementation
3) Delivering from the manufacture/ sales agencies to the project site should be
factory wrapped in a packaging which has not been opened and protected, with
the factory label/ brand clear and intact.
4) It is not justified to tear/ unpacking without being notified by the Board of
Directors/ Construction Management Consultant
5) Ceramics/ Homogenous Tile installation can only be started if there has been a
considerable amount of tiles that has arrived at the project site as needed, and
must wait until all the hanger tools, doors and windows Locks, and all piping
works or other works that lies under the ceramic assembly has been installed
6) Installation Pattern, intersections plot between the tiles installations must be in
accordance with Shop Drawings or on the instructions from the Board of
Directors/ Construction Management Consultant.
c. Guidelines
Controlling for tiling installation should be in accordance with the ASTM, NI-19, PUBI
1982 articles 31 and SII - 0023-81 regulations.
d. Materials
1) The sized of the Homogenous tiles for floor are according to the drawings,
should a domestic products
2) The sized of the Ceramic tiles for floor are according to the drawings, should a
domestic products
3) Portland cement used must meet the standards of NI-8
4) Sand must meet PUBI 1982 standards article 11 and water must meet the
requirements specified in PUBI 1982 article 9.
e. Terms of The Implementation

1) Prior to the commencement of the work, the Contractor is required to make
shop drawing of the Homogenous Tiles/ Ceramics pattern approved by the
Board of Directors/ Construction Management
2) Homogenous Tiles/ Ceramics to be installed should be in good condition, no
cracks, no defects and was not stained
3) Homogenous Tiles/ Ceramics installation must have a solid bottom and flat base
surface, consisting of mortar 1 PC : 3 sand or according to information shown in
As Built Drawing or at places designated by the Board of Directors/ Construction
Management Consultant
4) Homogenous Tiles/ Ceramics installations must stick firmly on the platform base,
before the installing process the base must clean and dry
5) Before the Homogenous Tiles/ Ceramics installed, each unit must be soaked in
water first until it saturated
6) Cutting the Homogenous Tiles/ Ceramics must be done with a special cutting
machine and cultivated only to be cut on one side only
7) The hip side/ edge side of Homogenous Tiles/ Ceramics installation must be
done with the grinder machine, in order to obtain the workmanship, angled and
perfectly smooth edges
8) The distance between Homogenous Tiles/ Ceramics unit attached (wide joints),
must equal the maximum width of 3 mm and a maximum depth of 2 mm, or
according to detailed drawing of the as built drawings as well as hints the Board
of Directors of the Construction Management, which form parallel lines, straight,
wide and deep equally. For the joints intersecting should form a right angle and
intersect perpendicular to each tile
9) Joints on Homogenous Tiles/ Ceramics filled with filler material (cement grout)
equivalent Sika. Color adhesive - joints is adapted to the color of Granite Tiles/
Ceramics, and approved by the Board of Directors/ Construction Management
Consultant
10) Before filing, the slit gap must be cleaned of dust and other impurities. When
filing the slit gap, the Homogenous Tiles/ Ceramics must be completely attached
firmly on the platform
11) Cement dung and other things that stick on the ceramics surface at the time of
casting the slit gap, must be cleaned immediately before it dries/ hardens
12) Homogenous Tiles/ Ceramics that are already installed must be cleaned of all
kinds of stains on the ceramics surface, make sure its really clean. Look for the
patterns on the ceramics surface when installing as shown in as built drawing
13) Homogenous Tiles/ Ceramics installed should be avoided and taken care of from
other construction works for 3 x 24 hours and protected from any possible of
defects on its surface
14) To overcome the expansion and shrinkage of Homogenous Tiles/ Ceramics on
the large area of the platform floor, if required and recommended by the
manufacturer Granite Tiles/ Ceramics, a dilated slit applied. Material for filling
the slit gap dilation using elastic material, in accordance with the provisions of
the drawings and specifications, and approved by the Board of Directors/
Construction Management Consultant
15) The floor surfaces that have been installed, should be neat, not tilted, not wavy,
attached firm and strong.
6. Vinyl Floor Covering Work

a. Scope of Work
1) This work includes the supply of materials, labor, equipment and other assistive
devices for the purposes of carrying out good quality work.
2) Vinyl installation includes leveling, cutting materials according to drawings, gluing,
mounting accessories and welding
3) Installation of vinyl in the room as designated in the picture.
b. Materials
1) The material must be made of the best quality, resistant to scratches, anti-slip,
hygienic, easy to clean, and inexpensive to care for (wax free).
2) Vinyl material: heterogeneous / multilayer type, made of pure PVC material
without mixing material (filler), equipped with Reinforced PUR protection, the
lower layer consists of acoustic backing foam. Thickness of the top layer / wear
layer 0.7mm, a minimum total thickness of 2.6mm. Vinyl must be in the form of
sheets (rolls), minimum width of 2M, length of 25M.
3) Material must be included in the UPEC classification class U4P3E2 / 3 C2 or EN 685
class 34-42 (commercial very heavy duty).
4) Vinyl material must be antistatic (EN 1815): E <2kV
5) Materials must be scratch resistant, with the most abrasion resistance (EN 660-2)
height (groupT).
6) Material must be hygienic, contain biostatic treatment and bacterial protect with
Ag + ions (natural ions), which can prevent bacterial growth, germs and
mushrooms.
7) Materials must have high (good) resistance to chemicals, anti-betadine and anti-
eosin.
8) Material does not contain material which is hazardous to health and the
environment such as formaldehyde, glycol ether or sulfur; does not contain
metals weight such as lead, lead, cadmium which are harmful to health.
9) Materials must meet safety and comfort standards; antislip, with slip resistance
level of R9 / R10, and acoustic with sound absorption level Min 15 dB.
10) Material must not spread fire (fire resistant B1Cfls1).
11) Static indentation must be very good, a minimum of 0.06 mm (4 times better than
standard EN 433), dimension stability (EN 434) 0.1%, flexibility / curling (EN 435)
o10mm, thermal resistance, and chemical resistance.
12) Materials must be fabricated according to "Environmentally Friendly" standards,
with ISO 14001, ISO 14040 and ISO 14042 certifications; environmentally friendly,
energy efficient, reduces the greenhouse effect, does not contain VOC (volatile
organic compound) emissions above the standard (EN 15052), and is 100%
recycled material.
13) The connection between vinyl is welded by heating using the same PVC material
called welding rod. The connection width is between 3-4 mm and should be level.
14) Skirting / Plint as additional accessories can be an extension or continuation of
vinyl from the floor and then up to the wall as high as 10cm. At the corner
between the floor and the wall a "cove former" is installed which is the material
that forms the angle of the slope (R) so that the angle is not angled. While at the
end of the vinyl that rises to the wall, it is closed with a "capping seal". Cove
former and capping seals must also be made of PVC vinyl.
15) The meeting between vinyl 2 vinyl sheets with different thicknesses or vinyl With
ceramics, an "L" strip or "T" strip can be added from the aluminum
16) The color and pattern are determined later by the contractor and must be
approved by the planner / supervisor.
17) Material fabrication brand: Forbo Sarlon made in France
c. Terms of Implementation
1) Floor Screeding is generally done by the main contractor. Screeding must be really
strong, not cracked, which can be achieved by making a mixture with a
composition of 1 cement: 3 sand. The surface of the screed must be dry, with a
perfect drying level, not moist, free of dust, free of grease and oil. And it should
be noted that in the event of a crack, the contractor is required to make prior
repairs. There should be no sand dug under the screed, which causes the floor to
move / flex.
2) Before performing the vinyl mounting steps, first check that the screed layer has
dried completely. For floors that are directly related to soil and high humidity,
before leveling or screed work, it must be coated with water proofing first. Make
sure the humidity / humidity should not exceed 75% when tested using a
hydrometer. If the floor finishing has a thickness of 50-70mm, the hygrometer
must be placed for 24 hours in order to reach balance in its reading. If the reading
is below 75% RH, vinyl cannot be installed.
3) The installation of vinyl must be based on the references required from the
factory concerned so that good quality and durable work can be obtained.
4) Vinyl flooring is installed after all finishing work has been completed, be it
painting work, ceilings, partitions, doors and frames, mechanical or electrical.
d. Storage Conditions
Storage must be protected from standing water, not humid, avoid the weather (hot
sun / rain water) and always clean. Vinyl must be stored in a position perpendicular to
the floor (vertical), and minimum temperature 10o Celsius.
e. Implementation
1) General
The final appearance and durability of a VINYL floor covering, depending on the
floor (subfloor) where the material is attached. For this reason, the contractor
must know about subfloor construction and problems related to the various types
of subfloor that can be encountered.
The key factor for getting perfect results from mounting vinyl is to pay attention
to some technical requirements that must be met a floor (subfloor) before vinyl
installation, as can be implied as follows:
a) Clean. If the floor is contaminated with substances that will prevent the
adhesive from sticking to the floor, the contaminants must be cleaned. The
surface must be completely clean of fine dust, grease, oil, and other
impurities.
b) Smooth. The floor must be smooth, no concrete remains, mortar heads, nails
or screws. All gaps, pores, cracks and holes must be filled, so the floor
becomes smooth.
c) Align. In addition to smooth, the floor should be flat, not bumpy.
d) Rigid. The floor base must be rigid, not flexible, not loose, not cracked.
e) Dry. Before installing vinyl, it is certain that the floor must be perfectly dry,
meaning that the drying rate of the screed has been reached perfectly, with
no chance of any moisture remaining, which causes the floor to become
moist.
2) Screeding
After completion of screeding work and other work in accordance with the
requirements in article 3, the stages of vinyl installation can be carried out.
3) Leveling
Leveling is carried out as much as 3 to 4 layers. Between stage 1 and next stage is
done in a crossed direction and let it dry. The leveling material consists of polymer
and cement.
4) Sanding
Sanding is done after the last layer has dried, then cleaned from dust, sand and
building dust components.
5) Vinyl Installation
Vinyl is installed using a glue that is recommended by the manufacturer.
6) Joints (welding)
To maintain hygiene any gaps / vinyl connections must be welded with the same
PVC material. The connection must be made at least 24 hours after vinyl
installation.
The welding process is done by: cutting the edges on both sides of the vinyl which
will be joined by a special knife (in the form of a circle or the results of a knife cut
in a half circle) with a depth of 2/3 from thick wearlayer.
After that, the welding rod (welding rod) is heated with a welding machine and
after reaching a certain level of heat, the welding rod is mounted on groove vinyl
that has been sliced so that the welding rod itself will glue and glue the two sides
of the vinyl.
After sticking the welding rod, then let the welding rod cool again (to room
temperature), then the welding rod protrusion is flattened with a spatula (special
knife) until the surface is the same (even) with vinyl.
7) Polishing:
After the vinyl is completely clean of all impurities the final step is cleaning and
polishing. Polishing material is what has been recommended by the factory.
7. Water Proofing Installation Works
a. Scope of Works
The scope of this work includes all Water Proofing installation on each floor or across
the details of the building shown in As Built Drawings or as directed by the Board of
Directors/ Construction Management Consultant.
b. Materials and Equipment Requirements

1) Material quality standard requirements : Standards of materials and products
specified by the manufacturer and other standards such as: NI.3, ASTM 828,
ASTME, TAPP I 803 and 407
2) The service provider is not justified to change the standards in any way without
the permission from the Owner/ Client
3) Water proofing material type equivalent to Sika
4) This work must be carried out by the experts appointed by the supplier agency
and the work shal be granted with a free maintenance warranty certificate for
10 (ten) years such as :
- Guarantee the accuracy of material usage ( Producer's Process Performance
Warranty )
- Accuracy Assurance Application (Application Workmanship Warranty), and
- Strength Assurance for 5 (five) years.
c. Shipping and Storage of The Materials

1) Materials must be brought to the project site in good condition and still in
manufacturer sealed
2) Materials should be kept in a protected, closed, not humid, dry and clean in
accordance with the requirements of the relevant manufacturers
3) Storage areas should be sufficient, so that the materials is placed and protected
in accordance with its type
4) The service provider is responsible for damage to materials stored, either before
or during the installation and the defective materials are not allowed to be used.
d. Terms of the Implementation

1) Waterproofing for reservoirs, toilet, pantry, terrace, balcony and the parts that
are not exposed directly to the sun. Materials made of smooth quartz cement
mixture with active chemicals, in accordance with the drawings and its
specifications or as the approval of the Board of Directors/ Construction
2) Use of the waterproofing layer, the type and the consumption up to 3 kg/m2 or
in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer
3) Before installation, the surface to be waterproofing coated should be completely
clean and free from all kinds of dirt or other unexpected materials
4) The installatioan procedure from the surfaces preparation to be coated, the

coating method, the thickness of the coating to the surface protection after
installation shall follow the instructions issued by the manufacturer.
e. Warranty
This waterproofing works should be guaranteed of perfection with a warranty that is
specified for a minimum of 10 years, commencing from the handover stating that a
leak-free structure. The warranty covers the part of service providers warranty and
also of the waterproofing supplier who made it legally and clearly.
Article 5 Plastering Works
1. Plastering on the Lightweight Brick Wall Works
a. Scope of Works
The scope of this work covers the entire items of plastering work of the light brick
wall on the inside and the outside of the building and all the details shown in As Built
Drawings.
1) The materials used are similar instant cement plaster of MU-301, as well as
other additives required in accordance with the recommendations of the
manufacturer
2) Materials used should consist of a single product, the 1st quality and approved
by the Board of Directors of the Construction Management as well as meet the
requirements specified in NI-8
3) The water must meet NI-3 of Article 10
4) Plastering materials made with the composition on the recommendations of the
manufacturer, to obtain a homogeneous mixture.

1) The entire plastering on the light brick wall made with the composition on the
recommendations of the manufacturer, to obtain a homogeneous mixture
2) Other materials that are not included in the above requirements but required
for completion/ replacement work in this section, must be of good quality of its
kind and approved by the Board of Directors/ Construction Management
Consultant
3) Materials that are sent to the project site must be closed or sealed in bags and
with the manufacturer labeled, bearing types and quality levels, in one piece and
no defects
4) The thickness of the plastering is 10 mm (millimeters) with the results of wall

thickness for the wall finished with the detail shown in As Built Drawing
5) If more thickness is required, thickening can be applied by repeatedly applying
the coating (multilayer)
6) Humidity of the plastering should be maintained until the drying plaster stucco
surface each time look dry and protected from the scorching heat of the sun
directly with a covering material that can prevent rapid water absorption
7) After the 24-hours plastering, stucco application can do.
2. Plastering of Light Brick Wall in Infectious Room Works
a. Scope of Works
The scope of this work covers the entire concrete wall plastering inside the infectious
room as well as the entire detail shown in As Built Drawings.
manufacturer
manufacturer, to obtain a homogeneous mixture.

1) The entire plastering on the light brick wall made with the composition on the
recommendations of the manufacturer, to obtain a homogeneous mixture
Consultant
3) Materials that are sent to the project site must be closed or sealed in bags and
with the manufacturer labeled, bearing types and quality levels, in one piece and
no defects
6) Plastering at the wall meeting should not shape of corner/ angle form, which
should made it arch to facilitate the cleaning implementation
directly with a covering material that can prevent rapid water absorption
8) After the 24-hours plastering, stucco application can do.
3. Concrete Plastering Works
a. Scope of Works
The scope of this work covers the entire concrete wall plastering inside and outside
of the building other than the required exposed concrete surface and all the details
shown in as built drawing.
manufacturer
manufacturer, to obtain a homogeneous mixture
5) On the concrete surface, first should coated with supporting material (
equivalent to MU-L500 bonding agent ) in accordance with the
recommendations of the manufacturer and upon the approved by the Board of
Directors of the Construction Management Consultant.

1) Before the plastering is being doing, clean the surface to be plastered from the
debris, dirt and oil that can reduce the adhesive of the mortar mixture
2) If the surface is too dry, wet the base surface to be plastered with water
Consultant
6) Meeting join between plastering with other types of works (frame and so on),
should made a quiet wide of slit of minimum 7 mm with depht of 5 mm unless it
will specified defferently
directly with a covering material that can prevent rapid water absorption.
Article 6 Metal Door Works
1. Scope of Works
The making of metal door worked includes the frames for doors and other parts
manufactures, complete with anchor for installation, hanging, as well as necessary
accessories, and finishing in accordance with the drawings and specifications. This work is
a product made by a factory that specializes in the manufacture of metal doors, which the
products are manufactured according to certain standards.
a. The door frame and the metal door works using a product of Bostinco or equivalent,
with the type which in accordance to the provisions specified and the drawings, and
approved by the Board of Directors/ Construction Management Consultant
b. Metal doors accessories/ hardware completeness such as hinges, door handles, door
lock, cylinder key, hanger and key lock, door closer and other hardwares needed,
using Bostinco or equivalent.

a. Prior to the installation, the on-site materials in the project site/ workplace should be
placed on the room/ place with good air circulation, not directly exposed to the
weather and protected from damage and humidity
b. Installation should pay attention to all connections in the installation of closures,
bolts, anchors and other necessary reinforcement to be assured strength with
attention/ maintain to neatness, especially for the seen surface areas there should be
no holes or any defects cause of adjusment and setting
c. The mounted frames must match the one specified in the drawings
d. Installed frames are not allowed to be polished with paint, lacquer, primer or other
finishing before being inspected and examined by the Board of Directors/
e. All the Frame that is attached to the concrete/ brick wall are given an ø 22 mm
anchorage, on each side of the upright 3 door frame mounted
f. Once the frame are installed it is necessary to gives protection to protected from
wobble and instability, then the joining between the frames and the floor (door
frame) is made of 5 mm high grout.
Article 7 Fire-Resistant Doors Works
1. Scope of Works
Fire-resistant door manufacturing operations include the manufacture of metal doors,
including frames and doors, complete with anchors for the installation, mounting, as well
as the necessary accessories, and finishing in accordance with drawings and
specifications. This work is a product made by the manufacturer that has specialized in
the manufacture of metal doors, which the products are made based on a certain
standard.
a. The fire-resistant metal door frames and doors work using Bostinco equivalent
products, of a type consistent with the specifications and drawings, and approved by
the Board of Directors/ Construction Management Consultant
b. Completeness of accessories/ hardwares of fireproof door such as hinges, door
handles, door lock, complete with a key cylinder, hanger and key lock, door closer
and other hardwares required, use accessories that correspond to the requirements
of fire doors.

a. Prior to the production process, the contractor must submit the shop drawings and
production plan schedules to the Board of Directors/ Construction Management
Consultant
b. Before the production process, the project manager must submit samples of
materials which need required approval by the Board of Directors/ Construction
c. The components of the fireproof frames and doors are fabricated in the
manufacturer's workshop
d. Door components to be delivered and installed in the project site, its surface must
have completed the process, in the form of neat, smooth and already in finishing
e. Transportation and storage doors as well as the results of the installation of metal
doors must be protected from any possible physical damage as well as the
completion of its surface
f. The contractor required to make the protection of the work that has been carried
out. Any damage that occurs due to the negligence of implementation protection,
are fully the responsibility of the contractor, both in terms of repair or replacement
with a new parts.
Article 8 Alluminium Frames, Aluminum Doors and Windows Works
1. Scope of Works
Aluminum doors and windows works are doors with aluminum layers as finish, covering
the entire aluminum and glass doors and windows works in the buildings that are listed in
the shop drawings and all the details mentioned/ stated in the drawings.
a. Frame materials made of aluminum profiles, domestic products which equivalent to
Alexindo products with the size, thickness and detail in accordance to the drawings
b. Glass material similar product and quality of AA Asahimas translucent colors, meets
the requirements of PUBI 82 section 63, the size of the glass thickness according to
the drawings and specifications, width and length as indicated in as built drawing
c. All auxiliary equipment (screws, anchors) must be galvanized, or as required by the
factory
d. Supporting materials such as rubber, sealants and other materials necessary in
accordance with the required specification and drawings, as well as following the
manufacturer’s recommendations
e. For spaces that require a level of sterile as an operating room and sterile room more,
matters relating to the use of auxiliary materials for aluminum and glass work, using
support materials that support the requirements of the space.

a. Pior to the work being performed, Contractor is obliged to examine the existing shop
drawings and project site conditions (size and holes), including the form, layout/
placement pattern, installation method, and the details of the mechanism according
to the shop drawings
b. Before the implementation begins, the door materials storage in the project site/
workplace should be placed in a well ventilated, protected from damage and weather
disturbances
c. The assembly must follow all installation procedures issued by factory/ manufacture
with the good results, guaranteed its strength with attention/ maintain to the
neatness, there should be no holes or defects in the former adjustment/ setting
d. If necessary, should use galvanized screws on the approval of the Board of Directors/
Construction Management Consultant, without leaving a trace/ defects on the seen
surfaces
e. For the door and window glass after its installed must be equally flat, not wavy, not
twisted and all the equipment could function properly and perfectly
f. For the doors, once installed should be equally flat, not wavy, not twisted and all the
equipment could function properly and perfectly.
Article 9 Ceiling Works
1. Ceiling Frame Works

a. Scope of Works
Includes the installation of a ceiling frames for the building or as the details
mentioned/ stated in the shop drawings.
1) Ceiling frame material using hollow frame with the appropriate size shown in
the shop drawings. All ceiling frames mounted against the wall of the main
frame and all of the main frame hung with hollow metal hanger
2) The framework materials used must be chosen from the best quality, straight
and without any defects
3) Other supporting materials used materials which recommended by the
manufacturer.

their approval
2) Ceiling frame distance adjusted to the type and size of the cover material, as
well as to comply with drawings, specifications and recommendations from a
related manufacturer products
3) All sizes/ measures in the drawings is the finished size
4) Pay attention should be taken to other disciplines including electrical work and
installation of necessary equipment. If these works are not listed in the above
ceiling plans drawings should be researched in advance on the other installation
drawings. So that the pipes are not disturbed the ceiling frame installation
5) It should be noted installation of a ceiling on the edge that meets the beam to
be mounted higher than the beam, the minimum thickness atleast as thick of
plywood ceiling, so that the framework of the ceiling does not visible after the
ceiling is installed
6) Before the ceiling cover mounted, first thing must be checked the height of the
ceiling framework by using the waterpass. Then the results of the ceiling
installation are shown to the Board of Directors/ Construction Management
Consultant before the ceiling cover attached.
2. Gypsum Ceiling Cover Works
a. Scope of Works
Gypsum ceilings work is conducted to covering the entire ceiling mentioned/ shown
in detail of the shop drawings or as directed by the Board of Directors/ Construction
Management Consultant.
1) The ceiling cover material is 9 mm thick Gypsum and 6 mm thick Calsiboard
Jayaboard brand equivalent, a good quality of domestic production
2) Mounting/ installation pattern : in accordance to what it points/ considered in
the shop drawings or in accordance with instructions or approval by the Board
of Directors/ Construction Management Consultant
3) Ceiling module of the installation with 0.5 cm spacing grout. For finishing, the
grout not shown/ clean settlement. The grout covered with white cement fillers
and adhesives.

their approval
2) Other materials not listed above but required for completion / replacement of
the work in this section shall be of the highest quality of its kind and shall be
3) All sizes/ measures in the drawings is the finished size
4) On this ceiling work to note the existence of other work in conjunction with the
implementation of this work. Before the implementation of the installation of
ceiling, another works that is located above the ceiling must be installed
perfectly
5) Pay attention and care should be taken to other disciplines such as electrical
work and auxiliary equipment installation needed. When the works mentioned
above are not contained in the reflected ceiling plan should be researched in
advance on another installation drawings (EL, PL, air conditioning, etc.). For
details on the installation must be consultation with the Board of Directors/
6) The ceiling installation should in average distance of each other (grout) is made
of 0.5 cm or in accordance with the shop drawing details. Grout must be straight
and of equal width, the meeting should intersect perpendicular to each
other. The installation should be really neat
7) On the wide ceiling area - broad limits depending on the type of the product - if
necessary and recommended by the manufacturer, conducted the installation of
expansion joint installment. In this position the grout between the ceiling cover
sheet filled with elastic filler material in accordance with the recommendations
of the manufacturer. Framework of the ceiling on the expansion joint position
should be separated
8) In radiology room/ chamber, before coating with gypsum board, first coating it
with2 mm thick of Pb (lead).
Article 10 Hanger and Locker Works
1. Scope of Works
Includes procurement, installation, security and maintenance of all appliances installed on
the doors and the windows and all the details mentioned/ specified in the shop drawings.
a. All materials in the work must come from the good quality products, uniform in color
as well as the selection of materials that have been approved the Board of Directors/
b. The working mechanism of all equipment must comply with the shop drawings
provisions
c. All keys must be equipped with a key identification plate made of aluminum marked
with an ID number. This plate is connected a key with nickel ring.
d. Door gear/ complement. For outside building/ in addition of other building that need
a special requirement, the door gear consists of :
1) Aluminum Door
a) The metal door lock used Kend, Wilka or Griff brand, nickel finishing, 2
slaag model, equipped with identification on the type of the key. Before
being installed must be presented and approved by the Board of
Directors/ Construction Management Consultant
b) Lockase made of zincalume, Kend, Wilka or Griff brand, satin nickel
finishing. Before being installed must be presented and approved by the
c) Stainless steel door handle, Kend, Wilka or Griff brand. Before being
installed must be presented and approved by the Board of Directors/
d) Stainless steel hinges used are with a length of 11 - 15 cm, and each door
fitted with 3 (three) hinges
e) Placement and details of locks and hinges must be in accordance with
shop drawing or on the instructions of the Board of Directors/
Construction Management Consultant.
2) Metal door
The door handle of the metal material, Kend, Wilka or Griff brand, stainless
steel finishing. Before being installed must be presented and approved by the
Board of Directors/ Construction Management Consultant.
e. Window gear/ complement. For buildings consist of :

1) Door guard bolt made of Cast Brass Dekkson brand, bronze color mounted 1
piece on each window
2) Stainless Steel Window hinge, length of 5 - 10 cm, made of metal,
placement in pairs of 2 pieces on each window
3) Wind stay made of metal Dekkson brand or similar, a length of 10 - 20 cm,

the color is determined later, mounted a piece for each window
4) Placement and detail of the latch, hinges and wind stay should be in
accordance with shop drawing or by the instructions of the Board of
Directors as user/ Construction Management Consultant.
f. After the key and hanger attached, paint or any stains or other finish materials which
stick on the key locks and the hangers should be cleaned and removed clearly.

a. All equipment that are going to be used, before being installed, the sample materials
must first be submitted to the Board of Directors/ Construction Management
Consultant for approval. Proposing/ submission should be accompanied with
brochures/ specifications from the manufacturer in concerned
b. If deemed necessary, the Board of Directors/ Construction Management Consultant
could ask to conduct laboratory tests on samples of materials proposed as the basis
for approval. The entire cost of testing is fully the responsibility of the Contractor
c. The top hinge mounted not more than 28 cm (axis) on the side of the door to
down. Bottom hinge mounted not more than 32 cm (axis) from the floor to the
top. The middle hinge mounted amid between those two
d. For Lavatory Door, the distance taken from the top and bottom equally
e. Door handle attached 100 cm (axis) from the floor
f. During the implementation period, all keys may not be used and the keys should be
stored in an under supervised cabinet. The use of the keys must be authorized by the
Supervisor
g. Screws must be planted neatly without damaging the doors, frames, or hangers and
the lock itself
h. Installation which is not in neat and defects should be repaired and replaced at the
expense of the service providers.
Article 11 Painting Works
1. Walls Painting Works
a. Scope of Works
Covering walls painting and other parts of the building as shown/ mentioned in the
shop drawings.
1) Walls paint materials used is domestic products, Dulux ICI brand or equivalent
and the sample must be approved by the Board of Directors/ Construction
2) The color, the type will be determined later
3) Types of finishing paint :
a) Dulux ICI brands, or similar used as wall/ concrete finishing paint
b) Painting on the exterior Wall/ concrete do in layers, at least 3 times/ layers
using the exterior paint
c) Painting on the interior Wall/ concrete do in layers, at least 2 times/ layers
using interior paint.
4) Primer/ Base Coating Cement :
a) Used Dulux ICI Paint or equivalent for wall/ concrete
b) The base paint is done one layer until smooth and equal in paint thickness
c) The basic coating material used Dulux, Jotun primer/ base coating cement or
equivalent.
2
5) Capacity/ dispersive ability up to 12 m /liter for 1 layer painting
6) Painting with a maximum up to 20% clean water mixture
7) In minimum of 2 hours drying, the next layer can be done
8) The controlling all of this work must meet the requirements in PUBI 1982 Article
54, NI-4, BS No. 3900-1970, US K-41 and the corresponding technical provisions
from the factory.

1. All materials that are going to be used, before being installed, the sample
Management Consultant for approval
2. Contractor must submit 2 copies of the provisions and technical requirements of
factory and samples of experiments color paint to the Board of Directors/
3. Before the painting began, the painting surface must be flat, dry and clean of any
dirt, grease, oil and dust
4. Before do the primer paint, after the wall is smooth and flat, coated its first with
base caoting cement twice and then sanded until smooth and blended
5. The painting field area ready to be painted after the entire surface has been
leveled/ smoothed with sandpaper. Plastering must be completely dry, no crack
and has been accepted/ approved by the Board of Directors/ Construction
6. Before the painting done, the Contractor is required to create of color samples, to
be approved by the Board of Directors/ Construction Management Consultant
7. Painting required by using a roller. To the surface where the use of the roller is
not possible, use a good/ fine brush
8. Priming is will done after the entire surface of the painting meet the requirements
and the completion of the works in it has been done
9. Each time a layer of paint carried out avoid the occurrence of touch and effects
by any objects of the other works around it for 2 hours.
2. Ceiling Painting Works
a. Scope of Works
Covering ceiling and concrete platform painting that serves as a ceiling and all the
details according to the shop drawings
1) Used Dulux ICI or similar, color, type determined later or directive from the Board
of Directors/ Construction Management Consultant
2) Finishing Paint type :
a) Dulux ICI or equivalent is used for exterior and interior ceiling
b) Atleast done a layer of primer evenly.
2
3) Capacity/ dispersive ability up to 12 m /liter for 1 layer painting
4) 20% maximum of water diluent
5) Next layer could be done after at least minimum of 2 hours drying
6) The controlling all of this work must meet the requirements in PUBI 1982 Article
54, NI-4, BS No. 3900-1970, US K-41 and the corresponding technical provisions
from the factory.

1) materials that are going to be used, before being installed, the sample materials
must first be submitted to the Board of Directors/ Construction Management
Consultant for approval
2) Contractor must submit 2 copies of the provisions and technical requirements of
factory and samples of experiments color paint to the Board of Directors/
3) Before the painting began, the painting surface must be flat, dry and clean of any
dirt, grease, oil and dust
4) Before do the primer paint, after the ceilling is smooth and flat, coated its first
with base caoting cement twice and then sanded until smooth and blended
5) The painting field area ready to be painted after the entire surface has been
leveled/ smoothed with sandpaper. Plastering must be completely dry, no crack
and has been accepted/ approved by the Board of Directors/ Construction
6) Before the painting done, the Contractor is required to create of color samples, to
be approved by the Board of Directors/ Construction Management Consultant
7) Painting required by using a roller. To the surface where the use of the roller is
not possible, use a good/ fine brush
8) Priming is will done after the entire surface of the painting meet the requirements
and the completion of the works in it has been done
9) Each time a layer of paint carried out avoid the occurrence of touch and effects
by any objects of the other works around it for 2 hours.
3. Steel Painting Works
a. Scope of Works
Covering surface painting of steel frames, door, window trellis, staircase railing, things
made of metal/ steel and other parts of the metal surface which seemed appropriate
as shown/ specified in the shop drawing details.
1. Finishing : ICI Dulux or equally similar for metal/ steel paint
2. Basic material : Primer paint made from a mixture zincromate commonly used on
shipping paint that has the properties to protect from rust, usually green and its a
domestic locally products
3. Basic dispersive materials : using base cement coating or metal putty which is a
domestic locally products
4. Type, Color determined according to the instructions from the Board of Directors/
5. Painting is done at least 2 layers, or to obtain a result of painting that flat and the
same thickness
6. Primer paint used a good quality of domestic local products. Performed at least
one layer or to obtain a result of painting with the same average thickness
7. The materials used must meet the requirements specified in PUBI 1982 article 53,
BS No. 3900 : 1970/1971, US K-14 and NI-4 and follow the provisions of the
factory
8. The colors will be determined later.

1. Materials that are going to be used, must first submitted the samples to the Board
of Directors/ Construction Management Consultant for approval
2. The painting field area ready to be painted after has been accepted/ approved by
the Board of Directors/ Construction Management Consultant
3. The surface to be painted should be clean from dust, oils/ greases and "rust" as
well as in the dry state
4. Painting surface sanded with fine sandpaper to obtain a smooth surface, flat, and
free of rust
5. Stir the paint perfectly before use until its saturated
6. Apply one or two layers of Red Metal Primer of the product as the type required
or as determined by the factory
7. Then, after painting the metal primer been even spreadly and dried,
superimposed priming together until smooth and thick. At the end, final polish
should be done with the requirements as determined by the factory
8. Final finished paint can be done if the primer has dried perfectly and have been
9. Painting should be done by using a good quality brush or spray.
10. The painting area shall be dispersives evenly, flat and in the same color.
4. Floors and Walls Painting Works
a. Scope of Works
1) These works covering the labor, materials and equipment used
2) Includes Epoxy Applications used to coat the floor in enclosed spaces prioritizing
cleanliness and sterility
3) Material requirements
4) Epoxy paint is a special paint consisting of 2 (two) components of the material
i.e. epoxy/ resin paint and hardener
5) Both materials mixtures it evenly and superimposed it on the concrete
6) After the epoxy paint has dry will formed a thin strong hard layer, water
resistance, chemical resistance and colored, somehow in certain condition it
looked glossy
7) The materials which is used shall meet the required that specified.
b. Terms of The Implementation

1) Before commencing the works, the implementing Officer must first submitted
the samples to the Board of Directors/ Construction Management Consultant for
approval and to be used for this work
2) The samples must be accompanied by brochures or certificates containing
descriptions of the quality of the material. Only materials approved by the Board
of Directors/ Construction Management Consultant which may be used
3) Installation is carried out by trained and experienced personnel specially for the
jobs
4) The painted floor is concrete having a compressive strength of at least 225
2
kg/cm , with reinforcement according to the design of the structural planner.
This concrete floor must be able to accept the load without any decrease at all.
The floor lifespan is at least 28 days and the humidity level is not more than 80%
RH when the application starts
5) When casting the floor should be leveled it with adequate tool such as vibration/
screeder and should monitored and observed for it heights with a good
measuring tool (theodolite or laser system), so the flatness, smoothness and the
floor height corresponding to the original plan
6) The surface of the floor should be smooth, not wavy and not rough
7) Stripping the surface methods such as using a grit-blasting, waterjetting, blastrac
or diamondize scrubber can be used primarily for surfaces that have been
contaminated by cement spills or dry petrified dirts and others
8) To wash out liquid waste in the form of oil, grease or paste, using water and
soap. Then the floor should be dried at least 2 x 24 hours before proceeding
with the installation of Epoxy Paints
9) The concrete floor should be clean of dust
10) The qualified concrete slab, first coated with Epoxy Primer can be applied with a
roller or pressure spray
11) After the Primary Layer dry, at least for 12 hours and then do in accordance
stages of Epoxy Base Coated, Body Coated and Top Coated - Each stage should
be in Sanding and Cleaning
12) Coating is done 2 times, where the coating direction should cross each other.
During the coating process, note the cleanliness of the floor from dust, flying
insects such as flies, alates, mosquitoes and others. If found dirt or any sticking
insects should be immediately removed and reapplied
13) During the construction process, windows and doors should be open closed
room endanger the safety of workers
14) Each time the coating finishes, the floor must be protected from people, cart or
other vehicle passing through on it until minimum 12 hours
15) After 12 hours, people are allowed to step on the epoxy paint floor but be very
careful and do not use shoes that have sharp or hard ends soles
16) All workers should wears no shoes or using soft rubber sandals
17) Wagon Carts, hand pallet, forklift or any other vehicles may be allowed through
on the floor atleast after 7 (seven) days of drying from the last coating
Article 12 Railing Works
1. Scope of Works
Covering the works on Railing for Stairs, Vide Ballustrade as well as all the details shown/
mentioned in the shop drawings.
2. Materials Requirement
a. Specially in lobby stairs railing used round stainless steel pipe material, with Ø
2 - 2.5 inches (according to the description in the drawing) with a minimum
thickness of 2.5 mm. The products was a domestic local products or in local market
circulation. All the selection materials must be approved by the Board of Directors/
b. The shape, size according to details in the shop drawings

c. Contractor shall make The Shop Drawing/ Adjustment of the implementation and
should be known by the Board of Directors/ Construction Management Consultant
d. If there is welding must be done according to the procedures in the AWS and AISC
Specification.

a. The fabrication works in the workshop should be of high quality and the right size of
measurement for installation in the project site/ field
b. Work Inspection in the workshop by the Board of Directors/ Construction
Management Consultant can be done at any time. The project site/ works location,
all the installation in the project site must be approved by the Construction
c. Materials will be rejected without any extra charge if its does not fit to the shop
drawings and its specifications
d. The Contractor inspects/ checks and makes/ shows detailed drawings of all the
components used in this work
e. The Contractor shall be responsible for accuracy of the size of the measurement
corresponding to the shop drawing
f. The connection, the corners join details of the material in accordance to the shop
drawing, which if necessary shall ask the Board of Directors/ Construction
g. After all installation being done, the Contractor shall protect from damage due to
negligence and damages arising out of the works are the responsibility of Contractor
entirely without any additional cost.
Article 13 Handrail Works
1. Scope of Works
Covering the work of Handrail for corridors as well as all the details shown/ mentioned in
the shop drawings.
a. Materials made of black corrosion-resistant pipes with paint finished
b. Using corrosion-resistant materials under normal environtmental condition
c. Easy to install and maintenance
d. Passed the test of UL-94 rated V-0 for the fire resistance
e. Designed to comply the requirements of static load, pressure, and bending according
to the needs stated/ shown in the shop drawings, according ASTM-E894 and ASTM-
E935
f. Handrail system consisting of a cap/ lid, connection, support rods, or other cover
elements must not obstruct the movement of grasping. Handrail including fasteners
must not have sharp edges or dangerous edges.
3. Installation
a. Installation of all equipment/ supplies must be carried out by an experienced handrail
installation. The execution must be carried out carefully and very neat, following the
working drawings. The material goods will be used must not be slightly defective.
b. Handrails should be installed in accordance with the provisions of the production
specification, only use the equipment which to install and gluing
recommended. Mounting distance on a wall, the height and other installation
instructions tailored to the shop drawings
c. The height of the wall mounting according to the shop drawings
d. Must be in accordance with ASTM E-985-92.
4. Terms of Implementation
a. Work Inspection in the workshop by the Board of Directors/ Construction
Management Consultant can be done at any time. The project site/ works location, all
the installation in the project site must be approved by the Construction Management
Consultant Inspection of this work in the workshop by the Board of Directors/
Construction Management Consultant can be done at any time. The Project Site,
installation project location must be approved by the Construction Management
Consultant.
b. Materials will be rejected without any extra charge which is incompatible to the shop
drawings and its specifications
c. Contractor shall fix/ repeat the work if any damage occurred during the period of
execution and the warranty period, at the contractor’s expense, as long as the damage
was not caused by the Owner/ Board of Directors/ Construction Management as the
task giver
d. Implementation of the installation should produce the perfect work result, tidy and
well smoothly used.
Article 14 Sanitair Works
1. Scope of Works
The Sanitair Works is installed in the bathroom/ WC as well as all of the room details in
accordance as stated/ shown in the shop drawings.
a. Closet, Urinal and Washbasin Sink :
Sanitair types that will be used are as follows :
1. Sitting Closet
Sitting Closet for Bathroom/ Public Restroom use porcelain material, Toto
product - type C-51/ T 150 NL or similar, white
2. Squatting Closet
Squatting Closet for Bathroom/ Public Restroom use porcelain material, Toto
product or equivalent, white
3. Urinal
Urinal for Bathroom/ Public Toilet and Laboratory using porcelain materials,
Toto product - type U 57 M or similar, white
4. Washbasin Sink
Sink using porcelain material, Toto product or equivalent, white
5. Kitchen sink
Sink for pantry use Toto product or equivalent.
b. Faucet, Floor Drain, etc. Installation

1. Water faucet using Toto product or equivalent
2. Floor drain using Toto product or equivalent
3. Jet washer using Toto product or equivalent
4. Shower Spray using Toto product or equivalent.
3. Installation
Installation of all equipment / supplies must be carried out by an experienced installation
sanitair goods. The execution must be carried out carefully and very neat.
a. Sitting Closet, Urinal and Washbasin Sink Installation

Screwdriving equipment tools that will be installed on the floor or wall with
fisicher. Altitude and construction of the installation must be adapted to the
drawings for that as well as the instructions of the manufacturer in the
brochure. Installation should be good, neat, used waterpass and cleaned of all dirt
and stains and plumbing connector installation should not be any leaks
b. Other Sanitair Equipment Tools Installation

Glass mirrors and things/ tools tray on the sink must be installed flat and screwed
onto the wall. The material goods will be used must not a defect products. Floor
drain must be fitted with a filter, and fitted neatly. All the sidelines between the floor
drain in the floor, must be filled with mortar 1 PC : 2 Sand. It should be installed flat
on the floor drain area and its the same with the floor.
a. All materials before being installed must be presented to the Board of Directors/
Construction Management Consultant includes with the manufacturer’s
requirements/ conditions for approval plant. Materials that are not approved must
be replaced at no extra cost
b. If deemed necessary to change/ replacement of substitute materials must be
approved by the Board of Directors/ Construction Management Consultant based on
the samples submitted
c. Before installation begins, Contractor shall examine the existing shop drawings and
the project site conditions, including learn to ascertain the shape, pattern,
placement, how to install and details according to the drawings
d. If there are abnormalities in any case between images with specifications and so on,
the Contractor shall immediately report to the Board of Directors/ Construction
e. Contractor is not justified to start the work somewhere in the project site if there is
any abnormality/ difference on the work site, before the abnormality is resolved
f. During the execution should always held testing/ inspection for the perfection of the
work
g. Contractor shall fix/ repeat if any damage occurred during the period of execution
and the warranty period, at the expense of the contractor, as long as the damage
was not caused by the Owner/ Board of Directors/ Construction Management as the
task giver
h. Implementation of the installation should produce the perfect work result, tidy and
well smoothly used.
Article 15 Toilet Partition/ Cubicle Works
1. Scope of Works
Work sanitair is installed in the bathroom/ WC as well as all details of the room in
accordance expressed/ shown in the shop drawings.
a. Materials used doors and walls are made of :
 Order solid grade laminated/ plywood
 HPL (High Pressure Laminate)
b. Toilet Partitions :
Size : In accordance with the plans on shop drawings
Thickness : 13 mm Minimum
Finishing : HPL
Production : Matrix, IDKU, or equivalent
Completeness : Accessories (locks, hangers, etc.)
Color : Will be determined later.
3. Installation
a. Sample of the materials
1) Before starting work, the Project in charge employment must first submit to the
Supervisor, samples of materials to be used for this work, such samples should be
accompanied with brochures or certificates which contains information about
the quality of the materials. Only materials approved by the Board of Directors/
Construction Management Consultant as the client which may be used
2) If the Supervisory Consultant deemed necessary, a sample must be submitted in
installed state/ neatly arranged in accordance with the implemented will. The
attached sample with a size of 1 unit of typical use components in accordance
with the shop drawings.
b. Power
Installation carried out by trained and experienced specially personnel for the work.
c. Preparation
The size measures contained in the shop drawings should be adjusted to the project
site conditions, the size of the one in the drawing is not absolutely become a
benchmark in the implementation.
d. Implementation
1) The door should be mounted right on the wall panel
2) Installation of the door hinges must ensure could open and close properly
3) Installation of the hinges on the door must be drilled on the screw provided
4) The hinges used should be the selected brands system
5) The Locks installation on the spot that available by making small holes around
the lock with a drill depth of 0.5 cm on the door for a key position in order not to
damage the other layers of the panel.
6) After drilled making holes with a sharp chisel.
4. Terms of Maintenance
a. Improvements :
The doors and wall panels are defected or less neat installation must be repaired
immediately
b. Security
All works that have been installed have to be protected from the affected of stucco
splashes, stains, and so on.
5. Terms of Acceptance
a. Doors wall panels installed properly and perfectly sturdy, elbows, in accordance with
the required and approved by the Supervisory Consultant, including installation of
locks and tools used
b. Wall mounted doors to be able to function properly and perfectly.
Article 16 Sound Silencer Insulation Work
1. Scope of Works
a. The scope of this work includes all work items silencer and heat installation in the
AHU room or the entire building detail shown in shop drawings or as directed by the
b. Sound silencers insulation installation work in this article include: provision of
silencer and heat insulation materials are capable of absorbing sound at a high,
medium and low frequency.
a. Sound silencer Insulation material is Glass wool silencer coated with 9 mm thick of
Gypsum with a 4 X 4 hollow frame, domestic production of a good quality
b. Mounting pattern : according to what shown/ considered in the shop drawings or in
accordance with instructions or approval by the Board of Directors/ the Construction
Management Consultant.

a. Before starting the works, the service provider must submit shop drawings for
approval by the Board of Directors/ Construction Management Consultant
b. All materials, tools requirements, and installation details in the work of silencer
installation is made in accordance with the drawings and it specifications that have
been defined and approved by the Board of Directors/ Construction Management
Consultant
c. Implementation/ Sub Contractor must coordinate to the other parties involved in
silencer insulation installation (coordinated to Construction Management
Consultant), so that the entire work can be done perfectly
d. Provider Services of silencer insulation work must be coordinated with the
performing other works related with this work, such as lightweight brick wall on the
silencer insulation layer, and the ceiling work, so that all works can be done perfectly
e. During the period of implementation of the works, the contractor must ensure the
protection against polyurethane panels already installed, so protected from damage
due to other work which being done after the installation of this polyurethane panel.
Article 17 Concrete Desk
1. Scope of Works
a. Covers of the materials provision, support/ auxiliary tools and other equipment
necessary
b. Make shop drawings and request approval to the Construction Planner/ Engineer
c. Applying material samples
2. Materials and Installment

a. Before work begins, shop drawings and color type of the materials has been
approved by the Construction Planner/ Engineer
b. The reinforced concrete table with 10 cm thick 1 PC : 2 Sand : 3 crushed stone/ split,
finishing according to the drawing
c. Tables made of reinforced concrete, ∅ 10 rebar with distance of 10 cm, 7 cm thick of
concrete
d. The results of the work must be neat, good and not flawed so the table form is really
flat
e. Finishing the table top is coated with a specified materials which according to the
drawing.
Article 18 Aluminum Composite Panel (ACP) Installation Works
1. Scope of Works
a. This work include covers of labors, materials and equipment used to carry out the
installation work aluminum composite panel as indicated in the shop drawing
b. This work was carried out in places/ project site such as shown in the shop drawings.
2. Control of Works
a. All work referred to in this chapter shall be done in accordance with the
specifications and requirements specified in this General Description and
Requirements of Architectural Works Document
b. The materials must meet standards such as :
 AA The Aluminum Association
 AAM Architectural Aluminum Manufactures Association
 ASTM American standatd for Testing Materials
 KSA Korean Standard Association.
3. Component
a. Bracket/ anchor of metal material finish galvanized or extrusion aluminum material
b. Vertical and horizontal frame (the specification) of extrusion aluminum material
c. Edge Panel aluminum composite frame and reinforced of extrusion aluminum
material (the specification)
d. Sealant
 For outdoor work, see Sealant Chapter
 The colors will be determined later
 Sealant Location between aluminum panels with other components.
4. Materials
Material : Aluminum composite
The total thickness of the panel : 4 mm
The outer layer of Aluminum thickness : 0.5 x 0.5 mm
Core : Non Combustible mineral
2
Weight : 7.6 Kg/m
2
Tensile : 5 Kg/mm
2
Yield : 4.5 Kg/mm
Sound Transmission : 26 STC
Finished : PVDF Paint
Color : White and Blue Ascot.
a. Composite materials must be in a state of flat, color and the placement adjusted to
the shop drawings
b. The materials used are Seven brand or equivalent
c. Contractors are required to submit a guarantee of supply issued by the distributor and
is supported by the manufacturer (principal) that includes the name of the project
and the approximate volume
d. Examples : Contractors must submit of the material samples to the Project Manager
for approval from the Owner/ Board of Directors/ Construction Management as the
Task Giver
e. Dimensional tolerances mill finish :
 Stove in varnish : + 0.2 mm
 Dianode : 0.4 / + 0.2 mm
 Width : - 0 / + 4 mm
 Lenght up to 4 meter : - 0 / + 6 mm.
5. Implementation
a. Installation is done by experts who are specialized in this work by showing a
certificate of work references ever undertaken to the Project Manager as Board
Courses for approval
b. Aluminum Composite panels used for the entire project should be of one kind only
c. Implementation of the installation should be complete with auxiliary equipment to
simplify and accelerate the deployment of the installation accurate results, thorough
and precise position
d. Transom Frames holder and mullion should be prepared carefully, perpendicular and
precisely in position
e. The installation method include :
 Clamped between the parts of double peak lid
 Tray Panels hanging on pins and screws mounted
 Wall coatings were merged into one unit, edge bonding system.
f. The frequency of cleaning and maintenance as well as the selection of a suitable

cleaning agent that is highly dependent on the location of the buildings and the
surface conditions. Cleaning can be carried out with water and a sponge or soft
brush. If the heavier fouling can be added neutral detergent
g. After the installation is done the closure of the gaps between panels with caulking
and sealant materials untill it tightly closed and did not leak as described in Sealant
Chapter in this requirement
h. The contractor must protect the work has been completed on the things that can
cause damage. When this occurs, the Contractor must rectify at no extra cost
i. The installation of Aluminum Composite Panel work must be neatly and not wavy
j. Contractors are required to create a mock-up scale of 1 : 1 to be approved by the
Board of Directors/ Construction Management as the task giver in a fairly wide field
area with its own construction outside the building
k. The contractor should be able to include quality assurance for 10 (ten) years against
the sun and the manufacturer in the form of a certificate guarantees that include :
 Project name
 Owner
 The colors used
 Volume.
Article 19 Curtain Wall with Aluminum Frame Works
1. Scope of Works
a. This work includes the procurement of labors, materials and equipment used to carry
out the installation work of aluminum curtain wall with glass and other auxiliary
equipment as shown on the shop drawing
b. This work was carried out on the glass wall of the outer layer of the building shown in
the shop drawing. Things are concerned, such as glass and other components.
2. Control of Works
a. All this work must comply with the standard (reference), such as :
1) American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA)

 AAMA 501 = Method of Test for Metal Curtain Wall
 AAMA 101 = Voluntary Specification for Aluminum and Polly (Vinyl chloride)
(PVC) Prime Window and Glass Doors.
2) ASTM - American Society for Testing Materials :

 ASTM - B 221 = Aluminum Extrusion
 ASTM - B 209 = Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plates
 ASTM - A 36 = Structural Sheet

 ASTM - B 308 = Aluminum alloy
 ASTM - B 330 = Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
 ASTM E 283 = Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors
 ASTM E 331 = Test Method for Weather Penetration of Exterior Windows,
Curtain Wall and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
 ASTM E 1233 = Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference
 ASTM E 547 = Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference.
3) Japanese Industrial Standard

 JIS H 4100 = Aluminum and aluminum alloy Extrude Shape
 JIS H 8602 = Combined COATING OF anodic Oxide and Organic Coating`s on
Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys
 JASS 14 = Japanese Architectural Standard Specification for Curtain Wall
 JIS H 8602 = Japanese Industrial Standard for Aluminum and Steel Window.
4) Singapore Standard (SS)

 SS 212-98 = Aluminum Alloy Window
 SS 381-97 = Aluminum Curtain Wall.
5) Indonesian National Standard (SNI)

 SNI - 03-0573-1989 = General Terms Window Aluminum Free.
b. The Contractor shall make mock-ups for testing, be prepared if requested by Project
Manager/ field directors.
3. System Description
a. General
Works Curtain Wall aluminum to the exterior, including related work such as :
anchorage, structural reinforcement strenghening and other complementary
components.
b. Planning Criteria
 Safety factor
Unless otherwise noted, the other parts including glass resilience, meet the
safety factor not less than 1.5 X maximum of wind pressure as required
 Modification
It may be possible without having to change the profile or change the
appearance, strength or durability of the material and must still meet the
planning criteria
 The Movement due to Temperature
Due to the material expansion of the related materials there should be no noise
or a fracture or opened connections, broken glass, sealant that is not attached,
and other things might occurs. Watertight connection to be able to
accommodate this movement.
c. Installation Method
Glass with the fourth side frame is unity that has been assembled in the Work
Shop. The panel is fitted with a screw to the frame Horizontal/ transom and locked
with aluminum extrusion to order Vertical/ mullion.
4. Wind Pressure
Pressure Wind (Wind Load Design) is determined by the placement, shape and height of
the building with the following provisions :
 Minimum Wind Load 100 kg/m2
 Minimum Negative Pressure 150kg/m2.
5. Structure Requirements
Deflects :
 AAMA = The maximum allowable L/175 or 2 cm
 JIS = The maximum allowable Deflection L/150 or 2 cm
 SII = The maximum allowable L/175 or Double Glazed and L/125 for Single Glazed
 SS = The maximum allowable L/175 or Double Glazed and L/125 for Single Glazed.
6. Air Leak
3
ASTME 283 = Air leaks do not exceed 2.06 m at each meter cross-section length unit,
not the Pa differential pressure.
7. Water Leak
a. ASTME 331= Not seen as a significant leak (water permeate into the uilding interior)
until the pressure of 137 Pa (positive) with a period of 15 minutes, with a minimum
2
amount of water of 3.4 L/m minute
b. SS 212 = Not seen as a significant leakage in 15% of the wind pressure plan or
180 pa (for the condition of the building with a minimum 200 mm overhang
canopy). Or 30% of the wind pressure plan or 240 Pa (the condition of the building
2
without canopy) with the minimum amount of water 4.0 L/m .
8. Soundproofing
Soundproofing factor (Sound Transmission Loss) of 2.5 dB at a frequency of 124 - 400 Hz
or depending on the types of the room (applicable only on specific products).
9. Materials and Products
a. Producer :
 PT ALEXINDO, YKK
 ALAKASA EXTRUSINDO, or equivalent.
b. Size
Size : Meets technical calculations
Thickness : 2.0 mm minimum
Color : Silver YH-1N (Anodized plus, 18 micron minimum)
Type : AKU Profile 100 Series.
c. Aluminum Extrusion
Dice and profile fabrication with a special tolerance for architectural. The size of the
diameter of the hollow and solid profiles that can be done is :
 The maximum diameter = 160 mm hollow profile
 The maximum diameter for profile solid = 210 mm.
d. Billet used
Of the main billet (primary) with standard A-6030 ST5 with composition (%)
 Mg : 0.45 to 0.9
 Si : 0.2 to 0.6
 Ti : 0.1 max
 Mn : 0.1 max
 Zn : 0.1 max
 Fe : 0.35 max
 Cu : 0.1 max
 Cr : 0.1 max
 Aluminum : The rest.
e. Glass
See glass work chapter
f. Back-up Material
 Material : Polyurethane Foam
 The material properties : Not absorb water
3
 Density : 65 - 96 kg/m
 Cross-sectional size : 25% - 50% larger than a gap occurs.
g. Gasket
 Material : PVC, Neoprene, Santoprene, EPDM
 The material properties : Resistant to weather changes
 Density : 60 - 80 Durometer
 Cross-sectional size : Extrusion.
h. Setting Block For Glass

 Material : EPDM, PVC
 The material properties : 80 - 90 Durometer.
i. Wall Sealant & Joint Sealer

 Single Component
 Type = Silicone Sealant
 Corresponding to the sealing work chapter
 Connections between horizontal to vertical profiles by which fibrous sealer to
close the gap Conn on these profiles, thereby preventing leakage of air, water
and noise
 Material = Buteyl Sheet.
j. Screw
Material = Stainless Steel.
k. Anchors and Planting Anchor

 The part relating to Alluminum Coated Galvanised up till 18 micron
 Another part was given anti-rust coating, Zinc Chromate, Alkyd type.
10. Shop Drawings
a. Complete Shop Drawings of the Work Detail, which explains:

 Curtain Wall appears
 Connection Details both Exterior and Interior
 Installation Details
 Details of Aluminum encounters with other related components
 Completeness sizes and measures.
b. The calculation of the appropriate structure according to the existing design criteria
(if necessary).
11. Fabrication and Assembling

a. All mullion and transom were done in the workshops/ factories, but that can not be
assembled in the factory, was forced to be implemented in the project site
b. All connections are with machined worked so it will neat, sturdy and with a suitable
connection standard tolerances shape. For the waterproof connection must be
sealant importantly parts that are not visible
c. The glass assembling on the four sides frame is done in the workshop/ factory so that
in addition to the standard quality that required and also speeding up the installation
process in the project site
d. Manufacturing and assembling process must be based on data on the shop-drawing
that has been approved by the Board of Directors/ Construction Management as the
assignor.
Description Tolerance (mm)
- Gap between the Aluminum Frame < 0.5
connection (vertical and horizontal)
- Gap between the Waterproof material <3

connection (gasket)
- Differences of the Inside Size, of the +/- 1.5

Aluminum Frame, Height and Width
- Differences of the Inside Size, of the <2

adjacent panels
- Welding conjoin Not seen on the visible part of

the eye immediately
- Sealant According to size in the shop

drawing
12. Delivery and Project Site Storage

a. All profiles PVC plastic coated or polyethylene films
b. Delivery of the materials should be careful and there should be no damage
c. Each unit panel, curtain wall which was sent into the project site must be with a
mark/ proof that have been quality checked by work shop QC
d. Materials that is stored in the project site must be arranged in such a way so that not
be damage/ defects.
13. Implementation (Installation on Structural Building)
a. Prior to commencement of the work, contractors are first required to create the
complete curtain wall system shop drawings with :
 Seemed Type/ Façade
 The details of the anchors and aluminum connection
 Sealants, gaskets and glass (mirror) installation

 The details of Aluminum meeting with other components
 The sizes/ measurements and so forth.
b. All aluminum units must be attached with a right (angled) bracket, perpendicular and
following the contractor bench mark
c. Prior to the installation it is necessary to measure the project site/ field and in
coordination with other works, so that the size of the orifice (opening) in accordance
with the shop drawings
d. Installation must be done by a contractor who has specialist experience in the field of
aluminum work specialists and has experienced experts at least 5 years of special
work by showing the document reference of experiences
e. This Pre-fabrication work must be done at the workshop complete with equipment/
specific machines for this work so that it can produce precise and accurate works
f. Screw mounted used stainless steel screws and is not visible from the outside
g. The connection must be watertight and qualifies from the force against the wind
h. The details attachment on each meeting/ connection must be tight, flat, neat and
clean from scratches/ paint
i. At each aluminum fitting connection with a wall and so should be given an
impermeable/ waterproof coating layer using Dow Corning, GE, or equivalent
j. Horizontal and vertical connection, shrinkage or cross connection and aluminum
profile combination should be installed perfectly
k. The slits/ gaps between the glass and aluminum should be covered/ closed with Dow
Corning, GE weather shield sealant or equivalent. Installation of sealant should be
guaranteed not to leak caused by rain or air
l. Protection
 All the aluminum must be protected by `` Lacquer Film`` or other materials that
are approved by the Project Manager when taken to the projct site/ field and
pass the materials inspection by the Project Manager
 The protector must be open in certain parts where necessary, when the
aluminum will be done in progress and closed again after the work is completed
 Frame sills should be protected with plastic tape or zincromate primer of
transparent varnish when the plaster work carried out. Other parts can be
protected with "Lacquer Film" until the work is completed
 The use of varnish on the surface which will be given caulking or sealant is not
allowed.
m. The Contractor shall conduct and certify the results of the test/ technical test as
follows :
 Wind load tests
 Air leak test
 Water leak test
 The testing process must be witnessed by the Project Manager.
n. Security
The Contractor shall provide a guarantee installation of the work or the quality of the
material for 10 (ten) years and a guarantee for the chemical coloring for 10 (ten)
years, accompanied by a certificate from the factory
o. Contractors are required to create a mock-up scale of 1 : 1 for approval by the Board
of Directors/ Construction Management as the assignor in the project site/ field that
is wide enough with his own construction outside the building.
Article 20 Curtain Wall Glass Work
1. Scope of Work
Within this scope includes the supply and installation of curtain wall reflectifve glass as
shown in the shop drawing.
2. Control of Work
NI - 3-1970, SII and ASTM.
The standard specification of the manufacture and technical requirements.
3. Materials
a. Stopsol Super Silver, Super Blue Green, 8 mm the off line thickness complete with
tromsom frame 2" x 2 ½", used for Curtain Wall, ex. ASAHIMAS Coating or equivalent,
location site in accordance with the as built drawings
b. Tinted glass, 6 mm thick is used for doors and windows ex. ASAHIMAS or equivalent,
location site in accordance with the as built drawings
c. Maximum tolerance Glass thickness allowed is 3%, ex ASAHIMAS or equivalent.
4. Implementation
a. The contractor must provide an example of the glass to the Project Manager/ Site
Manager for approval unless otherwise stated by the Project Manager, the glass are
brought to the project site already in a state of ready for installation (cut to size)
b. The edge of the glass must be given the best quality sealant such as Dow Corning, GE
or equivalent and approved by the Board of Directors/ Project Manager/ Site
Manager to cover cavities occur. Installation should be clean, tidy and no leak occurs
c. Glass installation works should be carried out by personnel who have experience and
expertise in this kind of work
d. Contractors are required to create a mock-up scale of 1 : 1 for the Board of Directors/
Construction Management as the task giver approval in a fairly wide field area with
its own construction outside the building
e. Glass material that has been attached must be protected from damage and collisions
that may occur and marked to be easily identified.
5. Protection
The contractor is responsible for all glass attached installation untill the Hand Over of the
work. The damage must be repaired/ replaced at the contractor's expense.
Article 21 Sealing Works
1. Scope of Works
This section covers the procurement of materials, equipment, labor, employment and
"Sealing" work on the connections between the Composite Aluminum Panel with Granite,
Glass Work as shown in the shop drawing.
2. Control of Works
a. All this work must be in accordance with the standards mentioned in:
 ASTM-C-920-86: Elastomeric Joint Sealant
 ASTM-C-679
 JIS A-5758
 BC-5889.
b. Recommended Manufacturers : 5 years experiences.
3. Description
Sealant: for moving exterior joints and exposed to the weather.
4. Materials and Products
a. Products used are equivalent :

 BOSTIC
 GENERAL ELECTRIC.
b. Back-up material (filler) of polystyrene foam cylindrical rod Ø 20 mm, or other similar
materials and approved by the Board of Directors/ Project Manager/ Site Manager
c. Sealant for Granite (exterior). Sealant (cover material) of the production of Dow
Corning type 791, GE Silpruf or equivalent
d. Sealant for Weather Seal glass Dow Corning type791, GE, Silruf or equivalent
e. Sealant for Aluminum Composite Panel slits use Bostic polyurethane
f. For Structural Glass Sealant, used DC-795 product, GE Ultraglaze 4000 or equivalent
g. Silicone Sealant Translusiont take Dow Corning, General Electric, Silicone Sanitary
Grade Anti Fungus product or equivalent
h. The colors will be given by the Board of Directors/ Construction Management as
assignor upon the recommendation of the consultant
i. Cleaning agents that can be used for the installation of caulking and sealant include
XYLOL, XYLENE and TOULENE.
5. Implementation
a. The work should be carried out by trained personnel for this type of work. Work
should be neat, meticulous, clean and does not tarnish the other work that are
nearby
b. Use of the substance materials must be fully adhered to the manufacturer’s
recommendations, appropriate to local environmental conditions
c. It is not allowed for air bubbles, dirt on the result of the installation of sealant
d. Dab the silica sand on the exterior surface of the sealant for the weatherproof end
layer.
Article 22 The Roof Closing Work
1. Scope of Works
Covers the installation of roofing zinc alum material local products or any other
similar products approved by the Board of Directors/ Construction Management
Consultant, the installation of zinc alum roof implemented in places like ladder
cover, shaff, holes for Lift and divider walls as it is called/ expressed in shop
drawings.
a. Roofing Materials is accordance to the shop drawings
b. Roof ridge of a good quality material and in accordance with the tile used in
both color right size or of other products made in the country approved by
the Board of Directors/ Construction Management Consultant.
3. Terms of The Installation

a. Before implementation starts, Contractor is required to examine the
implementation drawing (as built drawing) as indicated in the shop drawing,
and done local measurements are required
b. Contractor is required to provide shop drawings that shows connection
between materials with each other materials in need, the terminations and
others that have not/ not covered in the shop drawings, but it meets the
manufacturer's requirements
c. Before starting the installation, all surfaces purlins or order the field, if
necessary to prop or set these sections to the frame and at piling
d. Proper adjustment will ensure the strength of binding between the sheet and
the hook plate. Conversely, improper adjustment will cause disturbance
especially if the buffer distance is small
e. At the time of execution should always be checked carefully, to avoid shifting
the installation. To fix the straightness of the sheet can be adjusted by pulling
the hook plate away or pressing it towards the sheet at the time of
installation of the plate
f. For roof with large inclination angles or vertical, must used positive bolts
(screw or bolt) to prevent the plates from moving downwards
g. Upward bending is performed on top building sheets that are under the end
cover or top end roof cover
h. In almost all roof installation work needs to be done cutting the sheets or
cover with a saw or grind, or also drilling boring for holes
i. All the remnants of the work must be cleaned from the roof surface, in order
to avoid rusting
j. The mounting results should be flat with sufficient clarity to avoid leakage
k. Implementation of the installation of roof covering, must follow the
requirements of the material manufacturer used the following apparatus and
directions of the Board of Directors/ Construction Management Consultant.
CHAPTER 4
LANDSCAPE WORKS
TABLE OF CONTENT
Page
Article 1 Paving Block Works ..................................................................................................... 1

1. Scope of Works ................................................................................................................ 1
2. Materials ......................................................................................................................... 1
3. Installment ...................................................................................................................... 1
Article 2 Garden/ Park Works.................................................................................................... 2

1. Scope of Works ................................................................................................................ 2
2. Terms of Implementation ................................................................................................ 3
3. Maintenance Period ........................................................................................................ 4
4. Planting Medium ............................................................................................................. 5
5. Initial Fertilizing Plant Cultivation .................................................................................... 6
6. Initial Pesticide : Furadan 3 G ......................................................................................... 6
7. Plant Materials ................................................................................................................ 6
8. Watering .......................................................................................................................... 7
9. Material and Other Works ............................................................................................... 7
10. Implementation ............................................................................................................... 7
a. Cleaning ...................................................................................................................... 7
b. Preparation of Planting Medium (Soil mix/ Backfill mix) ............................................ 7
c. Placement and Spreading Planting Medium ............................................................... 7
d. Planting Implementation ............................................................................................ 7
e. Grass/ Grass Plate Planting ......................................................................................... 8
f. Bushes/ Shrubs Planting .............................................................................................. 9
g. Planting of Vines ......................................................................................................... 9
h. Palms and Trees Planting ............................................................................................ 9
i. Plant Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 9
CHAPTER 4
LANDSCAPE WORKS
Article 1 Paving Block Works
1. Scope of Works
Covering of materials, paving blocks, splits, pebbles sand provision, preparation of parts to be
installed the paving blocks, soil excavation for foundation, rolling with compacting machine,
paving blocks installment, vibrated and flattened to get good result.
2. Materials
Paving Block used is a best quality Conblock of Indonesia or equivalent.
a. Type which used

For street/ road and parking area used the type which accordance to the Architect’s
drawings and equipped with a bishop hat
b. The Construction such as :

 Paving Block (the type of sand, cement + split : 8 cm (K = 300/ 24,9 Mpa))
 Solid Concrete Sand : 5 cm
 Base Course : 15 cm, CBR > 60%
 Sub-Grade Course : 20 cm, CBR > 30%
 Sub-Grade is solidified as deep as 30 cm.
c. Equipped with precast/ expose kansteen with K-225 (18,7 Mpa) with practical/ non
structural reinforcement
d. The slope is determined according to the Architectural drawing.
3. Installment
Implementation
Before the paving block starts to be installed, it should be noted in advance the requirements
that must be met, namely :
 The base layer (sub-base and base)
 Frame (kansteen)/ embankment, metal grille and manhole must be properly installed
 Tools Equipment
1) The base layer (sub-base dan base)

 The base layer (sub-base dan base) shal be in accordance to article 22
LANDSCAPE WORKS Page 1

LANDSCAPE WORKS page 2
 The surface of the sub-base shall be in accordance with the slope of the paving
block surface or the desired slope of the road and otherwise stated in the
planning shall be a minimum of 2.5% bidirectional on the cross section.
2) Frame (kansteen)/ embankment, metal grille and manhole

 All Frame (kansteen)/ embankment, metal grille and manhole must be
properly installed prior to the paving block installment
 All excavations for ground/ below installations and piping/ channels should be
implemented prior to installation of paving blocks.
3) Equipment Tools
Required equipment must be prepared before paving blocks installation begins.
The equipment tools such as :
 Plate Vibrator capacity for maximum 1,5 tons and 1,0 ton minimum
 Paving Block Cutter
 Wooden beams and board, 3 meter long which has been shrinked flat for sand
lining tool
 Thread, palm fiber broom and asphalt broom
 Lorries for Paving Block transporter and benches are made of 2 sheets of board
with 1,5 meters long and 2,5 cm thick, which its elbow form
2
 Density Test is done in every and the benches are made of 2 sheets
of board with 1,5 meters long and 2,5 cm thick, which its elbow form
 Mini vibrator to be used must be submitted to the Board of Directors of
Supervision in advance with the data.
Article 2 Garden/ Park Works
1. Scope of Works
a. Provide healthy and non-wilting plants for the areas shown in the drawing. Any type of
work indicated in the drawing will be mentioned, although there are not specifically
mentioned in the specification. Any work not listed in the drawing, but usually a part of
landscape work, is considered part of the work. Construction/ Project Manager
(Landscape Project Officer) has the right to make adjustments and replacements in the
project site to implement landscape concepts in accordance with the site field conditions.
The works in this this section include, but are not limited to the following :
1) Crops/ plants provision

2) Plantation clearing area
3) Planting/ growing media provision
4) Planting
5) Landscape maintenances
6) Creation of the contours
7) Drainage System.
b. The main purpose of this specification is to ensure the provision and planting of healthy
plant material of the highest quality
c. Provides of plants, acquired, bought and transported the plants materials to the project
site plan
d. All materials must be approved by the Construction Manager prior to use on the site.
Plant material should be obtained from a reliable supplier/ nursery with soil and climatic
conditions similar to the site. Plant material transported to the planting site should not be
left unchecked for more than 2 (two) days
e. Replacement
1) If the proposed plant can not be obtained, give a written replacement request to the
Construction Manager 1 (one) week after the contract is submitted. This request can
be of the same species with different sizes or alternate species of the same size as the
proposed contract price adjustment
2) Replacement of plant material is not allowed without written approval from the
Construction Manager.
f. Schedule of Implementation. After the SPK (Work Order Document) submission, the
contractor must do all the work and be given 45 working days for the settlement. A
written work report should be provided to the Construction Manager before starting the
work
g. Selection, marking and ordering of plant material
1) After delivering the SPK (Work Order Document), please make a request to the
Construction Manager for inspection and documentation of plant material that has
been ordered and shipped
2) Plants will be inspected by the Construction Manager, if necessary, checks are made
at the collection / collection point. The shipped plants must conform to the specified
specifications. All inappropriate plants will be rejected. Plants will be inspected by the
Construction Manager, if necessary, checks are made at the collection point. The
shipped plants must conform to the specified which specifications. All inappropriate
plants will be rejected.
h. Red soil (Topsoil). After the submission of the SPK (Work Order Document), indicate the
source of red soil (topsoil), sand and pitch to the Construction Manager.
a. Project Site Minutes of Meeting

Along with commencement of work, a meeting with the Construction Manager and all
interested parties to review the work once a week
b. Underground Utilities and Constraints

Knowing precisely the locations of all the underground utilities and other constraints that
can affect the work. Any constraints should be reported to the Construction Manager.
Protect and keep each utility network at work
c. Storage and Transportation

The landscaping contractor should have adequate storage facilities for equipment, tools
and materials, and to move the facility after the project has finished and tidied up the
work. Landscape contractor please record and finance the facility itself
d. Protection
The contractor shall be liable for any damages caused by the planting of the landscape.
Any damage is corrected and be repaired according to the condition of the previous area
e. Cleaning
The contractor shall keep the work area clean, tidy and orderly during the duration of the
contract. Clean the work area at the end of the work day
f. Samples
The Construction Manager reserves the right to extract and test material samples to suit
specifications at any time. The rejected material should be removed immediately from
the site.
3. Maintenance Period
a. General
Maintain all plants and areas planted in optimum growth and appearance
b. Duration
Plant maintenance will continue for up to one year after the handover of the first work
job. Plant maintenance during project implementation is not considered a maintenance
period
c. Plantat Materials
1) Plant Materials with the following conditions :
 dead or dying and not in a survival condition,
 improperly planted, or
in descending, unhealthy or diseased conditions, should be replaced with a plant
of the same species and size with the original plant within a maximum of two
weeks after the plant replacement instruction appeared.
2) The cost of replacing the plant material during the maintenance period is borne by
the contractor
3) If all or part of the work is not acceptable as per the terms and specifications, the
formal maintenance period of this work will be extended until the deficiencies in the
work are repaired and the work is received by the Construction Manager, at no
additional cost to the owner.
d. Pre-maintenance Inspection and Final Inspection

1) Upon completion of planting and commencement of a formal maintenance period,
pre-maintenance inspections will be undertaken. After the completion of the
maintenance period, final inspections are carried out
2) Construction Manager, Landscape Contractor or their representative must be present
during inspection
3) During inspection, every area should be free of weeds, dead leaves and garbage, and
trimmed neatly
4) If after a pre-maintenance inspection, the owner or the Construction Manager
assumes the work has been performed in accordance with drawings, specifications
and appropriate field adjustments, the person in charge shall provide the written
notification contractor authorizing the Work Settlement and the beginning of the six
month maintenance period. If after a pre-maintenance inspection, the work
performed is considered unacceptable, a list of landscape deficiencies will be issued
to the contractor. Landscape repair works must be completed at the agreed time. If
the repair work can not be completed within the approved time, the contractor will
receive a written warning from the person of responsible for completing the job and
inspection request. In the inspection, if in view of the Construction Manager the job
is unacceptable, another landscape contractor will be called to do the work. The cost
of execution will be deducted from the contract price.
5) After a period of six months of formal maintenance, a final inspection will take place.
If in the final inspection, the Construction Manager assumes all work has been done
according to the specification, then a written notice of the SPK (Work Order
Document) settlement will be issued.
4. Planting Medium
a. Red Soil (Top soil)

Natural, fertile, gravel-free ground crumbs, grains, weeds and roots
b. Mixed Planting Medium

Planting medium for trees, palm, shrubs and ground cover consists of 3 parts, red soil (top
soil), 1 part filter sand/ sieve and 1 part manure (organic fertilizer)
c. Under the planting medium layer (in the basement area)

To obtain the desired height of the soil, a layer of filtered sand/ gravel sand is placed
under the planting medium prior to planting over the basement area.
5. Initial Fertilizing Plant Cultivation

2
Rock Phosphate Trees : 500 gr/nos bush/ groundcover/grass : 100 gr/m .
6. Initial Pesticide : Furadan 3 G

Furadan 3 G granule are mixed into the tree or palm planting hole area according to the
recommended concentration and dose.
7. Plant Materials
a. Amount
To Provide sufficient quantities of plant material needed in the work as in the planting
plan. Bill of Quantities (BQ) should precede the shop drawing of the planting plan
b. Naming
The name of the plant must match the name known to the local plant trader and the
name known to the landscape architect. In dispute, the decision of the landscape
architect is final
c. Terms
1) All trees, palms, shrubs and cover crops should have normal, healthy, strong and pest-
free growth
2) The minimum size received from trees and shrubs is measured after being trimmed,
with normal branching, according to size in BQ
3) Plants with the proper size, but have no shape, normal height and width balance, will
be rejected
4) Trees, palms, shrubs and ground cover larger than the specifications may be used, but
the use of larger plant materials will not change the price in the SPK (Work Order
Document). Plant height should not be replaced to create balance. For many trunked
palms (eg Chrysalidocarpus) at least the plant has 4 stems. Vine plants have at least
two shoots according to recommended height and have good roots.
5) Trees and shrubs should be planted in containers of appropriate size with drawings or
specifications and should have enough roots so they can be removed from containers
(drums, sacks or polybags) without damage to the roots
6) Palm and trees sent with small or insufficient root balls will be rejected. In all cases,
the responsible decision is final. Sufficient root ball diameter size is at least three
times the diameter of the stem in the lower base
7) Any tree, palm, shrub and ground cover with a weak and thin trunk will not be able to
support itself in the open, will be rejected
8) Trees and palms should be erect, with uniform shape without damage, bent or have
more than one main stem, unless requested
9) Root cuts should be healthy, vegetative material with good roots at one or more
points.
8. Watering
The landscape contractor can use the existing water source on the site. The contractor shall
provide hoses and sprays for watering the plants. Where other provisions concerning the
technical details of watering shall be determined by both parties (developers and landscaping
contractors) prior to commencement of construction in the field.
9. Materials and Other Works
The landscape contractor should include the following materials and work in the BQ offer
price.
10. Implementation
a. Cleaning
1) Cleaning all planting areas of existing vegetation, which are not in accordance with
the plan and all other waste and other foreign materials considered obstacles to the
implementation of planting and or not looking good
2) Maintain established landform/ grade (only on completed grading area)
3) The main contractor shall be responsible for the cleaning of the plant tubs and submit
it to the Landscape Contractor in a state ready for planting. It is the responsibility of
the landscape contractor to make sure this is done. If it fails, the cleaning work and
the preparation of the tubs are the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor
4) Arrange all prepared materials into the inner area of the site as directed by the
Construction Manager.
b. Preparation of Planting Medium (Soil mix/ Backfill mix)
1) Specified planting medium (see Section 2. Products) shall be prepared and supervised
in the mixing practices to obtain the quality of the soil mix as expected
2) Place of manufacture of planting medium can be divided in several point of
manufacture. Planting medium should be made in one processing place before then
spread to the planting area or planting point
3) Before the planting medium is spread, the planting area should be decompacted, and
watered for areas that look very dry. No spread planting medium work should be
done prior to approval from the Construction Manager.
c. Placement and Spreading Planting Medium
Planting medium is spread and placed in planting area with the thickness (volume) as
follows :
1) Trees and Palms : 100 x 100 x 100 cm

2) Instant plants (trees and palms ready for transplant) : 150 x 150 x 100 cm
3) Accent plant (Feature plant) : 60 x 60 x 60 cm

4) Bushes/ Shrubs : 60 cm
5) Vines : 60 cm
6) Groundcovers : 30 cm
7) Turf : 10 cm.
d. Planting Implementation
1) Plant Handling
a) Handling the plant in a way that prevents damage to plants. Plants should be
protected and if necessary wrapped in the appointment process, waiting to be
moved, during transplanting, and storage on site. Unprotected plants should not
be transported in very hot weather. All plant material must be kept moist during
the transfer and storage process
b) Keep plants from sun and airy dry every time. Plants that can not be planted
immediately after delivery should be kept in shade, well maintained and
adequately irrigated
c) All specimens, trees and palms grown in the field and stored (stock) must be
planted on the same day as the delivery to the site. Plants should not be left
unplanted for more than two days at the site.
2) Plants Placement
a) The location of the plant shall be marked by the Landscape Contractor to be
reviewed by the Landscape Construction Manager prior to the execution of the
work. The Landscape Contractor must notify the Lands Construction Manager 3
days in advance before signing
b) Plants should be placed in the center with fixed positions on suitable solid plant
medium, which has been well blended
c) Plants should be placed on a flat ground level with the final grade / terraces and
planted to give the best appearance to the structure or the immediate
environment.
3) Support
Right immediately after planting all trees and palms with a height of 2.0 m or more, as
in detail, given a support.
e. Grass/ Grass Plate Planting
1) All grasses supplied by contractors must be of the kind Zoysia Matrella (Manila Grass)
and / or Cynodon Dactylon (Bermuda Grass) are healthy and vigorous from approved
sources in accordance with those listed in the BOQ. Grass or grass plate should be cut
square with size about 15 x 15 cm, and 5 cm thick. All grass should be clean of weeds
(especially mimosa pudica/ cyperus) and garbage
2) The grass plates should not be split into small pieces for planting
3) The grass plate should be placed side by side on the ground with a distance of no
more than 2 cm.
4) The grass should be planted in the area that has been prepared immediately after
delivery to prevent damage
5) Immediately water the grass area after planting. Watering in sufficient quantities to
wet the plate
6) After the watering grass and soil have dried, grind or mash the grass area to ensure a
good bond between the plate and the soil and eliminate bumpy irregularities.
f. Bushes/ Shrubs Planting
1) Replanting carefully and in accordance with nursery practical standard

2) Use the planting medium as specified in Section 2 above for filling planting holes
3) Spacing is adjusted to the size of plant diameter and desired plant volume per square
meter.
g. Planting of Vines

3) Spacing adjusted to the size of the plant diameter approximately 30 cm and planted
adjacent to the foot of the wall
4) Vine plants should be adhered to the support structure by binding the top shoots
upward.
h. Palms and Trees Planting

3) Support each tree and palm immediately after planting. Install a bamboo stand for
each tree and palm.
i. Plant Maintenance
1) Maintenance will include, but is not limited to :

1) Protection of traffic-crossed areas, by constructing barricades soon after
planting
2) Watering the planting area as much as the need to support active growth,
keeping the area moist but not drowning (daily)
3) Fertilization as needed and according to manufacturer recommendation (1-2
times/month)
4) Maintain weed-free planting areas and weedy grasses through daily weed
cleaning if required. Weed out the weeds up to the roots (2 times/month)
5) Check all plants for diseases and pest attacks (every month or as needed). Move
the damaged or infected plants. The affected plant material is treated promptly
6) Immediately remove dead or dying plants. The replacement should be of the
same type and size as the previous crop (as needed)
7) Repetition of buffering, tightening of bonds or returning to appropriate altitudes
or re-enforcing crops that are not in an appropriate growing position (as
required)
8) Trim the grass to as high as 15 mm (once/month). On a mini golf area, keep the
grass on 10-12 mm tall
9) Tidy up all trees, shrubs and ground cover as directed by the Landscape
Responsible Person to create the desired shape, habits and look of plants
(once/month)
10) Make notes of maintenance procedures that include labor, job descriptions,
fertilizers, irrigation, and others. Provide a copy of the maintenance records to
the Landscore Responsible Person.
2) Schedule of Routine Maintenance Work :

a) Daily Watering
b) Daily weed cleaning and if needed
c) Planting Forking of Monthly Plant
d) Monthly Edging
e) Fertilization twice/month
f) Pest monthly spraying or if needed in the presence of pest and diseases
g) Grass pruning/ triming once/month
h) Tidying up/ trimming the shrubs/ bushes once/month and or if soil cover is
required
i) Replacement of plants and If needed small patches of plant improvements
j) Provision of crop support for if required to arrange the growth of trees and
plants.
3) Labor
a) Supervisor : 6 days a week
b) Maintenance worker team : 7 days a week.
4) The Landscape Contractor shall establish a Schedule of Routine Maintenance

concerning the maintenance activities, equipment used, medicines or types of
fertilizers used and the number and distribution of daily maintenance personnel to
the Construction Manager for approval prior to commencement of maintenance
period.
CHAPTER 5
ELECTRICAL WORKS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
Article 1 General Regulation

1. Installment Regulation .......................................................................... 1
2. Shop Drawings/ As Built Drawings/ Images ........................................... 2
3. Coordination.......................................................................................... 2
4. Implementation of The Installation ....................................................... 2
5. Testing and Commisioning .................................................................... 3
6. Maintenance Period and Handover ....................................................... 3
7. Reports .................................................................................................. 3
8. The Responsiblity in Charge of The Implementation ............................. 4
9. Addition/ Reduction / Changes of The Installation ................................ 4
10. Permits - Licenses .................................................................................. 4
11. Chiseling, Welding and Drilling .............................................................. 5
12. Routine and Special Inspections ............................................................ 5
13. Project Site Minutes of Meeting ............................................................ 5
Artice 2 Electrical Installation System

1. Scope of Works...................................................................................... 5
2. Terms of Materials and Equipment ....................................................... 6
3. Installation Requirements ..................................................................... 17
4. Testing ................................................................................................... 20
5. Handover, Maintenance and Warranty ................................................. 21
6. Materials and Equipment Product......................................................... 21
Article 3 Tranformator Installation Works

1. Description of General Regulatory Requirements ................................. 22
2. Scope of Works...................................................................................... 22
3. General Requirement for Materials and Equipment ............................. 23
4. Materials and Equipment Technical Specifications ............................... 23
5. Installation Requirements ..................................................................... 27
6. Testing ................................................................................................... 28
8. Materials and Equipment Products ....................................................... 29
Article 4 Generator Set

1. Scope of Works...................................................................................... 29
3. Installation Specifications ...................................................................... 36
4. Testing ................................................................................................... 39
6. Supervision ............................................................................................ 40
7. Training ................................................................................................. 41
Article 5 Telephone and Data Installation System
1. Scope of Works...................................................................................... 41
2. General Requirements of The Materials and Equipment ...................... 43
3. Technical Specifications of The Materials and Equipment .................... 43
4. Specifications of The Session Initiative Protocol (SIP) PABX .................. 52
5. Technical Installation Requirements ..................................................... 57
6. Testing ................................................................................................... 58
Article 6 Sound System

1. Scope of Works...................................................................................... 59
3. Installation Technical Requirements ..................................................... 62
4. Testing ................................................................................................... 63
Article 7 Fire Alarm System

1. Scope of Works...................................................................................... 63
2. Description of Fire Alarm System .......................................................... 64
5. Testing ................................................................................................... 68
Article 8 Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) System

1. Scope of Works...................................................................................... 69
4. Testing ................................................................................................... 73
CHAPTER V
ELECTRICAL WORKS
Article 1 General Regulation
1. Installment Regulation
a. In implementing these installation, contractor must fullfill the following regulations :

 PUIL 2011
 VDE, ISO, BS, LMK, IEC, etc.
b. Contractor should follow and adhere to all existing requirements such as :
 General Requirements
 Technical Specifications
 Shop Drawing
 Minutes of Aanwijzing.
c. A power source comes from State Electricity Company (PLN)
d. The Electrical Installation facility allows for :
 Illumining inside and outside the building
 Regular power socket outlet and power source
 Air Conditioning and ventilation
 Hydrant, Transfer Pumps, Booster, Submersible Pumps
 Communications equipment and electronics
 Elevators and Gondola.
e. The Electrical Contractor Requirements
 Must be approved by the owner/ Board of Directors/ Construction Management
 There should be Experts who are with Madya Level valid certified (Surat Keterangan
Ahli).
f. All installation of lighting and power outlet socket using 3 core system wherein the third
core is for grounding merged into the electrical panel. While the installation of the divider
panel using a 2 cables core
th
g. All the electrical panel must be grounding with BC wire cable or used the 5 core of the
main toevoer
h. All metal pipes installed under the ground should be anti-rust protective
i. All pipes installation outside the concrete slab casting and unembedded under the ground
should be given with a color marker to determined at the ends of the pipes or cables and
on the pipes or cables in every 10 meters distance.
j. 220 V / 380 V, 3 phase, 50 Hz, the lighting and 220 V 1 phase power socket outlet voltage
system installation.
ELECTRICAL WORKS page 1

ELECTRICAL WORKS Page 2
2. Shop Drawings/ As Built Drawings/ Images
a. Shop Drawing and requirements is a unified complementary and equally binding

b. On this drawing of the system shows the general layout of the equipment, while the
installation must be done with attention to the condition of the existing building and also
considering how to service/ maintenance easily if the equipment is operated
c. Architectural and Structural/ Civil shop drawings should be used as a reference for the
implementation and installation of details finishing
d. Before the project begin, Contractor must submit shop drawings and details to the Board
of Directors/ Construction Management to be inspected and approved beforehand. By
submitting these shop drawings, Contractor is deemed to studied the situation of other
installation connected with this installation
e. The Installation Contractor should make as built drawings of the installation, along with
detailing and maintenance instruction and must be submitted to the Board of Directors/
Construction Management on the First Handover in 3 (three) sets of documents in bound
and equipped with table of content and data notation.
3. Coordination
a. Contractor which implementer of the installation shall cooperate with the other
Contractor, so all the works can proceed smoothly in accordance with apredetermined
time
b. Need a good Coordination, so the implementation does not impede the progress of
another installation
c. When implementing this installation preclude another installation, then all consequences
are on behalf of the Contractor responsibility.
4. Implementation of The Installation
a. Prior to the installation begins, Contractor must submit shop drawings, as built drawing
and details to the Board of Directors/ Construction Management in 3 (three) sets of
duplicate documents for approval
b. The Contractor shall conduct a re-examination of all size and capacity of the equipment
that will be installed. If there is something questionable, Contractor shall immediately
contact the Board of Directors/ Management Construction. Measuring and/ or the wrong
capacity sellecting of the equipment will be Contractor responsibility.
5. Testing and Commisioning
a. Installation Contractor must perform all testing and measurements necessary to

determine whether the entire installation are function properly and be able to meet all
requirements
b. All the materials and equipment needed to conduct such testing is the Contractor
responsibility.
6. Maintenance Period and Handover
a. Installation equipment should be guaranteed for 1 (one) year since at the time of The First
Handover
b. The maintenance period for this installation is 6 (six) months commencing upon The First
Handover
c. During this maintenance period, The Installation Contractor is required to correct any
damage that would occur without additional cost
d. During this maintenance period, the entire installation has been completed is still under
the responsibility of the Contractors
e. During the duration of this maintenance, if the Installation Contractors does not
implement a reprimand from the Board of Directors/ Construction Management over
repairs/ replacement/ set-up is required, then the Board of Directors/ Construction
Management reserves the right to submit a repair/ replacement/ setup to the other party
for the costs of this installation borne to the Contractors
f. During this maintenance period, Contractors must train the officers appointed by the
Owner/ Board of Directors/ Construction Management so it can recognize the installation
system to carry out the maintenance works
g. The First Handover of these installation can only be carried out after examinized by
authority with good results and signed jointly by the Contractor and the Board of
Directors/ Construction Management attached with the Bureau of Safety and other
authorized agencies.
7. Reports
a. Daily and Weekly Reports

Contractor shall make a daily and weekly reports that provides an overview of :
1) Physical Activities
2) Notes and Orders from the Board of Directors/ Construction Management submitted
orally or in written
3) The number of incoming materials/ rejected
4) The number of labors/ workers
5) The Weather Condition, and
6) Added/ subtracted Works.
b. The weekly report is a summary of daily reports and after signed by the Project Manager
must be submitted to the Board of Directors/ Management Construction to be noted/
approved.
c. Testing Reports
1) The Installation Contractor must submit to the Board of Directors/ Management
Construction 3 (three) sets of duplicate documents about this following things :
2) The Results of all operating requirements of the installation testing
3) The Results of the equipment testing
4) The Results of the cables testing

5) Etc.
d. All testing and measurement to be carried out must be witnessed by the Board of
Directors/ Construction Management.
8. The Responsibility in Charge of The Implementation
a. The Installation Contractor must put a person in charge of the implementation which
expert and experienced that must always present in the project site, who act as the
representative of the executor and has the ability to deliver of technical decisions and the
responsibility in accepting any instruction to be given by the Board of Directors/
Construction Management
b. The person in charge must also always be available on the project site when needed/
desired by the Board of Directors/ Construction Management.
9. Addition/ Reduction/ Changes of The Installation
a. Implementation of installations that deviate from the plan adjusted to the field
conditions, must be approved in written in advance of the planning consultant and the
b. The installation Contractor must submit any changes of the shop drawings to the the
Board of / Construction Management in 3 (three) sets of duplicate documents
c. The changes of the materials and other things, must be submitted by the Contractor to
the Board of Directors/ Construction Management, and the added/ subtract/ any changes
of the works have to be approved by the Board of Directors/ Construction Management in
written.
10. Permits – Licences
Obtaining of permission arrangement required for the implementation of this installation as

well as all costs needs are Contractor responsibility.
11. Chiseling, Welding and Drilling
a. Chiseling for installment in accordance to it needs, whether wall, floor or else in necessary
to the installation implementation and to restore its original condition, is the Contractor
scope of works
b. Chiseling/ welding/ drilling for installment on the wall nor the floor can only be
implemented if there is consent of the Board of Directors/ Construction Management in
written.
12. Routine and Special Inspections
a. Routine and regular inspection should be carried out by the Installation Contractor
periodically and not less then every 2 (two) weeks
b. Special inspection should be carried out by the Installation Contractor, if there is a request
from the Board of Directors/ Construction Management.
13. Project Site Minutes of Meeting
Contractor reperesentatives should always be present in every project site minutes of

meeting which arrange by the Board of Directors/ Construction Management.
Article 2 Electrical Installation System
1. Scope of Works
a. General
Contractor must offer the entire scope of works described well in this specifications or
shown in the shop drawings, where the materials and equipment used in accordance with
the provisions of this specifications. If it turns out there is found any difference between
the materials specifications and or equipment that is fitted to the specifications required
by this article, is the obligation of the contractor to replace the materials or equipment so
that in accordance with the provisions of this article without the provision of additional
costs.
b. Standard And Regulation
The descriptions and these terms describes material specifications details and how the
Low Voltage Electrical being install, includes a complete and perfect works from providing
the materials on the site, installing and fixing wage, storage, transportation, testing,
maintenance and warranty.
c. Description of Power & Lighting Work Scope
As shown in the shop drawings, Contractor of the electrical installation work must
perform procurement and installation as well as handing in good condition and ready to
be use.
d. The Outline oThe Work Scope are as follows :
1) Procurement, installment, testing and commisioning of Low Voltage
2) Procurement, installment, testing and commisioning of the Lighting and regular
electrical outlet socket
3) Procurement, installment, testing and commisioning of Lighting Armature
4) Procurement, installment, testing and commisioning of Grounding System
5) Shop Drawings
6) As Built Drawings
7) Obtain approval for intallation from the competent authority agencies

8) Procurement, installation of wires and cables rack for electricity power and lightings,
support equipment and accesories in the building
9) Procurement, installment, testing and commisioning of Lightning Rod
10) Procurement of Operator Training from the Owner/ Construction management.
2. Terms of Materials and Equipment
The basic/ common terms of the materials and equipment are as follows :
a. Materials or equipment of the same qualifications or type, brand requested or made by
the same factory
b. In each case, a part or some other parts of equipment that clearly specified of the
amount, then the amount of those parts must remain fulfilled whenever the equipment is
required, so it is a complete unit. Whenever the material or equipment manufacturer or
brand is mentioned, it is intended to bind the quality, the type of the planning and the
characteristics.
c. Capacity listed in as built drawings or specifications are minimum
d. The contractor may choose a larger capacity than that requested by the condition :
1) Asking the approval of the Employer Task/ Owner/ Board of Directors/ Construction
Management
2) It does not cause the system become more difficult
3) Do not cause material gain
4) Do not ask for added space
5) It does not cause any additional costs
6) Do not decrease the time.
Material and Equipment
a. Power Cable
1) Installation Cables
a) 1000 volts and 600/1000 volts of voltage class
b) Copper core conductor
c) PVC isolation, sheated and others
d) The core amount of one or many
e) Cable type : NYM and others according to the as built drawing
f) Domestic product match to the PLN/ CML and SII Standard.
2) Feeder Cable
a) 1000 Volt of cable class
b) Copper core conductor
c) Isolation of PVC, Sheated
d) Cables type : NYY and NYFGBY.
3) Grounding Cable
a) Copper core
b) Cable type : BC or NYY.
4) Fire Resistant Cable

a) The current voltage 600/ 100 Volt
b) Copper core
c) 750 oC minimum temperatures in 3 hours.
b. Pipes And Fitting

1) All the wiring for lighting, power outlet socket and exhaust fan carried in High Impact
PVC Conduit pipes and fittings for the building except for the feeder in a trench or
embedded in the ground using high grade galvanized pipes
2) Sparing use of galvanized pipe which is 2 levels above the pipe installation
3) The installation of lighting armature installation path use PVC flexible pipes
4) All the technical execution of the branching i.e., deflection, joining and so must use
appropriate fittings namely sockets, elbouw, T-doos, croos-doos, 3M terminal,
insulation tapes, steel clamps etc
5) All the pipes which are not in a casting-casts or embedded in the ground must be
given a marker color to be determined at the ends of pipes and cables every distance
of 10 m
6) Electrical Installation not justified sparing along with the installation of the cables.
c. Cable Tray, Cable Rack and Hanger
1) Cable Tray/ Cable Ladder

 The buffer material made of perforated galvanized steel plate
 Elbow brackets as support material painted
 The width size adapted from the shop drawings/ images
 The size of elbow brackets should be calculated of the cable load and the
flextures
 Use 3/8" rebar diameter for cable hanger
 In every distance of 40 cm should given reinforcement amplifier so it shaped
cable ladder
 All materials must given primer and painted gray.
2) Cable/ Wire rack and Hanger

a) On the riser shaft
• Cable rack Installed in shape of cable ladder
• The elbow brackets materials for anchor and frame
• The Ladder Cross from brackets
• Steel plate clamps and bolt nuts
• All materials must given primer and painted gray.
b) Hanger
• For the installation of one or two lanes are used hanger from metal plate
which is clamped every distance of 100 cm. Hanger onto the plate with
Ramset or fischerplug
• Bolts nuts and metal plate
• All materials must given primer and painted gray.
d. Installation Tools
1) The control tub and the lid made of reinforced concrete for grounding
2) Sandfill, gravel and the landfill
3) The yard and garden light pole cast in the concrete foundation.
e. Switches and Power Outlet Sockets
1) The mechanism of rocker switches with a rating of 10 A - 250 volt with a white color
base, kind of recessmounted or surfacemounted. In the supply switch must be
complete by the box where the holder made of metal material
2) Regular Power outlet socket with rating 10 A - 250 Volt. 2 poles plus 1 for grounding.
Power outlet with a rating of 16 A - 380 Volt. 3 or 4 pole plus 1 for grounding. In the
supply outlet should be complete by the box where the holder of the metal material
or surfacemounted recessmounted type
3) Power outlet rating 16 A – 380 Volt, 5 pole, complete with seated/ stand and cover
for laboratory and work shop area.
f. Armature Lamps
Installing all kind of lights corresponding to the Shop Drawing.
1) Balk Lamp TL 2 x 14 Watt dan TL 2 x 28 Watt

 Material light box of sheet steel with minimum thickness of 0.5 mm (finishing
not included)
 Basic anti-rust paint, with powder coating finished
 Fitting and starter holder use Phillips
 T5 TL 2 x 14 Watt and TL 2 x 28 Watt Tube type
 Grounding Terminal on the body
 Expose bolt with a special head
 Electronic ballast type separate with the tube lights
2
 Wiring inside the box in 1 mm flexible types.
2) TKI/ TKO TL 2 x 14 Watt & TL 2 x 28 Watt

 Material and component box same as (1)
 Reflector painted.
3) RMLM (M5) 2 x 14 Watt TL and TL 2 x 28 Watt

 Reflector Optic Mirror (M5)
4) RMLM (M5) 2 x 24 Watt TL and TL 2 x 28 Watt + Cover

 Optic Mirror Reflector (M5)
 Prismatic Cover.
5) Barret lamp (BSA 32) for Stairs

 Box lamps are made of Sheet Steel 0.7 mm
 Anti-corrosion process
 Painting system uses fuel paint/ powder coating
 Capacitor, fittings, Starter Ballast Philips
 Block system Terminal
 Milk white Acrylic Cover
 TL – E 32 watt Tube
 Equipped with a NiCAd battery at least for 2 hours.
6) Down Light (DRM), 5 Watt, 7 Watt, 11 Watt LED

 Allumunium light box, whereas reflector using a mirror reflector
 154 mm diameter
2
 Wiring inside the box in 1 mm flexible types
 Fittiing using E – 27.
7) Exit Lamp TL 10 Watt

 Allumunium Light Box
 "EXIT" in a green light
2
 Wiring inside the box in 1 mm flexible types
 NiCad Battery at least for 2 hours.
8) The light that has not been mentioned in the spesification will be determined later,
accoring to the lighting or the interior design.
g. Electrical Panel
For this project the electrical panel must meet the following requirements :
1) Panel LVMDP
a) LVMDP should fit as shown in the Shop Drawing
b) The whole assembly including a housing, busbars, protective equipment must be
planned, built, tested, and which need to be rectified in accordance with the
requirements of Main Panel Low Voltage must be in door types made of steel
plate, which has a resistance to impact and made according to Form 3 standard
c) The construction must be made of a rigid steel frame, which can retain its
structure by mechanical stress at the time of short connect
d) Framework is fully wrapped on top, bottom and sides with a sufficient cover
plate louvers must be fine enough for ventilation where necessary to cope with
the temperature rise of the carrying a current and voltage parts in accordance
with the requirements of 2011 LMK PUIL for the covered equipment
e) The materials which with a voltage must be prevented completely of the
possibility of water splashing. All measuring meter and transfer switch are
required to be grouped on a single panel board that is hinged and hidden.
f) Breaker Component (ACB, MCCB) which inside of the in Incoming LVMDP both
on the generator input side as well as PLN must be given a Communication
Module
g) Communication Module to both sides of the breaker is needed to integrate into
the system of supervision, so that the function of protection, control and
monitoring can be done remotely, such as :
 Identify breaker
 Indication status and of the breaker condition
 Function of protection and alarm Setting
 Analysis of the alternating parameters of current power for operation and
maintenance purposes
 Communication module must be compatible with existing communication
protocols such as Modbus, Lonwork, BACnet, or other communication
module
 Communication module should a breaker type which is adjustable and
micrologic.
h) LVMDP serves to receive electrical power from the Control Panel and the
secondary side of the transformator Generator set subsequently distribute to
each load
i) ACB Main Breaker and Branch Breaker used ACB or MCCB and as a Safety
Breaker match to the Shop Drawing.
2) General
a) Running Voltage : 220 volt / 380 volt - 3 phase - 50 Hz
b) Interupting capacity to the Main Breaker 50 kA and Branches of at least 42 kA
c) Freestanding indoor panels complete type with door
d) Traffic Feeder :
 Exit from above using cable
 Exit from bottom using cable
 All Incoming sourced from PLN must be equipped with Arrester 65 KA.
e) Every detail in the shop drawing must be made by the Contractor and approved
by the Construction Management prior to the making.
3) Power Termination (Outgoing Breaker)

a) Rated breaking capacity on 220 volt / 380 volt - 1 phase / 3 phase - AC is not
less than 42 kA
b) All Power Breaker using the adjustable type
c) Release must contain :
 Under Voltage Relay on PLN side
 Thermal overload release
 Magnetic short circuit release (with setting range).
4) Panel House and Busbar

a) The Panel House size should be able to cover all equipment with sufficient
placement electrically and physically
b) Installation of all components must be achieved from the front with ease
c) The Panel House type are Free Standing type with the iron plate thickness not
less than 2 mm, while the Wall Mounted type with the plate thickness not less
than 1.2 mm
d) All the steel plate surface before painting should receive cleansing treatment
such as "Phospatizing treatment" or similar. The inside and outside should get at
least one layer of retaining rust paint. For the final layer finishing of the outer
part paint it with essentially gray
e) Space should be sufficient to facilitate the achievement of the work
f) The labels are made of a trafolite that is composed white black-coated and
engraved according to the needs in bahasa/ the Indonesian language
g) The ventilation openings of the side panels
h) All wiring inside the panel should consist of neatly colored wires, easy to trace,
and easy to maintenance
i) Busbar and grafting techniques should be according to the PUIL regulation.
Materials using high conductivity copper, rectangular shape mounted on isolator
pole in distance and power pursuant to withstand the pressure and mechanical
short circuit level
j) Busbar in a panel to be prepared as well as possible until all other cables
terminal or busbar not cause unnatural curvature. Busbars must be painted as
standard to distinguish the phases
k) Connecting rod between busbars with breaker must have a sufficient cross-
section with a current rating of not less than 125% of the breaker rating
l) In the busbar connections to be given a protective material (tinned)
m) Cable end of the cables must be covered with copper cable shoes and gloves in
colored.
5) Other instrument and measurement devices

a) Instrument and measurement devices
watt) digital type
b) Pilot Lamp
c) Double rate fare KWh meter complete with current transformator.
h. Bank Capacitor
a) Automatic Capacitor Banks

 Rated Voltage end : 525 Volt
 Frequency : 50 Hz, 3 Phase
 Rated Power : As the Picture
 Tolerances : - 0 / + 10%
 Continuous overvoltage : 1.1 x Uⁿ
 Dielectric Losses : less than 0.5 W / KVAR
 Mounting : Indoor
o o
 Category : - 40 C / 50 C
 Standard : IEC 70-70A, BS 1650, VDE 0560
 Protection : HRC Fuse in fuse base size 1 each
 Steps : 1.8 x 1ⁿ
n
 Contractor rating : 1.4 x l .
b) Power Capacitor
 Type : Metalized films (Dry type), sheet steel casing
 Rated Voltages : 525 V
 Insulation : 3 kV rms / 15 k V crest
 Losses : 0.5 W / KVAR
 Continuous overvoltage : 1.1 x U
 Overcurrent : 1.5 x I
 All-film dielectric : Polypropylene

o o
 Temperature Category : - 40 up to +50 C
 Standard : IEC A, IEC 110, BS 1650, VDE 0560
 Protection : Discharge resistors.
c) Reactive Power Regulator, with Cosphi Display, Total Current Display, Reactive
Current Display.
Technical Specifications
 Type : 9 steps / 12 steps
 Power supply : 220-240 V, 380-415 V, Burden 15VA
 Frequency : 50 Hz
 CT : 5A or as required
 Output relay : 7.5 A 250 V AC open normally
 Alarm relay : 7.5 A 250 V AC closed when alarms on.
i. MDP (Main Distribution Panel)
a. General
1) Running voltage : 220 volt / 380 volt - 3 phase - 50 Hz.
2) Freestanding indoor panels complete type with door
3) Traffic feeder :
 Come from the bottom, out of the top using a cable
 Out from the bottom using a cable.
4) Every Incoming sourced from LVMDP must be equipped with Arrester 42 KA

5) Every detail in the shop drawing must be made by the Contractor and approved
by the Construction Management prior to the making.
b. Power disconnection
1) Rated breaking capacity on 220 volt / 380 volt - 1 phase / 3 phase - AC is not
less than 42 kA
2) All Power Breaker using the adjustable type
3) Release must contain:
 Thermal overload release.
 Magnetic short circuit release (has setting range).
c. Panel House and Busbar

1) The Panel House size should be able to cover all equipment with sufficient
placement of electrically and physically
2) Installation of all components must be achieved from the front with ease
3) The Panel House type are Free Standing type with the iron plate thickness not
less than 2 mm
4) All the steel plate surface before painting should receive cleansing treatment
least one layer of retaining rust paint. For the outer part final layer finished with
essentially gray
5) Space should be sufficient to facilitate the achievement of the work
6) The labels are made of a trafolite that is composed white-black coated and
7) The ventilation openings of the side panels
8) All wiring inside the panel should consist of neatly colored wires, easy to trace,
9) Busbar and grafting techniques should be according to the PUIL regulation.
short circuit level
10) Busbar in a panel to be prepared as well as possible until all other cable terminal
or busbar not cause unnatural curvature. Busbars must be painted as standard
to distinguish the phases
11) Rod connection between busbars with breaker must have a sufficient cross-
section with a current rating not less than 125% of the rating breaker
12) In the busbar connections to be given a protective material (tinned)
13) Cables end of the cable must be covered with copper cable shoes and gloves in
colored.
d. Instrument and other pointing devices

1) Instrument and measurement devices ( A kilo
watt) using a digital type
2) Pilot Lamp
3) KWh meter complete with current transformator.
j. DP (Distribution Panel) and SDP (Sub Distribution Panel)
a. General
1) The running voltage : 220 volt / 380 volt - 3 phafase - 50 Hz
2) Freestanding indoor panel type complete with door
3) Traffic feeder :
 Come in from the bottom using the cable
 Out of the above cable.
4) All of every detail in the Shop Drawing must be made by the Contractor and
approved by the Construction Management prior to the making.
b. Power Disconnection
1) Rated Breaking Capacity up to 220 volt / 380 volt - 1 phase / 3 phase - AC is not
less than 25 kA
2) All Power Breaker using the Adjustable type
3) Release must contain :
 Thermal overload release
 Magnetic short circuit release (has setting range).
c. Panel House and Busbar

1) The Panel House size should be able to cover all equipment with sufficient
placement for electrically and physically
2) Installation of all components must be achieved from the front with ease
3) The Panel House Wall Mounted type with the plate thickness not less than
1.6 mm
4) All the steel plate surface before painting should receive cleansing treatment
least one layer of retaining rust paint. For the outer part final layer finished with
essentially gray
5) Space should be sufficient to facilitate the achievement of the work
6) The labels are made of a trafolite that is composed white black-coated and
7) The ventilation openings of the side panels
8) All wiring inside the panel should consist of neatly colored wires, easy to trace,
9) Busbar and grafting techniques should be according to the PUIL regulation.
short circuit level
10) Busbar in a panel to be prepared as well as possible until all other cable terminal
11) Rod liaison between busbars with breaker must have a sufficient cross-section
with a current rating of not less than 125% of the rating breaker
12) In the busbar connections to be given a protective material (tinned)
13) Cables end of the cable must be covered with copper cable shoes and gloves in
colored.
d. Instrument and other measurement devices

1) Instrument and measurement kilo
watt) using a digital type
2) Pilot Lamp
3) KWh meter complete with current transformator.
k. Lighting Panel (LP) and The Power Panel (PP)
1) General
a) The running current voltage : 220 volt / 380 volt - 3 phafase - 50 Hz.
b) Wall Mounted type indoor panel to the wall complete with a door.
c) Traffic feeder :
 Go in through the bottom using the cable
 Out of the above using cable.
d) All of every detail in the Shop Drawing must be made by the Contractor and
approved by the Construction Management prior to the making.
2) Power Termination
a) Rated Breaking capacity up to 220 volt / 380 volt - 1 phase / 3 phase - AC is not
less than 10 kA (for equipment) and 6 kA (for lighting)
b) All Power Breaker using Adjustable type (incoming) and Fixed (outgoing)
c) Release must contain :
a. Thermal overload realase
b. Magnetic short circuit release (it has setting range).
d) Incoming Power Panel equipped with Arrester 15 KA.
3) Panel House and Busbar

a) The Panel House size should be able to cover all equipment with sufficient
placement for all electrically and physically
b) Installation of all components must be achieved from the front with ease
c) The Panel House Wall Mounted type to the wall not less than 1.2 mm
d) All the steel plate surface before painting should receive cleansing treatment
such as "Phospatizing treatment" or similar. The inside and outside should get
at least one layer of retaining rust paint. For the outer part of the final layer
finished with essentially gray
e) Space should be sufficient to facilitate the achievement of the work
f) The labels are made of a trafolite that is composed white black-coated and
g) The ventilation openings of the side panels
h) All wiring inside the panel should consist of neatly colored wires, easy to trace,
and easy maintenance
i) Busbar and grafting techniques should be according to the PUIL regulation.
short circuit level
j) Busbar in a panel to be prepared as well as possible until all other cable terminal
k) Connecting rod between busbars with breaker must have a sufficient cross-
section with a current rating of not less than 125% of the rating breaker
l) In the busbar connections to be given a protective material (tinned)
m) Cables end of the cable must be covered with copper cable shoes and gloves in
colored
n) For Outdoor Lighting Panel, mounted on the foundation with Outdoor panel
type (IP 54).
4) Instrument and other pointing devices

a) Pilot Lamp
b) KWh meter complete with current transformator.
l. Grounding materials
1) All the electrical system using the Panel room to the riser grounding system use BC
cable according to the capacity of each panel. While the riser cable using a NYY
2
70 mm grounding cable
2) The grounding cable which is not mentioned and how these connections must be in
accordance with the specified in PUIL 2011.
3. Installation Requirements
a. Installation and Equipment Requirements

1) The contractor shall examine all dimensions immediately after receiving the Work
Order document (SPK). And can submit proposals to the Construction Management,
what needs to be changed or rearranged so that all plants and equipment in the
system can be placed and work well.
a) Prior to installation of materials and equipment do the measurement, researching
peils in the project according to the actual situation
b) If there are differences between the measurements in the field, the data
submitted to the Construction Management
c) Creating photos documentation of the physical achievement of 0% - 25% - 50% -
75% and 100%.
2) The Contractor shall make the shop drawing containing the floor plan, section and
detail according the real situation in the site/ field, with the approval of the
Construction MAnagement
3) The Contractor shall consult with the other contractors, so that the installation and
equipment can be carried out without collision
4) All materials and equipment installation before purchase, booked, entering the site or
to be installed must be approved by the Construction Management.
b. Installation and Equipment Installment

1) In the area of the ceiling which is without the ceiling (cover) the installation mounted
in the concrete slab complete with the pipe protective-fitting
2) In the area of the ceiling with a ceiling the installation mounted as follows :
a) For 1 and 2-wire line only, the installation is clamped to the concrete slab or
clamp onto an iron hanger plate
b) For more than two cable-lines installation should pass over the cable tray
c) To set of Cable trap should prepare a Cable Ladder.
3) All feeder installation in the buildings not using protective pipe
4) Under the ceiling or ceiling installation mounted as follows :
a) The switches and power outlet sockets installation mounted and attached
recessed to a column or wall. The switch mounted 150 cm above the floor
except for certain equipment
b) The power outlet socket 30 cm above the floor, while the power outlet in the
partition away from the wall using the under the floor duct or conduit.
5) In the installation of the riser shaft feeder mounted and clamped to the cable riser
shaft rack at each distance of 150 cm
6) Each cable tray/ cable ladder connection include BCC cable with diameter of 35 mm
7) On the installation area is attached as follows :
a) Feeder and installation of the outdoor lightings installed at least 60 cm below
the soil surface with a galvanized pipe protector
b) As for the road crossing feeder installed 80 cm below the ground surface using
galvanized pipe protector.
8) Splicing in branching join box using 3 M protective then the join box terminal is
closed
9) End of installation exhaust fan form of receptacle 1-phase or 3-phases
10) All the plumbing installation in the ceiling, on the ceiling and on the shaft should be
given a marker every distance of 10 m with a color that will be determined later
11) Ramset or fischerplug be attached to a solid concrete slab
12) Camphor wood spools must be installed sturdy and flat/ neatly into concrete slab
13) Installation of anchors must be done prior to casting and fastened to the rebar. Can
also be done with a Ramset shot or fischerplug
14) Riser rack or cable tray mounted along with the hanger to the anchor by bolt nuts
15) Every bended cables especially a big feeder cable should be aware and attention
of the radius, a minimum of R = 30 D, D is cable diameter
16) Not allowed to conduct wiretaps or connecting in the middle of the cable except at
the connection point
17) Cable Terminal should be obtaining using a cable shoe
18) Armature lights
a) Balk Lamp T5 Tube 14 watt installed with the mounting on the 2 spot on the
concrete slab/ ceiling
b) Barret Lamp, Bracket Lamp, surface mounted installed to a concrete slab in the
ceiling with screws or bolts nuts in 2 places
c) Down light mounted on the ceiling with screws or bolts nuts in the 2 places
d) Obstruction Lamp installed at a height of 45 m, on the corner of the tallest
building.
19) Electrical Panel
a) Main Panel LVMDP, MDP installed free standing on the floor
b) Lighting Panel, Air Condition Panel and Communication Panel equipment, wall
mounted installed flat against the wall.
20) Installation of Lightning Arrester
a) Provide and install terminal Electrostatic arester to a minimum radius of 50
meters with a height of 3 meters pole or corresponding to clamps and shop
drawing
2
b) Using 70 mm Coaxial Conductor Cabel down through the Electrical shaft
directly into the tub and electrodes control
c) Lightning Protection System comes with Counter Strike placed in electrode
control tub
d) Electrode Control (grounding/ earthing) tub in the form of copper bars
strenghten minimum depth of 6 m and with land resistivity smaller than 2 Ohm
e) The connection between the conductor and the grounding executed in control
tub using copper terminals
f) All of the connection should be metal (clamped or lead pewter) with Cadweld
system
g) All lightning rod arrester connected (ring) with outdoor grouding system that
embedded at least 1 meter in the ground.
c. Cut and Fill

1) The electrical contractor must excavate with a depth and enough area corresponding
to the specifications requested
2) When there is a collision with a pipe, sewer line or other, should be made the detail
drawings and the way of good settlement for all parties with the approval of the
Planning Consultants from the Construction Management
3) Errors arising from negligence of electrical contractor is their responsible
4) After completion of wiring, excavation should be covering, landfill it with gravel until
it solid
5) Delay in the excavation thereby undermining the work of others must be repaired by
an electrical contractor with dependents own expense.
d. Grounding
All the installations, equipment and electrical panels must be grounded.
The grounding system of electronic equipment and electrical panels and so on, each
should have an electrode control tub (gounding). Then connected each other, so it
forming a ring system.
4. Testing
a. All execution installations and equipment must be tested in order to obtain a good and
perfectly proper works matches the PLN, factory and specifications requirements. If
necessary, the installation of materials and equipment can be requested by the
Construction Management to be tested to the Laboratory at the expense of the
Contractor
b. Testing stages are as follows :
1) Every part of the installation to be covered must be tested before and after the
section is closed in order to obtain the good results corresponding to PLN,
specifications and factory
2) All the electrical panel before and after it is installed should be tested the voltage and
insulation resistance to make sure in good condition. Its systems must also be tested
to the specifications required
3) All the lamp armature must be tested in a state of perfect light up
4) All of the connection must be checked to connect with a steady and prevent
disconnection or polarity
5) Soil electric current detainees must be tested to meet the requirements specified
6) Tests should be made together with the Board of Directors and written reports
should be made.
5. Handover, Maintenance and Warranty
a. Handover made to the Minutes of Meeting of the Project with appendices as follows :
1) Submit a revised shop drawing/ image of electrical installations and lightning
arrestors as much as 4 sets
2) Submission of the electrical installation guarantee statement
3) Submit of brochure, operation and maintenance manuals in Bahasa/ Indonesian
4) Submit of a letter of guarantee/ warranty to the owner of the building
5) Submit the testing results.
b. After the First Handover (Phase I), the Contractor shall carry out the maintenance period
free of charge during the time period is determined according to the general
requirements that all installations and equipment remain in good condition and works
perfectly proper. Any damage due to faulty installation or equipment must be fix, and if
necessary replaced with the new one
c. After the First Handover (Phase I), the Contractor shall conduct a 12-month warranty on
all equipment installation that still worked perfectly proper
d. After the First Handover (Phase I), the Contractor shall train and help operate the
installation attached, so that carriers and building owners know well in his duties.
Contractor personnel in the project site works for duration of 30 calendar days during
working hours.
6. Materials and Equipment Product
Materials and equipment must meet the specifications. Contractors possible to propose other
alternatives which equivalent to those the owner/ Board of Directors/ Construction
Management as the task giver specified or if the materials and equipment are not available in
the market or is no longer manufactured. New contractor can change it if there is an official
and written consent of the task giver/ Board of Directors/ Construction Management/
Planner.
The products of materials and equipment is basically in accordance with the materials
appendix lists.
Article 3 Transformator Installation Works
1. Description of General Regulatory Requirements
a. Description of these terms describes the detailed specifications of the material and how
to install the transformator power, equipment transformator and wiring medium
voltage along with tools so it can work perfectly as a generator, ranging from the supply
of material to the site of wages installation, storage, transportation, testing supervision,
maintenance and guarantee
b. In carrying out this installation, the contractor must follow all terms and conditions
such as :
1) The general requirements of the electrical installations 2011 (PUIL 2011)
2) JIS, VDE, ISO, BS, CML, and other other rules.
c. Contractors should follow and adhere to all the requirements listed in :

1) General requirements
2) Technical Specifications
3) Shop Drawing of thr plans
4) Minutes of Aanwijzing.
d. Contractor Requirements :
1) It must be recognized by the Employer Task/ Board of Director/ Construction
Management
2) There should be Associate Level Experts with valid certified (Surat Keterangan Ahli)
3) It must be approved by the Employer Task/ Board of Director/ Construction

Management
4) Must have an agency in Indonesia with a letter of appointment from the factory
5) It must be approved by the Construction Management or PLN
6) The metal door of the power transformator and medium voltage cubicles and
transformator room should be given grounding to soil electrical current detainees
must not bigger than 0.2 Ohm
7) All power transformator materials and equipment before purchase, booking,
entrering the site or to be installed must obtain the prior approval of the
Construction Management.
2. Scope of Works
a. Works duties and responsibilities of the Contractor is supplying and installing the
complete power transformator equipment tools, medium voltage panels and medium
voltage wiring installation from the TM cubicle to the primary side of the power
transformator
b. Providing and installing medium voltage for incoming and outgoing cubicle
c. Carrying out the grounding system of the power transformator, medium voltage
cubicles, cable tray, doors and iron jalousie
d. Provide and install a complete power transformator base plate and supporting tools
e. Provide and install a complete cable tray or cable ladder
f. Do the LMK or PLN testing
g. Make and creates the shop drawings and submit the revised drawings
h. Submit a certificate of LMK or PLN
i. Submit operation and maintenance book manuals in Bahasa/ Indonesian
j. Carry out maintenance and guarantees.
3. General Requirements for Materials and Equipment
a. The terms of the Basic

1) All materials and equipment must be new in the sense of not used or refurbished
goods
2) The materials shall have sufficient capacity or rating and the election must be
efficient/ economical and not excessive
3) Must comply with the requirements of The Tehnical Terms of Electrical Works (RKS)
or the shop drawings/ as built drawings/ images
4) In case the physical size must be sufficient and do not ask for the larger space than
the space provided. Sufficiency in a sense has included all the necessary equipment
for the operation runs perfectly
5) Capacity enshrined both in the drawing or specifications is a minimum capacity.

Adjustments in the selection of the contractor may be performed with the following
requirements :
a) Does not cause increase of equipment
b) The system does not become more difficult
c) Do not ask for added space
d) Does not cause the increase of cost of the operation and maintenance
e) Do not reduce the quality.
b. The terms of physical

1) Material or equipment of the same classification or type, the requested brand or
are made by the same factory
2) If a piece of equipment consists of the component parts, all parts should be of the
same brand to avoid trouble and maintain the quality maintenance characteristics.
4. Materials and Equipment Technical Specifications
The type and quality of materials and tools that will be used are as follows :
a. Medium Voltage Cable

1) Multicore or single core Copper
2) The Indonesia Local products which has LMK/ SII certificate
2 2
3) Cable XLPE 20 kV type N2XSEBY and for the size of 1 x 50 mm and 3 x 95 mm
type N2XSY.
b. Sealing end according to the type and the cable voltage class
c. Medium Voltage Switchgear. Medium Voltage Switchgear consists of house/ panel,
high-voltage busbar, load break switch, earthing switch, etc., must meet the following
specifications :
1) Switchgear Characteristics :
 Type : Indoor
 Nominal Voltage : 24 kV
 Running Voltage : 20 kV
 Number of Phases : 3
 Nominal Frequency : 50 Hz.
 Insulation Voltage Test : 50 kV / min.
 Impulse Voltage (BIL) : 125 kV.
 Busbar Nominal Current : 630 A / 400 A
 Busbar Short Circuit Capacity : 16 kA / sec
 Voltage Control : 24 deg C
 Maximum Relative Humidity : 90%.
2) Complete Panel House

a) Local product with a standard size that meets the requirements of VDE, ISO,
IEC and others
b) Metal-enclosed type with a minimum thickness of 2.4 mm
c) Open and closing the door using the interlock key which is connected to the
Circuit Breaker
d) Fixed switchgear with a single busbar mounting type
e) Peak withstand current 36 kA / 20 kV.
For these types of cubicles that selected have to be included the shop drawings.
3) Load Break Switch

Common specifications are as follows :
a) In and out movement of the blade must be quick and do not depend on the
velocity of the operator and can trip the fuse-link
b) 20,000 volts of Class voltage
c) VDE insulation rating 20 N
d) Rated power : - lower : 20 kV
- high : 24 kV
e) The nominal current : 630 A

f) Rated impulse withstand voltage
g) To earthed parts across the phases : 125 kV
h) Across isolating distances : 145 kV
i) Rated power frequency withstand voltage
 To earthed parts across the phases : 50 kV
 Across isolating distances : 75 kV
j) Making current : 36.5 kV

k) Peak short circuit current : 36 kA
l) Short time current : 16 kA
4) Earthing Switch
a) Rated voltage : - lower : 20 kV
- high : 24 kV
b) Short-time current : 20 kA
c) Rated surge current : 50 kV
5) Incoming Cubicle
Medium Voltage Panel Incoming Cubicle equipped with the following devices :
a) 630 Ampere Busbar Chamber
b) Busbar should be painted according to the color code in PUIL 2011
 Phase : red, yellow, black

 Ground : green, yellow.
c) A 630 LBS include SF6

d) 3 (three) Busbar 630 A
e) 3 (three) Phase Lightning Arrester Protection (LA)
f) 3 (three) CT Ring
g) 1 (one) Heater 50 Watt (220VAC)
h) 1 (one) LV Box.
6) Outgoing Cubicle
Medium Voltage Panel Outcoming Cubicle is equipped with the following devices :
a) 630 Ampere Busbar Chamber
 Busbar must be painted according to the appropriate color code in PUIL
 Phase : red, yellow, black
 Ground : green, yellow.
b) LBS 630 A equipped with SF6

c) The panel is equipped with a tripping coil and mechanical position indicator, in
the position ON-OFF or tripped
d) Breaker (Safety) using HVRC Fuse 45 A, 16 kA complete with motorized and
manual operators
e) 3 (three) neon indicator
f) 3 (three) PT
g) 3 (three) CT
h) Heater 50 Watt (220VAC).
7) Busbar
a) Single bar type
b) Rated capacity (see shop drawing)
c) Rectangle shape
d) Copper Material.
d. Power Transformator
Technical data are sebgai follows:
1) Total : 1 (one) unit
2) Transformator type : Oil Immersed Transformator
3) Power Rating : 400 KVA
4) Side Primary Voltage : 20 KV
5) Secondary Side : 400 Volt - 3 Phase
6) Medium Voltage Tapping Side : 2 x 2/2% Medium
7) Group Vectors : Dyn 5, Impedance 4%
8) Frequency : 50 Hz
9) Design : As per VDE
10) Roving Temperature : 40 degrees C
11) Degree of Protection : IP - 10
12) TM terminal that can be revoked : Yes.
e. Other Works
1) Cable Ladder Frame use 60/60 x 10 mm elbow bracket complete with a hanger
beam or reinforced concrete hanger
2) Metal plate as a binder
3) Anchor
4) Base plate for transformator profile I leverage pole.
f. Grounding
2
1) Conductor wire used BC 70 mm for grounding the equipment (body)
2) Equipment need grounding are the power transformator, TM cubicle, base plate,
metal doors, cable tray and metal jalousie
2
3) for neutral grounding on the secondary side of the
transformator (star connector)
4) Cable Tray Frame use 50/50 x 5 mm elbow bracket complete with a hanger beam or
reinforced concrete hanger.
5. Installation Requirements

1) The Contractor shall examine all dimensions as soon as possible after receiving the
Work Order document (SPK)
2) Submit proposals to the Construction Management, what needs to be changed or
rearranged so that all plants and equipment in the system can be placed and work
well and proper
3) So the Contractor must do and put a mark on the places that will be installed in
accordance with the actual size of the approval of the Construction Management
4) The Contractor shall consult with other Contractors and the Construction
Management before starting the cabling/ conduit, equipment hanger and so on :
a) Set up such that electrical cables and equipment so will not collide with other
installations
b) If there is any disagreement between the contractor, then the final decision is
on the Construction Management.
5) All installation materials and equipment before its ordered, purchased, send to the
site or installed must obtain the prior approval of the Construction Management
6) If necessary, the material can be requested to be tested to the Laboratory and for
the costs borne by the Contractor.
b. Installation and Equipment Installing

1) All medium voltage feeder mounted in a cable tray and clamped to each distance of
100 cm
2) Every turn of the bending cables should be noted that the minimum radius R = 40 D,
D is cable diameter
3) The tip of the cables connector to the primary transformator or secondary voltage
cubicles covered with sealing end, to the secondary transformator terminal using
cable
4) Medium Voltage Cubicles, free-standing installed on the lane concrete
5) Power transformator mounted on the I base plate thightened to the anchor onto
the concrete slab so it will not move.
c. Grounding
1) Power Transformator
2) All Medium Voltage Cubicles
3) Base plate / the Power Transformator anchor
4) Metal Door
5) Metal Louvre
6) Cable Tray.
6. Testing
1. General
All wiring / cabling and transformator equipment and cubicle implementation must be
tested to meet the PLN / LMK and Technical Terms of Electrical Works (RKS) and runs
perfectly proper. If necessary all installation materials or equipment can be requested
by the Construction Management to be tested to the Laboratory at the expense of the
Contractor.
2. Testing Stages
a. Testing the Power Transformator is before it being given the electrical power
1) In the case of the transformator stored long enough should be tested the
voltage value and its insulation whether they meet the requirements
2) Check the transformator earthing, installed properly and measure the soil
electric current detainees
3) Check the safety of the HV in the correct calibration
4) Check the connections in the correct state and firmly attached
5) Prior to the secondary side is connected check the secondary no-load voltage
6) Check the state of the transformator oil.
b. Energizing Test
1) Energizing tests carried out on the safety by calibrating according to the
factory standard
2) During the energizing test all the connections on the secondary side must be
open.
c. Medium Voltage Cubicles Panel Testing
1) Prior to given an electrical power check all panel equipment completely and all
the connections are firmly on a steady basis
2) Clean the inside panel and check that the products are not required to be
removed
3) Inspect and test all the insulation.
d. Feeder Cable testing. All the feeder cable must be voltage and insulation resistance
tested that meets the PLN/ LMK requirements
e. Soil electric current detainees system should be tested, so the detainees less than
1 ohm measured in dry soil
f. All tests must be witnessed by the Construction Management and made a written
report on it.

a. Handover made along with the Minutes of Meeting of the Project with appendices as
follows :
1) Drawings revision as many as four sets
2) The LMK or PLN examiner document
3) The Measurement Results report
4) Secure and Warranty document
5) Brochures, operation and maintenance manual.
b. After the First Handover, the Contractor is obliged to do the free of charge maintenance
period following the terms that specified in the general terms to the results of their
work remains in perfect proper condition
c. After the First Handover, the Contractor shall provide a warranty period of the
transformator, TM panel and TM installation all remain well over 360 calendar days (12
months).
8. Materials and Equipment Products
Materials and equipment must meet the specifications. Contractors possible to propose
other alternatives are equivalent to those specified from the owner/ Board of Director as the
client, if the product of the specified materials and equipment are not available in the market
or is no longer manufactured. New contractor can change it if there is an official and written
consent of the owner/ Board of Director/ Planner/ Construction Management. As for the
material products of the equipment used is basically the corresponding material regarding to
the attachment list.
Article 4 Generator Set
1. Scope of Works
a) General
The contractor must offer the entire scope of works described well in this specifications
or shown in the drawings, where the materials and equipment used in accordance with
the provisions of this specifications. If it turns out there is a difference between the
specifications of materials and or equipment installed to the specifications required by
this Article, the Contractor is obliged to replace the material or equipment so that in
accordance with the provisions of this article without the additional provision expense.
b) Scope of Works of The Generator Set
As shown in the shop drawings, the Contractor must perform Generator Set
procurement and installation as well as handing in good condition and ready to be
use. An outline of the scope of the work in question is as follows :
1) Wiring
a) From Diesel Generator Set Generator Set Panel used NYY cable
b) From the Control Panel Generator Set to Generator Set and from the Control
Panel Generator Set to LVMDP with NYYHY control cable
c) From Diesel Generator Set to copper battery and from copper battery to
Automatic Charger with NYY cable.
2) Grounding
2
a) for grounding the equipment (body), the other
equipment need to be grounding is Diesel Generator Set, iron doors etc.
2
b) Conductor NYY 1 x 35 mm for neutral grounding of Diesel Generator Set star
connection system
c) All grounding should be separated from other grounding.
3) Piping
a) From the Ground Fuel Tank to the electric pump
b) From the electric fuel pump to the Daily Tank
c) From the daily diesel tank to Generatorset and forth to the Daily Tank
d) From diesel Generatorset to Silincer and from Silincer out
e) From the Ground Fuel Tank to the electric pump.
4) Other Equipment
a) Silencer Hanging Frame with dampening vibration is given and Silincer pipe
insulation
b) Tarpaulins for radiators

c) Radiator standard framework
d) The foundation/ Daily Tank stanchion
e) Diesel Generator Set concrete foundation (Scope civil works)
f) Vibrator steel spring isolator including base plate and frame or can be used
other tool
g) Metal clamps for radiator pipe
h) Complete storage tank
i) Attenuator for radiator and exhaust fan.
a. Diesel Generator Set (Silent Type)

1) Diesel Engine
 Capacity : 250 KVA (Silent type)
 Amount : 1 unit every building
 Rotation : 1500 rpm
 Cooling : radiator
 Starting : battery / electrically 120 AH
 Voltage : 24 V maximum type or other kind similar
 Governor : electronic type.
 Measuring device :
o Oil Pressure gauge
o Water Temperature gauge
o Oil Temperature gauge
o Charging Ammeter
o Tachometer.
 Safety device :
o Low Oil Pressure
o High Water Temperature
o Over Speed
o Indicator Lamp and horn on Generator panel.
 Equipment :
o Exhaust muffler residential type with counter flange
o Battery and charger
o Automatic Change Over Switch (ACOS/ AMF).
2) Alternator
 Output Continuous : 250 KVA
 Voltage : 380 Volt
 Frequency : 50 Hz
 Power factor : 0.8
 Connection : start with netral (4 wire)
 Protection : IP 23
 Insulation : class H
 Overload capacity : 10 % selama 1 jam dalam setiap 12 jam kerja.
 Voltage regulation : automatic solid atate type with rotating silicon
controlled rectifier (brushless).
b. Panel Genset
1) Type : Free Standing
2) Protection device : Circuit breaker 42 KA with over current, short circuit,
under voltage and earth fault relay and shunt trip
3) Measuring device : - 3 Ammeter c/w current tranformator
- 1 Volt meter c/w 7 step selector switch
- 1 Frequency meter
- 1 Power factor meter
- 1 kW meter.
Standard or customized by the Generator Set manufacturer. The size, color and
type of the panels adapted to other electric panel.
4) Signal lamps : - start

- start failure
- engine running
- supervision ”ON”
- automatic blocked
- mains ”ON”
- generator ”ON”
- low oil pressure
- high temperature
- generator overload.
5) Push Button : - Off

- automatic service
- trial service
- manual service
- manual start
- manual stop
- mains circuit breaker
- generator circuit breaker
- horn off
- reset
- signal test.
6) Additional equipment manufacture standard :

- Flexible pipe
- Silencer
- Machine mounted.
c. Low Voltage Cables and Tools

1) This cable works on a system voltage of 380 Volt, 3 fase 50 Hz
2) Cable type : - NYY for power cable and control cable using NYYHY
- Special Cable multinucleated for batteries
- BC for grounding equipment (body)
- NYY single core for the neutral grounding (neutral point star
connection).
3) Copper cable core

4) The voltage Class 600/1000 volts
5) Isolation appropriate to the type of the cable
6) Rating and size according to the need or according to the shop drawing
7) Local Product with PLN / LMK and SII certification.
d. Cable Shoe
1) For cable termination on busbar, circuit breaker or other equipment using a cable
shoe
2) Copper material.
e. Piping
1) For the fuel used black steel pipe complete with the fitting and the gate valve
2) For the silencer used black pipes wrapped with asbestos and minimum size of 10"
or according to the need in proper.
f. Other equipment
1) Hanger frame for silencer consists of Ramset or ficherflug, elbow bracket, vibration
isolator bolts, etc., then paint it with primary and painted it
o
2) Tarpaulins for radiator must withstand a temperature of 100 C, include the frame
work and bolt nuts. Radiator reinforcement frame made of elbow bracket material
attached to the radiato
3) Daily Tank Frame of steel plate and brackets complete with bolts, then paint it with
primary and painted it
4) Diesel Generator Set Concrete Foundations (Civil Work Scopes)
 The seat holder for Diesel Generator Set

 Reinforced concrete foundation
 Diesel Generator Set foundation weight minimum of 1.7 times of the weight of
the Generator Set
 The size of the foundation should be in accordance with the Diesel Generator
Set that will be installed. So the contractor make the shop drawing
 The foundation under the Diesel Generator Set mounted sand and fibers with
thickness of 20 cm each layer and as dampening vibration on the sidewalls use
fibers.
5) Vibration Isolator
 Steel spring or rubber pads
 The Power appropriate to the heavy and strong the Diesel Generator Set
vibrations
 Installed on the concrete foundations and under the base plate or used
appropriate anchor installation system suggested by the manufacturer
 Base plate of steel H type or according to factory standard.
g. Daily Tank
1) Volume of 1500 liters
2) 8 mm metal plate tank
3) Standard forms
4) Equipment :
 Air vent valve
 Fuel estimator glass
 Floater
 etc.
h. Ground StorageTank
1) The volume of 6,000 liters
2) 8 mm metal plate tank
3) Standard forms
4) Equipment :
 Air vent valve
 Fuel estimator glass
 Floater
 etc.
i. Copper Battery and Automatic Battery Charger
1) Copper Battery 48 VDC - 120 AH or according to the factory standard
2) Automatic 5A-24 Volt battery charge
3) Overcurrent charge equipment.
j. Silencer installed is residential type
k. Radiator with Air Cooled Engine mounted type
l. Sound Attenuator of acoustic materials installed in the generator house, so the noise
coming out of the generator maximum of 65 dB at a distance of 3 meters
m. Generator Set Control Panel (PKG). Also to control the Generator Set power and
distribute to LVMDP or Main Panel Low Voltage (PUTR), adjust the engine start-stop
automaticly and manualy. This control executed upon of the data receipt from PLN
when it was down and can adjusted the power. The equipment has the following
specifications :
1) Capacity breaker (see the shop drawing)
2) Framework and the Generator Set House made of metal plates wth the minimum
thickness of 2.4 mm
3) Having control tools and measures, such as :
 Battery charger
 Ampere meter, Volt meter, Frequency meter, Power Factor, Digital System
 Instrument current transformator according to the needs
 Speed adjusting device
 Voltmeter Battery
 Current Transformator
 Alarm
 KWH meter 3 phase single tariff.
4) Signal
 Mains on
 Alternator on
 Starting failure
 Alternator overload
 High temperature Engine
 Low oil pressure
 Automatic system blocked
 Starting control and possibly glow plug control
 Over speed.
5) Have switch with 3 positions as follows :
 Auto-machine runs automatically
 Manual-start / stop when desired
 Off-not running.
6) If there are errors below the engine should die plus the equipment designation are :
 Low lubricant pressure
 Exceeded the speed limit
 Starting Failure
 Fuel lacking.
Must be accompanied ways to reset when an error has been corrected.
7) Starting the engine has a time delay which can be set between 6-15 seconds
 Return to the normal source has a time delay which can be set approximately
in 10 seconds to 30 seconds
 There must be a time delay for cooling the engine approximately 5 minutes
 Equipped with under-frequency sensor, if the the normal source frequency is
dropped to 90% or can be adjusted, the source switched automatically turn to
the Diesel Generator Set
 Equipped with Time delay by-pass to shorten the time of testing in the return
to the normal power source from the Generator Set.
8) Equipped with simulated testing without removing the CB normal source, COS
testing can be done as if the source was interupted.
9) Equipped with a below pilot light :
 The load is connected to the normal source
 The load is connected to the Generator Set source
 All Signals work as requested.
10) Panel House and Busbar :

 The size of the Panel House should be able to covered all equipment with
sufficient electrically and physical placement
 Instrument, Switches, and any equipment should be installed in from the front
through opening that available on the panel house
 Panel House made of metal plate with the thickness not less than 2.0 mm
 All metal plate surface before painting should receive cleansing treatment such
as "phosphatizing treatment" or similar. The inside and outside should get at
least one layer of retaining paint rust. For the final layer of the outer part,
finished with essentially gray
 The room must be sufficient to facilitate the achievement of the work
 Doors should be with hidden hinges and interlock with the breaker for safety
 The labels are made from "Trafilite" composed plated in neatly arrange white-
black-white and engraved according to the needs in Bahasa/ Indonesian
 Ventilation openings on both sides of the panel
 All wiring must be in neat consist of colors cables, terminal mounted, easy to
trace, and easy maintenance
 Busbar and grafting techniques should be according to the rules. Materials
made of high conductivity copper power, rectangular shape is mounted on the
isolator poles and the distance calculated to the electrical and mechanical
withstand at the level of short circuit at that point (PUIL 2011)
 Busbar in a panel to be prepared as well as possible until all cable termination
or other bar does not cause any disruption
 Indentations unnatural. Busbars must be standard painted to distinguish the

phases
 Drilling on the busbar is not allowed
 Connecting rods between busbars with the breaker must having sufficient
cross-section with a current rating of not less than 125% of the breaker rating
 At the busbar connections to be given a protective material (tined).
n. Anchor
1) Materials such as reinforced concrete, elbow bracket or with sufficient force of the
ramset shot
2) It must be done along together with Civil Contractors.
o. Grounding Materials
Grounding to all electrical systems according to what is specified in the PUIL 2011.
3. Installation Specifications

1) The Contractor shall examine all dimensions immediately after receiving the Work
Order document (SPK). The Contractor shall submit to the Construction
Management, what needs to be changed or rearranged so that all plants and
equipment in the system can be placed and work well
2) The Contractor is required to creates the shop drawings containing the floor plan,
section and detail as well as the size of the clear and must obtain prior approval
from the Construction Management
3) Then, the Contractor shall perform measurements and mark the places that will be
installed in accordance with the actual size of the prior approval of the Construction
Management
4) The Contractor shall consult with other Contractror and Construction Management
before starting the cabling/ wiring, pipes, cables rack, equipment works and so on
 Installation such that the wiring, plumbing and installation of the equipment
does not collide with other work
 If there is disagreement between the Contractor and the final decision is on
the Construction Management.
5) All materials and equipment installation before purchasing, booked, project site
entering or to be installed must be prior approved from the Construction
Management. If necessary by giving examples.
b. Installation and Equipment

1) The battery cables, battery charger and the power outlet socket networking
connection set-up in neat and compact on the wall with protected PVC pipes
2) The feeder cable in the cable trench does not need to be protected with a pipe.
3) Every bended cables should be noted that the minimum radius R = 30 D, D is the
diameter of the TR cable
4) The cables installed in the ground mounted in the pipeline
5) Grounding installed surface mounted in the generator house penetrate the sloof
underneath the ground into the manholes. Embedded at least 60 cm below the
surface and protected by PVC pipes. Soil electric current detainees should be less
than 1 ohm
6) Fuel Piping
 Pipe daily erect tank clamped to the frame or wall tank daily
 Pipe clamped horizontally in the building and it built in the oil pipeline trench
 Outside the building is embedded as deep as 60 cm below the soil surface.
7) Piping Silincer
 The connection between Diesel Generator Set to the silincer used flexible pipe
 Silencer Pipe seated on top of the Generator House equipped with dampening
insulator vibration as well as through a wall using protective rubber vibration
 All silencer pipes should be wrapped asbestos
 Sheeting between the engine to the radiator to be installed neatly and with no
leaking.
8) Radiator Engine Mounted installed. The size and placement of appropriate to the
shop drawing then screwed the tarpaulin to the radiator frame and the Diesel
Generator Set frame
9) The electric diesel fuel pump is clamped to the floor with anchors and bolt
10) Daily Tank separately with the generator unit, attached to a sturdy metal frame
basis at a height of approximately 2 m above the floor
11) Storage Tank embedded in the ground and tied to a concrete framework in
accordance with the drawings
12) Genset Base and Base Plate. (The scope of the civil works) :
 After the excavated soil compaction held, then made stucco werkvloer of 5
cm thickness
 On top of the sand is made of reinforced concrete blocks with appropriate size
to the shop drawing with a minimum weight of 1.7 times to the weight of
Diesel Generator Set
 Base plate screwed to the anchors into concrete block is equipped with
vibration damper isolators.
13) Battery and automatic battery charger is set free on the floor.
c. Cut and Fill

1) The depth and the excavation area must be in accordance with the appropriate
requirements of the Technical Terms of Electrical Works/ RKS
2) When there is a collision with a pipe, sewer line cord and others should be created
the as built drawing and a good settlement for all parties with the approval of the
3) After completion of trenching and cabling, landfill it back with gravel until it solid
4) Delay in the excavation thereby undermining the work of others must be repaired
by the Generator Set Contractor with dependents own expense.
d. Grounding
1) The soil detainee amount should be less than 1 ohm
2) Grounding by copper masive bars by peg planting
3) Copper wire of the grounding network connected to the copper bars and welded or
cast it with lead
4) The place of the connection between the earthing wire with planting peg is in the
reinforced concrete manholes are given a cover cap.
4. Testing
a. All execution installations and equipment should be tested, so as to achieve a good

result and work perfectly matches to the PLN requirements or factory. When required,
materials or equipment installations can be requested by the Construction Management
to be tested to the Laboratory at the expense of the Contractor.
b. The stages of testing is as follows :

1) Every part of the piping installation must be tested so as to achieve good results
according to the PLN requirements. For the parts that will be covered in the
installation must be tested before and after the section is closed
2) Every piping installation part to be tested so that nothing leaked by a pressure
testing of 6 atm for 2 hours
3) The electrical panel must be tested in good condition with voltage and insulation
resistance testing and operation of the system in accordance with the provisions
4) Daily Tank Storage tanks must be checked and do not leak. The buoy glasses of
water release valve probe should work with either specific to meter fuel storage
tank must be working properly and when has reached the minimum volume will be
raised alarm
5) The fuel pump must be tested to work well
6) Battery batteries and automatic battery charger should be checked matches the
conditions RKS and brochures as well as working well
7) The polarity of the cable connector must be properly and securely attached
8) The soil electric current detainee should match to the requested in RKS (Technical
Terms of Electrical Works)
9) The pressure in the pipe Silincer suitable provisions should be set so that the
factory and can generate electric power according to the capacity of Diesel
Generator set
10) In testing Diesel Generatorset should note the following :
 Frequency should be 50 Hz
 380 volts of voltage phases, 220 volts neutral- phase
 Power factor = 0.8.
11) The test is done as follows :

 Testing with a load of 400 A wear Dompler or other means without the load of
the building.
 The test load of 25%, 50%, 100% and 110% of the net output demanded.
 Overall testing for 10 hours.
 In addition to the burden that must be investigated is the temperature, oil
pressure and others as standard factory.
a. Handover made to the Minutes of Meeting of the Project site with appendices as
follows :
1) Figure revision as many as four sets.
2) report the results of testing.
3) Brochures, operation and maintenance manuals in Indonesian.
4) Letter of guarantee from the factory dutujukan to the building owner.
b. After the First Handover, the Contractor shall perform the maintenance period free of
charge during the corresponding time period specified in the general requirements and
equipment installation remains in perfect working condition.
c. After the First Handover, the Contractor shall provide a guarantee Diesel Generatorset
remains good for twelve (12) months.
d. After submitting the First, the Contractor shall train operators building owners for 14
(fourteen) calendar days at the office working hours.
6. Supervision
Genset contractor must provide supervision to contractors installer (Installation Genset) and
shall provide a minimum of one person who is always on the field during the installation. The
Contractor shall provide weekly reports to Pemeberi task. In the event of a technical fault in
the installation entirely the responsibility of the Contractor Genset. The so-called old
installation is up to the generator set can operate properly and proved with the handover
documents.
7. Training
The Contractor shall provide training to the technicians minimum 2 weeks or until the
operator can be said to be ready to operate the generator. Training includes theory, practice,
trable shooting and grant certificates to trainees.
Materials and equipment must meet the specifications. The contractor may be able to
propose alternatives commensurate with those specified to the Employer Task/ Board of
Directors/ Construction Management/ planner. The new Contractor may replace new
equipment or products, if there is official and written approval from the Employer Task/
Board of Directors/ Construction Management / planner.
The products of the materials and equipment is basically in accordance with the materials
appendix lists.
Article 5 Telephone and Data Installation System
1. Scope of Works
a. Description of Terms and General Regulations

1) A description of the detailed requirements specifications describes the materials
and how to install Installation Telephone and Data and Central PABX, covering the
complete and perfect work, ranging from the provision of materials to disite, wage
fixing, storage, transportation, testing, maintenance and warranty.
2) In implementing this installation contractor must follow all terms and conditions
such as:
a) Regulation No. PERUMTEL 5 in 1977 and no. 1 1979, regarding the procedure
of Planning, Installation, Testing Installation Central Telephone and Key
Telephone.
b) General Requirements for Electrical Installations (PUIL) in 2011.
c) the Indonesian National Standard (SNI) 03-3985-2000, on Procedures for
Planning, Installation, Testing Detection and Fire Alarm Systems for the
Prevention of Fire in Buildings.
d) Law No.36 / 1999 on Telecommunications.
e) of Government Regulation No.52 / 2000 on Telecommunications Operator.
f) of the Act No.20 / 2003 on Building; Building Law & Government Regulation
No.38 / 2005Government Regulations Related to Law No. 20/2003.
g) Law Building No. 28, 2002.
h) Regulation of the Minister of Public Works No. 26 / PRT / M / 2008, December

30, 2008, on Technical Requirements for Fire Protection System in Buildings
and Environment.
i) Decree of Directorate General of Post & Tel No. 004/1999 Determination of
the Director General of Technical Requirements for Equipment /
Telecommunication Device for Buildings.
j) Technical data of the product in the field of equipment Telephone & Data
system created by the factories of various countries and has ISO-9001.
3) The Contractor shall follow and adhere to all the requirements specified in:
a) General Requirements
b) Technical Specifications
c) Figure Plan
d) Minutes Aanwijzing
e) Minutes of Clarification.
4) Power supply is sourced from the Electric Company (PLN), Diesel Generator Set
(Genset) and UPS, when the power of the PLN and the Generator impaired.
5) All panels telephone and data must be grounded with HIS 4 mm wire and wire HIS
MDF with 35 mm.
b. Scope of Integration System

Broadly speaking, the scope of this work is as shown specified, with the following
details:
1) Implement the procurement and installation of:
a) The entire cables installation in building
b) All equipment installations integration system
 Core Switch
 Passive Splitter
 Optical Network Unit (ONU).
c) The entire of grounding installation
d) Installation All work :
(1) Server
- PABX / IPBX
- Wifi Controller.
(2) Floor Standing Rack
(3) Main patch panel
(4) Patch panel
(5) Wireless access point
(6) Telephone
(7) Interface with related system.
e) Testing, commissioning (with Fluke DSP 500) and training as well as technical
manuals handed
f) Provide and install all the necessaries withdrawal feeder cable (Vertical),
Horizontal and UTP cable feeder and its supporters.
2) Submit three sets of working drawings (shop drawings) installation of telephone

and data.
3) Submit the documents required in this project include:
a) Description of the system and principle of operation of each system installed
b) The shop drawing of all Installation equipment installed
c) As Built Drawing.
4) Carry out maintenance for 6 (six) months and provide1 (one) year equipment
assurance since the entire system installed and function properly in the building.
2. General Requirements of The Materials and Equipment
a. All material or equipment must be new in the sense of not used or refurbished goods
b. Material or equipment must have clear specifications and sufficient capacity
c. Must comply with the specifications/ requirements
d. Capacity listed in drawings or specifications are minimum. The contractor may choose a
larger capacity than that requested by the condition :
1) It does not cause the system to become more difficult
2) It does not cause the increase of panels and materials
3) Do not ask for added space
4) It does not cause any additional costs
5) Do not reduce quality
6) May not change the system that is standard (re-engineering).
3. Technical Specifications of The Materials and Equipment
a. IP-based Network Infrastructure Systems (DATA)

1) System description
a) The IP-based Network Infrastructure fully redundant System to be installed in
the building. The specified network infrastructure systems must be capable of
supporting the entire Network System other IP-based
b) The IP-based Network Infrastructure System in question should be able to
support the Green Concept, in the sense of using the device with minimal
power consumption
c) IP-based Network System installed using Ethernet technology with a star
topology
d) The Network Zone is divided based on the condition of the building (as built
drawing) and based on :
 Nearby and effective running Route
 The Room Partition
 The number of nodes in each Zone.
e) The number of nodes in each zone covers all the nodes of the entire network
system of the IP-based
f) The data network system using VLAN divided on each equipment.
b. Major equipment
1) Core Switch
Core switch in question has a minimum of the following specifications :
a) 19 "Form Factor
b) Layer 3 application support minimum
c) Chassis-based
d) Redundant Hot Swappable fans and Power Supply to the specifications :
 Max Rating Power AC 750 Watts
 Power Consumption system, Nominal 330 watt and Maximum 400 watt
 The power supply voltage input 100 - 240 VAC ; 50 - 60 Hz
 Total BTU output are 1122 BTU/hour (nominal) and 1365 BTU/hour
(maximum)
 The input current is 6 A at a voltage of 200 VAC
o
 Work running temperature maximum 40 C
 Industry standards are supported at a minimum :
 Ethernet : IEEE 802.3
 10 Gigabit Ethernet : IEEE 802.3ae
 IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol
 IEEE 802.1w Rapid reconfiguration of Spanning Tree
 VLAN IEEE 802.1S Multiple Instances of Spanning Tree
 IEEE 802.3ad LACP
 IEEE 802.1p CoS Prioritization
 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN
 IEEE 802.1X User Authentication
 IEEE 802.1x-Rev
 RMON I and II standards.
e) Equipped with a minimum 4-port 10-Gbps Long Range
f) It has a switching capacity of 1.2 Tbps
g) Has switching throughput of 960 Mpps
h) Having redundant fans and power supplies are hot swappable.
i) Supports Spanning Tree Protocol, Rapid reconfiguration of Spanning Tree,

Multiple Instances of Spanning Tree VLAN, LACP, Prioritization CoS, VLAN, user
authentication, 802.1x-Rev, and RMON I and II standards
j) Minimum system throughput of 800 Gbps
k) Support IPv4 and IPv6
l) A minimum of 250 Mpps packet forwarding (IPv4) and 125 Mpps (IPv6)
m) Minimum supported MAC entries is 55K
n) At least 4,094 VLANs supported
o) Has autoQoS features to simplify the configuration of VoIP QoS
p) It has security features Flow Core 2 Technology
q) Has advanced routing features unicast IP routing protocol
r) It must be managed : Fault, Configuration, Accounting, Performance, and
Security by using the software network management LAN switching system &
Security Manager, and Wireless LAN Controllers and the Wireless Control
System submitted must have the assurance of interoperability features with
devices other network. Connection of Core Switch to each access switch
using a 10 G SFP.
2) Access Switch
Access switch is minimal has the ability to be able distack by using a special port for
both data and resources to form a system resiliency and can be recognized as a
single IP devices. Must be placed in conditions of minimum room temperature of
20 ° C. Access Switch 1 is used to handle endpoint with fiber optic connection and is
able to be an extension to access other switches with minimum specifications as
follows :
a) 19 "Form Factor
b) Minimum application support layer 3
c) Redundant Hot swappable fans and power supply to the specifications:
• Power Supply is able to supply power for a 24-PoE + ports per switch
• Max Power Rating AC 715 Watts
• Power Consumption System, Maximum 435 watts
• The power supply input voltage 115 - 240 VAC ; 50 - 60 Hz
• Total BTU output 2465 BTU/hour (maximum)
• The input current is 10 A at a voltage of 200 VAC
• Minimum number of fan 2 (two) and fan resource not included.
o
d) Work running temperature maximum 40 C
e) Supported Industry Standards minimum :
• RMON I and II standards
• IEEE 802.1S
• IEEE 802.1w
• IEEE 802.1x
• IEEE 802.1x-Rev
• IEEE 802.3ad
• IEEE 802.1ae
• IEEE 802.3af
• IEEE 802.3at
• IEEE 802.3x full-duplex on 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, and
• 1000BASE-T ports
• IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol
• Prioritization IEEE 802.1p CoS
• IEEE 802.1Q VLAN
• IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T specifications
• IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX specifications
• IEEE 802.3ab 1000BASE-T specifications
• IEEE 802.3z 1000BASE-X specifications
f) Have a PoE port 24 GE SFP Module
g) Has 2-based 10 Gigabit uplink port SFP +
h) Represents the Multilayer Switch
i) Using the IP Base operating system that supports OSPF
j) Equipped with 24 ports Multimode Fiber Optic least 1 Gbps short range
k) Stackable for both power and data packet flow, with dedicated stacking ports
and stacking cables
l) Stacking at least 64 Gbps Throughput
m) To support the implementation of the redundant power supply
n) Should dilengekapi with intelligence to provide real-time location detection
stored in the central database
o) Must have a MAC Port Locking (Dynamic and Static)
p) Has an architecture of 160 Gbps switching fabric
q) Has the ability of at least 65.5 Mpps forwarding rate
r) Can accommodate up to 4000 VLAN ID
s) Has a capacity of up to 12,000 MAC addresses for VLAN
t) To handle jumbo frames of 9216 bytes
u) It features 802.1x port-based security
v) Having a guest VLAN feature 802.1x
w) Accommodate TACACS + and RADIUS authentication to facilitate centralized
control and restrict unauthorized user access
x) Having autoQoS features to simplify the configuration of VoIP QoS
y) Facilitating Dynamic Trunking Protocol (DTP) for dynamic trunk configuration
to all switch ports
z) Could support the sFlow
aa) Have the ability to Link Aggregation Channeling Protocol (LACP) for Ethernet
Channeling needs
bb) Has the advanced features of IP routing unicast routing protocol

cc) It must be managed : Fault, Configuration, Accounting, Performance, and
Security using network management software LAN switching system & Security
Manager, and Wireless LAN Controllers and the Wireless Control System in
proposed
dd) Must have a guarantee of interoperability features with other network devices.
3) Unified Threat Management (Reuter, Firewall)

The meaning of Unified Threat Management in this work is a network-enabled
device that functions as an integrated network security appliance includes Intrusion
Prevention Service, Anti-Spam, Web Security, Web Application Firewall, SPX
Encryption.Fungsi main control incoming and outgoing traffic to the server farm by
analyzing data packets and determines whether data packets are allowed to enter
or exit to / from the server by using a set of algorithms that have been determined,
and ensure corporate data is not out of the internal network out.
Unified Threat Management minimum specifications as follows :

a) Is the appliance integrated device between features firewall, Intrusion
Prevention System, Web Filter, Web Application Firewall, Anti-Spam, Deep
Packet Inspection, Wireless Security
b) Firewall throughput up to 60 Gbps
c) IPS throughput up to 16 Gbps
d) Antivirus (proxy) throughput to 5 Gbps
e) Has a maximum of 10 Gbps VPN throughput
f) Supporting the minimum 20,000,000 Concurrent session
g) Ability to operate in two modes, routed and transparent
h) Support a minimum of Static Routing Protocols and OSPF
i) Could manage an integrated web-based in the device
j) Could perform the high availability of active-active or active-standby function
k) Command Center/ UTM manager tool included
l) Intel based multi core Technology
m) Must have an interoperability feature guarantee with existing devices network.
4) Wireless
a) Access Point
 High Performance Enterprise-class AP
 It has 2 Radio
 MIMO implementation for high performance 11n throughput : 3x3
 Number of the Spatial Streams : 2
 Maximum Throughput per radio/total : 300Mbps/600Mbps
 Wired performance in packets per second (pps) : 50.000 pps
 Number of supported SSIDs per radio/total : 8/16

 Simultaneous users per radio/total : 127/254
 Simultaneous voice calls (802.11b, G711, R > 80) : 12
 Operational Mode : Semi Autonomous
 Plug and play operation/zero touch deployment
 Standard security : WPA, WPA2 (AES), 802.11i, 802.1x, IPSec, KEv2, PKCS
#10, X509 DER/PKCS #12
 Support QoS (WMM, 802.11e), Call Adminssion Control (TSPEC), Power
Save (U-APSD), Fast Secure roaming and handover between APs, Pre-
Authentication (Pre-Auth), Opportunistic Key Caching (OKC)
 Support voice, video and data dengan menggunakan SSID yang sama
 Warranty : Lifetime
 Clients serving access points
 Intelligent thin AP : Encryption, Security, QoS and RF management done
on AP
 Bridging data traffic at AP and/or at controller simultaneously
 Simultaneous RF monitoring and client services
 Multi-channel WIDS on sensor mode, Multi-channel WIPS on sensor mode
 Remote access point
 RF spectrum analysis on sensor mode
 Self-forming and self-healing meshing
 Prioritize voice over data for both tagged and untagged traffic
 Rate limiting (rule and user-based)
 Rule and role based QoS processing
 Multicase to Unicast conversion
 Adaptable rate multicast
 Power save mode optimization for multicast.
b) Wireless Controller
 Total AP Support per appliance : 100
 Total simultaneous users per appliance : 2048
 User simultant addition on high mode availability : 1024
 CAPWAP Support
 Integrated VLAnVNS Suport
 Autodiscovery on a New Access Point
 CDR/RADIUS accounting
 Visibility through OneFabric Control Center
 Integration with Oneview, Mobile IAM, IPS and SIEM
 High availability with automatic failover to backup controller (license
included)
 Client Mobility with quick failover and session availability

 Dynamic Radio Management (DRM), Flexible Client Access (airtime
fairness), Load Balancing & Band-steering
 Support for hybrid forwarding : local switching on Access Point or
controller-based switching (based on user, application or segment)
 Robust standard-based security : 802.11i, WEP, WPA, WPA2,TKIP, AES
 802.1x authentication: EAP-TLS, EAP-SIM, EAP-TTLS, PEAP, EAP-MD5, EAP-
FAST RADIUS Authentication and Accounting
 Encryption Algorythm : L AES (CCMP), RC4-40, 104, 128-bit (TKIP, WEP)
 Guest Services (captive portal, URL redirect, NAC) and Walled Garden
(unauthorized access to URL)
 Advanced filtering and integration with OneFabric Control Center Policy
Manager
 Voice : SNMPv2c/v3
 Routing - OSPF v2
 Standard Voice Support : 802.11-802.3 bridging, IEEE 802.1D-compliant
bridging, IEEE 802.3DQ, VLAN tagging and trunking, Proxy ARP
 Integrasi Intrusion Prevention wired and wireless
 Denial Protection of Service (DoS) for management, control, and data
traffic
 Role-based grouping of users, devices, and aplication
 Enable VoWLAN dan dual- mode devices
 Centralized visibility and control
 Management wired and wireless which integrated with security and QoS
 Support Real Time Location Services.
c. Network Management Software (NMS)

The Network Management Software (NMS) in this work is a network software that
functions to monitor and manage network-attached system. NMS is part of the network
management system is installed on a server. NMS will manage the element/ network
devices that include fault, configuration, accounting, performance (health and status),
identification of the problem (the source of the problem and possible solutions), security
management. NMS is based on SNMP Protocol. NMS could manage atleast minimum of
300 devices. NMS operating on the OS platform Linus/ Unix/ equivalent. NMS should be
GUI based. NMS must have a technical support for 1 year in the period of 7x24 hours,
Indonesia.
Server Specifications :
 Chassis : 2U
 Processor : Intel Xeon v2/ 4 Core/ E5-2603V2/ Clockspeed @1.8Ghz/
10MB intel Smart Cache / 6.4GT/ s QP or equivalent
 Memori : 3.5" SATA ES HDD/ 7.2K RPM

 Optical Drive : ODD Bay.
d. Network Authentication System

Network authentication system is the access control software system to form a network
that is installed into a server by the minimal capability as follows :
 Provides the ability to identity-based and central management of access policies for
both network access and device administration
 It is a dedicated appliance-based software between the hardware and its operating
system
 Can run 802.1x protocol
 Can support a communication protocol by the Network Admission Control
 Can run both protocol AAA RADIUS and TACACS+
 It have an onboard database that supports Windows Active Directory, LDAP, dan
ODBC
 Could manage : Fault, Configuration, Accounting, Performance, & Security using
LAN software network management switching system & Security Manager
 Support on the virtualization server.
e. Fiber Optic Cable

 It is a single mode fiber cable type OS2 (ITU-T G652d), indoor and outdoor cables
 9 micron Core diameter and 125 micron Cladding diameter
 Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH) fire rating comply to IEC60754-2, EN50267,
VDE0482-267
 Standard compliance TIA568, ISO11801, ICEA, EN50173
 Having a patron by the glass yarn according to EN 60794-2-2-E1 standards
 Fiber Attenuation (dB/Km) ≤ 0.22 with a wave lenght of 1550 nm
 25 years warranty.
f. Fiber Optic Rackmount Patch Enclosure , Adapter, FO Pigtail and FO Patch cord
 Can be paired up to 24 Duplex Fiber Adapter
 Complete with the cable glands, Cables management and plugs hole
 Form Factor drawer style
 Duplex adapter with LC connector
 A Single Mode OS2 LSZH Pigtail FO with LC Connector
 A Single Mode OS2 LSZH Patch cord FO with LC Connector, 2M
 Was a manufacturer to the Fiber Optic Cables and 10 years warranty.
g. UTP Cat.6A
1) Meet the following standards :
 ANSI/TIA-EIA 568-C-2 CAT6A
 IEEE 802.3an 10GBASE-T
 ISO/IEC 11801 Class EA
 EN 50173-1.
2) The SFTP cables technical specifications as follows :
 Fire Rating - Low Smoked Zero Halogen
 Orange RAL2003
 AWG 23 Solid conductor, Diameter 0.54 mm
 Outside Diameter max. 7.1 mm
 Copper Braiding Overall with Individual Pair to reduce crosstalk
 Fire load 0.152 kWh/m, 0.550 MJ/m
 Self-extinguishing according to DIN VDE 0482-332, IEC60332-1 standard
 Fire Resistivity according to EN50266-2-4, Cat C, IEC60332-3-24 standard
 Halogen Free according to IEC 60754-2, EN 50267, DIN VDE 0482-267 standard
 25 years total solution warranty.
h. UTP Patch Panel
 19" Rackmounting, 1U Height,
 Minimum of 24-port RJ-45 CAT 6A, universal wiring
 Each port can be exchange individually
 Labels easily to replaces.
i. 8.3.9 Telecommunication Outlet
 British standard with transparent shutter
 Angle shape Jack holder
 White
 Universal Wiring jack RJ-45 CAT6A.
j. 08/03/10 UTP Patch Cord
 CAT 6A, 4-pairs cables stranded colored
 Standard compliance : ANSI/ TIA-568-C.2 Category 6A
 Universal Wiring, T568A or T568B
 4-pair conductors
 Construction SFTP to reduce crosstalk
 Snagless boots
 LSZH Jacket
 Lead-free
 Cables length 1M and 3M
 Have a security system with a locking mechanism.
k. 19 " rack for the Core switches and access switches

 Free Standing and Wallmounted rack rack
 42U Height, Depth 1100, Width 800
 2 cabinets in one row (Core and Server)
 Material : Rolled Iron, comply to RoHS Standard
 Thickness of 2 mm and anti-rust
 Door Home : Metal Curve Perforated, Diameter 4.20 mm, with key
 Rear Door : 2 doors Flat Perforated with key
 Strength withstand static load 1000 Kg
 Complete with 4 fans, two side vertical cables management, 12 outlets PDU
 The door can be opened from the rear rack for easy maintenance (cleaning).
l. 19 " wall mounted rack access switch
 Free Standing and Wallmounted rack rack
 Height 20U
 2 cabinets in one row (Core and Server)
 Material : Rolled Iron, comply to RoHS Standard
 Thickness of 2mm and anti-rust
 Door Home : Metal Curve Perforated, Diameter 4.20 mm, with key
 Rear Door : 2 doors Flat Perforated with key
 Strength withstand static load 1000Kg
 Complete with 4 fans, two side vertical cables management, 12 outlets PDU
 The door can be opened from the side shelf for easy maintenance (cleaning).
4. Specifications of The Session Initiative Protocol (SIP) PABX
a. General
Specifications of The Session Initiative Protocol (SIP) PABX expected is modular with
integrated communications platform, provides a complete solution for telephony,
messaging, conferencing. Runs in the data network. SIP PABX expected specifications
are :
 Flexible
 Expandable
 Scalable
 Triple Play Integration.
Integrated with data networks using SIP, can support capacity of up to xxxx extension,
SIP or analog. Can be added quickly and easily. And with the ability to add up to xxx PRI
connection/ E1 (xxx SIP Trunk).
b. Technical specifications of SIP PABX

1) Telephone FXS Ports Analog : 2 RJ11 ports (both with lifeline capability in
case of a power outage)
2) PSTN Line FXO Ports : 2 RJ11 ports (both with lifeline capability in
case of a power outage)
3) T1 / E1 / J1 Interface : 1 RJ45 port
4) Network Interfaces : Dual Gigabyte ports (switched or routed) with
PoE, A 3rd Gigabyte ports for Hot-Standby Clustering
5) NAT Router : Yes (user configurable)
6) Peripheral Ports: USD, SD
7) LED Indicators : Power 1/2, PoE, USB, SD, T1 / E1 / J1, 1/2 FXS,
FXO 1/2, LAN, WAN, Cluster Heartbeat
8) LCD Display : 128x32 dot matrix graphic LCD with DOWN and
OK buttons
9) Reset Switch : Yes, long press for factory reset and short press
for reboot
10) Signaling & Control :
 DTMF Methods : In Audio, RFC2833, and SIP INFO
 Digital Signaling : TPRI, SS7, MFC / R2, RBS (pending).
11) Provisioning Protocol and Plug-and-Play: TFTP / HTTP / HTTPS, auto-discovery and
auto-provisioning of Grand IP endpoints via ZeroConfig (DHCP Option 66 multicast
SIP SUBSCRIBE m / DNS), event list between local and remote trunks
12) Network Protocols : TCP / UDP / IP, RTP / RTCP, ICMP, ARP, DNS, DDNS,
DHCP, NTP, TFTP, SSH, HTTP / HTTPS, PPPoE, SIP (RFC3261), STUN, SRTP, TLS, LDAP,
HDLC, HDLC-ETH, PPP, Frame Relay (pending)
13) Disconnect Methods : Call Progress Tone, Polarity Reversal, Hook Flash
Timing, Current Loop Disconnect, Busy Tone
14) Security
 Media Encryption: SRTP, TLS, HTTPS, SSH
 Advanced Defense: fail2ban, alert events, Whitelist, Blacklist, strong password-
based access control.
15) Physical
 Universal Power Supply Input : 100 ~ 240VAC, 50 / 60Hz ; Output : DC +
12V, 1.5 A
 Physical Unit Weight : 2,165 kg; Package Weight: 3,012 kg
 Dimensions 440mm (L) x 185mm (W) x 44mm (H)
o o
 Environmental Operating : 32 - 113 F / 0 ~ 45 C, Humidity 10 – 90 %
(non-condensing)
o o
Storage : 14 – 140 F / -10 ~ 60 C, Humidity 10-90%
(non-condensing).
16) Mounting : Rack mount & Desktop

17) Additional Features
 Multi-Language Support
- English/ Simplified Chinese/ Traditional Chinese/ Spanish/ French/
Portuguese/ German/ Russian/ Italian/ Polish
- Czech for Web UI; Customizable IVR/ voice prompts for English, Chinese,
British English, German, Spanish
- Greek, French, Italian, Dutch, Polish, Portuguese, Russian, Swedish,
Turkish, Hebrew, Arabic.
 Caller ID
Bell core/ Telcordia, ETSI-FSK, ETSI-DTMF, SIN 227 - BT, NTT Japan (pending)
 Polarity Reversal/ Wink

Yes, with enable/ disable option upon call establishment and termination
 Call Center
Multiple configurable call queues, Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) based on
agent skills/ availability/ work-load, in-queue announcements
 Customizable Auto Attendant

Up to 5 layers of IVR (Interactive Voice Response)
 Maximum Call Capacity

As specified in the drawing
 Conference Bridges
Up to 8 bridges, up to 64 simultaneous conference attendees
 Call Features
- Call park
- Call forwarding
- Call transfer
- DND
- DISA
- Ring group
- Pickup group
- Blacklist
- Paging/ Intercom
- etc.
18) Networking
 Q.Sig Networking over T1 and IP
 Uniform Dial Plan
 Preferred Edition Networked Messaging
 Proactive remote monitoring via SNMP
 VPN support - IPSec or L2TP
 SIP trunking to low-cost Internet Telephony Service Providers (ITSP)
 Multi-site option (up to 1000 users across 32 sites) features such as Busy Lamp
Field, Paging, Desk-to-desk calling, Calling/ connected name and number, Hold
and Transfer, Centralized Voice-mail, Internal Directory, Absent Text Message,
Anti-Tromboning, Remote Hot-desking and Distributed Hunt Groups Data
Functionality
 Bandwidth on demand
 DHCP server
 Integral Data router - RIP-2
 Internet Access
 LAN-to-LAN routing
 Multi-Link PPP
 Remote Access Server (RAS) IP Network Connection
 IPv4 (RFC 791)
 MAC Address (IEEE 802.3)
 MAC Clone Setting
 Vendor Class ID
 IP / ICMP / ARP / RARP / SNTP
 Static IP
 DHCP Client (RFC 2131), a WAN port
 DHCP Server, LAN port
 NAT Server (RFC 1631)
 PPPoE Client
 DDNS (DynDNS)
 DNS Client
 Firewall
 URL Filter
 IP Filter
 MAC Address Filter
 Application program Filter
 Port Filter
 Port Forwarding
 Bandwidth Control (Download and Upload), Maximum Bandwidth and
Reserved Bandwidth
 UPnP Server at LAN port

 Behind NAT, DMZ use for NAT traversal
 SNTP with time zone and Daylight Saving
 TCP / UDP (RFC 793/768)
 RTP / RTCP (RFC 1889/1890)
 IPv4 ICMP (RFC 792),
 TFTP Client
 VLAN Support 802.1Q, 802.1P
 VLAN ID Range : 2 to 4094
 VLAN Priority : 0 to 7
 QoS : DiffServ (RFC 2475), TOS (RFC791, 1394).
19) SIP Protocol

 RFC3261 compliance
 Support up to 16 SIP Server Register Accounts
 SIP UDP Protocol
 Support SIP Compact Form
 Support SIP HOLD Type
 SIP Session Timer (RFC 4028)
 Configure SIP port and SIP QoS Type
 MD5 Digest Authentication (RFC2069 / R
 SIP Prack (RFC3262)
 Early / Delay Media support
 Offer / Answer (RFC3265)
 Message Waiting Indication (RFC3842)
 Event Notification (RFC3265)
 REFER (RFC3515)
 Support Outbound Proxy
 SIP Proxy Keep Alive time setup
 Support Primary and Secondary SIP Se
 Support STUN NAT Traversal
 Support "rport" parameter (RFC 3581).
20) Audio Codec

 G.711 A-law/ μ-law, G.729a, G.723.1 (6.3K, 5.3K), GSM-FR Full Rate (13kbps)
 Select voice codec priority : Local or Remote Configure RTP port and RTP QoS
Type Silence SuppressionVAD/ CNG
 LEC: Line Echo CancellervMax Echo
 Tail Length (G.168) : 32, 64 and 128 ms Packet Loss Compensation
 Input (Encode) Gain setup
 Output (Decode) Gain setup

 In-band/ out of band DTMF (RFC4733, RFC2833 / SIP INFO)
 Adaptive/ Configurable Jitter Buffer G.168 Acoustic Echo Cancellation
 Dialing Plan with drop, replace, insert dialing digits Select first digit and Inter
digit timeout duration (Sec)
 Selectable Call Progress Tone
 Specified Support Line Calling.
5. Technical Installation Requirements
a. Equipment
1) Coordinates where each piece of equipment will be determined later
2) Wall mounted Wiring closet installed at a height 1.5 m from the floor
3) All active devices (hardware) network 19"rack (Free Standing and Wallmount)
4) Software network installed in the blade server
5) Parameter settings and configuration of the system will be determined later
6) Supply of electricity to this equipment must come from Central UPS.
b. Conduit Cables installation

1) All the cables should be installed horizontally mounted with cable trunking/ cable
tray and the installation use white conduit pipe
2) All cables are shaft mounted vertically to be mounted on a cable ladder and
clamped to the building structure with a saddle clamp
3) Conduit must be clamped to the structure by using the "Saddle clamps"
4) Conduit exposed/ visible should use a steel conduit with adjustable diameter of at
least 20 mm
5) All the plumbing are ceiling shaft mounted installation, should be given a marker
every 10 m and color it with the following provisions :
 Red for Fire Alarm
 Black for Sound / PAS
 Blue for Phone
 Green for Data
 Yellow for Security
 Brown for BAS
 Orange for FIDS
 Purple for The Master Clock
 Pink for IPTV.
c. Cable Cage and Cable Ladder

1) Cable cage made of Low Carbon Great with a wire diameter of 5 mm, width
according to the shop drawing, which for the length of each size is adjusted to the
as built drawing. This cable cage used for the electronic system installation such as
Fire Alarm, Sound, PABX (Telephone), Data and Security
2) How to installing the cable cage must be hung on the concrete with a threaded
circular iron (10 mm diameter of the iron rod) with a distance between the iron
hanger maximum of 150 cm
3) At every bend or branching the cable cage shape must be installed such that the
cable in accordance with the bending allowed
4) Cable Ladder made of hot deep galvanized finishing with a width according to the
shop drawing, which for the length of each size is adjusted to the as built drawing.
Cable ladder used for cable feeder electronic system installation such as Fire Alarm,
Sound, PABX (Telephone), Data and seurity
5) The cable feeder mounted on a cable ladder and must be clamped (fastened with a
cable ties
6) Before installing the cable cage, must be coordinated in advance with other
installations such as VAC, Plumbing and Electrical
7) The minimum distance between the electrical cable cage and electronic cable
cage is 30 cm
8) Cable Ladder installed on the wall using 3 pieces dynabolt size 3 ½” x 2" on each
distance of maximum 75 cm.
6. Testing
a. Testing of the equipment system must be made by the sole selling agent and they
should prepare a good certificate from the competent authority
b. Tests on the insulation materials and grounding cables installation must be done in
accordance with PUIL 2011.

other alternatives comparable to that specified, if the product materials and equipment are
not available in the market or is no longer manufactured. New contractor could replace it
with a new products after get officially approval in written by the Employer Task/ Board of
Directors/ Construction Management. The products of materials and equipment is basically
in accordance with the materials appendix lists.
Article 6 Sound System
1. Scope of Works
a. General
The contractor must offer the entire scope of works described well in this specifications or
shown in the shop drawings, where the materials and equipment used in accordance with
the provisions of this specifications. If it turns out there is a difference between the
this article, is the obligation of the contractor to replace the materials or equipment so
that in accordance with the provisions of this article without the additional expenses.
b. Scope of Sound System Works
As shown in the shop drawings, Sound System Contractor installation work must conduct
the procurement and installation as well as handing in good condition and ready for use.
An outline of the scope of works referred Sound System Installation is as follows :
1) The procurement, installation and testing of the Central Sound System Equipment,
covering the sound signal source units (program source) and signal amplifiers sound
(audio amplifier)
2) The procurement, installation and testing of the control unit and the monitor and
Shelving System of Central Sound System equipment
3) Procurement, installation and testing of Main Distribution Frame (MDF) and Juction
Box (JB - TS)
4) The procurement, installation and testing of the Sound System cables distribution
between the central equipment and shelving systems with those circuit box on each
floor
5) Procurement, installation and testing of loudspeakers in accordance with the as built
drawing
6) The procurement, installation and testing of the cables use between the circuit box
with a megaphone on each floor
7) Giving a warranty for one year at no additional cost
8) Perform testing, commissioning and training
9) Submit 4 (four) sets of shop drawings of the the sound system installation.
Materials and equipment that will be used must meet the technical requirements as follows :
a. Distribution Panel Box

This Distribution Panel Box should be made of steel plate with minimum thickness of
2 mm and all of them should be painted with zinchromat anti rust before ended it with
gray fuel acrylic paint. Distribution Panel Box must be equipped with the same typical
type of keys for all Distribution Panel Boxes and cables connection terminal.
Distribution Panel Box should be fitted with a cable gland as many as the number of in/
out cables.
b. Cables
1) Distribution Cables of MDF to Juction Box using the NYMHY 3 x 1,5 mm² type with
the number of wires according to the as built drawing. Cable connector to each
2
loudspeaker using NYMHY 2 x 1.5 mm type
2) The cables installation from the volume control to the junction box using NYMHY
2
3 x 1.5 mm
3) The cable to the microphone jack using twisted shielded cables (screened).
c. C o n d u i t
Type conduit in the building that can be used are PVC conduit, high impact with the
diameter at least 1.5 times of the cables cross-section.
d. Main/ Central Equipment

1) Unit sound signal source (source program) include :
a) Power Amplifier
b) Sound Management.
2) Loudspeaker required are :

a) Ceiling Speaker
b) Horn Speaker
c) Wall Speaker
d) Column Speaker.
3) The technical specifications of major equipment :

a) Call Station Input Module
 Input Impedance : > 5k ohms at a frequency of > 200 Hz
 Output Impedance : < 50 ohms at 1 kHz.
b) Zone Relay Module

Voltage/ Current Supply : 42 V (2V) @ 78 mA max
5V (0.5V) @ 9 mA max.
Voltage max. allowed : 100 VAC
Allowable max current : 4 A VAC
c) Control Relay Module
- Fault relay no. 1 - Make/break

: contacts (single pole, double throw
- Control relay - Relay
: 2 – 8 make contacts
- Relay 9 – 12 make contacts
d) Microphone
Microphone Input : - Input level nominal : 84 dB SPL
- Level input max. 143 dB SPL (1 Pa = 94 dB SPL)
Output Level 3 mV with
SPL and 1veff (0 dB) +/- 3 dB : - Vo = 0.1 dB
S / N Ratio pd minal output o : 62 dB
Release Time : 100 - 300 m sc.
e) Control Input Module: Receive a 24 V DC voltage signal from MCPFA.

f) Line Output Module: Pencapur signals from multiple audio inputs.
g) Ceiling Speaker
 Power handling cap. : 6 Watt (in Tap at 3 Watt)
 Teg. Input : 100 Volt
 Input Impedance : 1 K Ohm
 SPL : 90 dB at 1 W, max. 104 dB at 6V
 Frequency range : 75-11000 Hz
 Impedance : 100 V (25 Ohm), 75 V (12.5 Ohm) 50 V (6 Ohm)
 Type : Circular (round) and fluse mounting on the
ceiling (ceiling) or fit the image of planning.
h) Horn Speaker
 Power handling cap. : 10 watts
 Input Impedance : 1 k ohms
 SPL : 107 dB.
i) Wall Speaker (Box Speaker)

 Power handling cap. : 10 watts (at Tap pd 3 W)
 Input Impedance : 1 k ohms
 SPL : 98 dB at max. 1 W
 Input Impedance : 1 k Ohm
 Rate Voltage : 100 V.
j) Column Speaker
 Power handling cap. : 10 watts
 Input Impedance : 1 k Ohm
 SPL : 98 dB at max. 1 W
 Frequency range : 200-15000 Hz
 Type : Indoor.
k) Power Amplifier
 Frequency respone : 20-
 Power output : 240 W
 Output Voltage : 50 V, 70 V, 100 V
 Voltage : 220/240 V, 50 HZ
 Noise Level: 70 dB
 Audio Sensitivity: 500 s / d 10 000 mV
 Priority / Call Balance: 4 '1,000 mV.
3. Installation Technical Requirements
a. Equipment Rack
The sound system equipment racks are placed in accordance with the system functions
and grounding with 0.2 ohm maximum custody
b. Feeder cable and installation cables
All the wires coming out of the equipment rack must be through a cable gland and use
flexible conduit
c. Panel Box Terminal
Panel Box is placed in accordance the shop drawing, installed on each floor at a height
of 150 cm from the floor. The Panel Box Terminal installation is using Dynabolt ½ "x 2"
by 4 units. All cables entry/ exit the Panel Box should be through a cable gland and
wearing a flexible conduit
d. Cables and conduit
 All cables are mounted horizontally must be installed in the cable trunking
 All cables are mounted vertically on the shaft must be mounted on a cable ladder
 Conduit must clamp to the building structure with saddle clamps.
e. Cable trunking and cable ladder
 Cable trunking and cable ladders should be installed horizontal and one vertical line
 Ladder cable shaft mounted to the wall using Dynabolt pieces measuring 3 ½ "x 2"
at a distance of 75 cm
 Cable trunking hanged on building floor plate by Dynabolt ½ "x 2".
f. Megaphone
All loudspeakers installed at the places corresponding to the as built drawings where the
exact coordinates will be determined in the field.
4. Testing
a. All equipment in this Sound system must be tested by the agency holding companies
such equipment where the company must provide a letter of guarantee on the
operation of the system after it turned out the test results are good
b. Measurements were made using Sound Level Meter.

other alternatives comparable to what specified for the client, if the material and equipment
that is not available in the market or is no longer manufactured. New contractor could
replace with a new materials and equipment after a formal and written approval of the
Employer Task/ Board of Directors/ Construction Management / planner. As for the materials
and equipment in question is in accordance with the attachment of the materials and
equipment appendix lists.
Article 7 Fire Alarm System
1. Scope of Works
a. General
The contractor must offer the entire scope of works described well in this specifications
or shown in the shop drawings, where the materials and equipment used in accordance
with the provisions of this specifications. If it turns out there is a difference between the
this article, is the obligation of the contractor to replace the material or equipment so
that in accordance with the provisions of this article without the additional provision
expenses.
Implementation of the installation of fire alarm system and the selection and placement
of the type of detector is based on :
1) The Indonesian National Standard No. SNI 03-1735-2000 about, Procedures for
access to buildings and access planning environment for fire prevention in buildings
2) The Indonesian National Standard No. SNI 03-1736-2000 about, Procedures for
passive protection system planning for fire prevention in buildings
3) The Indonesian National Standard No. SNI 03-3985-2000 about, Procedures for the
planning, installation and testing of passive protection systems for fire protection in
buildings
4) K Minister of Public Works. No. 2 1985 and 1987 3.4.53 SKBI
5) Department of Labor Decree No. 17 in 1980 and No. Per-02 / DP / 1983
6) General requirements of Electrical Installation 2000 (PUIL 2000)
7) Technical data of the product in the field of fire alarm system equipment made by
manufacturers from different countries.
b. Fire Alarm System
As shown in the shop drawings, Fire Alarm Installation Contractor should conduct the
procurement and installation as well as handing in good condition and ready to be use.
The outline of the scope of works Fire Alarm Installation in question is as follows :
1) The procurement, installation and testing of MCPFA Control Panel
2) The procurement, installation and testing of all types of Detector, Manual Station,
and Indicator Lamp
3) Procurement, installation and testing of Juction Box on every floor
4) The procurement, installation and testing of cables for both the Monitor and
Control
5) Submit the necessary documents in the fire alarm system, among others :
 System description and principle of operation
 instalations and Instructions
 Connection diagrams
 Testing and commissioning instructions.
6) The plant should provide both hardware and software warranty for 1 year
minimum without any additional cost
7) Managing and completing licensing Fire Alarm Installation of installations
authorized
8) Perform testing and commissioning
9) Implement training and technical manuals handed
10) Submit 4 (four) sets of the shop drawings of fire alarm installation.
2. Description of Fire Alarm System
When one of the detectors, manual push button engine running, then the control panel
(MCPFA) will light up and provide information on where the equipment point receives a fire
signal. Furthermore buzzer will sound which corresponds to the detector area where the
equipment is running.
Indicator lamp will remain lit / flashing until the research system in MCPFA pressed by the
operator or sign security situation is resolved.
When the fire alarm situation can not be resolved then we can activate the general alarm
manually, where all the indicator lamp will light up.
Fire Alarm Systems (fire detection) used for this building is semi addresable system, in which
the Master Control Panel Fire Alarm (MCPFA) using a type of Analog Adressable, while the
detector using the conventional type. Materials and equipment that will be used must meet
or approach the technical requirements as follows :
a. Detector
1) Photoelectric Smoke Detector (Conventional):
 Model : Surface mounted
 Operating Voltage : 12 - 30 Vdc
 Current Consumption : 55 - 60 mA
 Smoke density range : 0 - 4.5% / m
 Fire test level : 4.5% / m
 Operating ambient temp. range : 10o C - 50o C
 Color : off white
2
 Coverage : 42 - 92 m .
2) Rate of Rise Heat Detector (Conventional)

 Operating voltage : 12 - 30 Vdc
 Heat sensing : Thermistor
 Temperature measurement range : 50 ° C - 65 ° C
2
 Coverage : 25 - 42 m .
3) Fixed Heat Detector (Conventional)

 Heat sensing : Thermistor
 Temperature measurement range : 65 ° C
2
 Coverage : 25 - 42 m .
4) Manual Station (Manual Push Button)

 Type : Break glass Push Button
 Voltage : 24 Volt dc
 Operating Voltage : 15 - 30 Vdc
 Alarm Current Consumption : 5 mA
 Stand By Current : 200 uA
 Model : Recessed wall
 Color : Red.
5) LCD Anuonciator
 Type : Back - Lit LCD
 Sound : Synthetic sound, electronic sound and buzzer
 LED / switch for process monitoring, action and maintenance and battery
charger.
6) Alarm Bell
 Type : Circutor Surface mounting.
 Current consumption : 80 - 90 mA max
 Sound Output : at least 95 dBA at a distance of 1 mtr
 Operation Method : Coil Type Drive.
 Red.
7) Indicator Lamp
 Type : Indicator lamp c / w Strobe
 Current consump : 40 mA max
 Intensity : Candela 4.75 Sec
 Flash Rate :
 Lamp Shade : Glass red or adjusted by the manufacturer.
b. Control Panel Master of Fire Alarm Control Panel (MCPFA)
1) Main Fire Alarm Control Panel (Analogue Addressable System)

 Capacity : 1 loop (minimum 127 loops)
 Main Power : 220 VAC. 50/60 Hz
 Power Supply : 150 Watt
 Battery Capacity : 2 x 12 V, 26 AH
 Relay Output : 1 x Real-time (RT) Alarm
: 1 x Real Time (RT) Fault
 Supervised Output : 1 x RT alarm 1 x RT Fault, 1 x Horn

 Emergency Power : 72 Hours
o o
 Operating Temperature : -8 C - 42 C
 Standby power : 24 V DC Nickel Cadmium battery.
 Allowable line resistance : 30 Ohm
 Display : Digital & Message display
 Operation Section : Menu, Keypad, Switches
 Record : Built-in Printer
 Nominal time delay : 50 second for a smoke detector, 20 second
heat detector
 IP : 3x
 Material : Steel plate 1.6 mm tick baking paint
 Accessories : Event Printer, Realay module, Key switch,
battery kit (9V), Lithium Battery 9V / 1AH, 19" Mounting kit, Cables kit, Matrix
Printer.
2) Announciator
 Type : LCD Blackit 80 Caracter (20 Cacarater x 4 Line)
 Waterproof cabinet
 System Acknowledge, silence and resert signal system
 Place of MCPFA up to 2000 meters
 IP 66.
c. Panel Box Terminal (Juction Box)

The Panel Box Terminal should use surface mounting type and should be made of a
metal plate with minimum thickness of 2 mm and must all be painted with zinchromat
anti rust painted before end it with gray fuel acrylic paint. The Panel Box Terminal
should include uniform keys to all circuit boxes for cables and connecting terminal.
d. C a b l e s
1) The power cables of major equipment using NYY 3 x 2.5 mm², while the power
cables to each Panel Box Terminal each floor using FRC cable size of 2 x 1.5 mm²
2) The cables used for installation of each detector using NYA 2 x 1.5 mm²
3) Communication cables between modules using this type of cable 18 AWG Shielded
Twisted 1 pair
4) Cables for light indicator and an alarm bell use FRC with a size of 2 x 1.5 mm²
installed in conduit pipe clamped it with the same brand of clamps saddle
5) The wiring for the signal using a shield.
e. Conduit
The conduit used is a High Impact PVC with an internal diameter of at least 1.5 times
cable diameter.
a. Tools and Equipment

1) Coordinates where each piece of equipment tobe placed will be determined later.
Manual Push Button and Lamp Indicator fitted together with hydrant box and if its
outside the hydrant box then mounted at a height of 1.5 m from the floor
2) Alarm Bell installed 0.5 m below the ceiling or adapted to the pitch condition
3) Fire Alarm system equipment must be grounding with a maximum resistance of 0.2
Ohm
4) Electricity supply to the equipment is inserted to the emergency load group from
the generator set.
b. Cables and conduit

1) All cables are mounted horizontally must be installed in the cable tray and using
conduit pipe
2) All the wires coming out of the equipment rack must be through a cable gland and
use flexible conduit. Isolation between the veins of the cable to the ground a
minimum of 20 M.Ohm.
5. Testing
Tests on the system of work equipment must be carried by the single agent (authorized) on
sale of equipment and serfitikat parties must prepare the proper installation of installations
authorized.
Testing the fire alarm system covering all systems associated with the system include:
 The central system is sound
 HVAC Systems
 Main panel system and panel AC
 sprinkler system
 elevator system.
Testing of the control cable insulation resistance should be conducted in accordance with
PUIL (General Regulation of Electrical Installation).
6. Material And Equipment Products

another alternative comparable with that dispesifikasika to the client, if the product
materials and equipment referred to does not exist in the market or is no longer
manufactured. New contractor can replace the equipment after it is approved officially and
in written of the Employer Task/ Board of Directors/ Construction Management/ planner.
The products of materials and equipment is basically in accordance to the materials appendix
lists.
Article 8 Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) System
1. Scope of Works
a. General
1) The Contractor must offer the entire scope of works described well in this
specifications or shown in the drawings, where the materials and equipment used
in accordance to the provisions of this specifications
2) If it turns out there is a difference between the specifications of materials and or
equipment installed to the specifications required by this article, the duty of the
contractor to replace the material or equipment so that in accordance with the
provisions of this article without the additional provision expense.
b. Description of CCTV System Scope of Works

As shown in the drawings plan, CCTV installation contractor's job to do the procurement
and installation as well as handing in good condition and ready for use. An outline of the
scope of works Installation of CCTV in question is as follows :
1) The procurement, installation and testing of the CCTV system equipment
2) The procurement, installation and testing of cables for the system installation
3) Perform Testing, Commissioning & Training
4) Supply and installation rack cabinet and control desk for the laying of CCTV
monitors and other equipment after coordinated with the interior
5) CCTV system must be equipped for 4 hours UPS General Alarms & 8 hours Stand By
6) Submit certificate attached equipment (to keep the authenticity of which is
attached)
7) The procurement, installation and testing of the module interfaces with other
systems.
Materials and equipment that will be used must meet or approximating the technical
requirements as follows :
a. Cameras, Lenses and Bracket
Cameras, Lenses and Bracket is a unitary equipment that serves to monitor / supervise
the state of the region / area. The combination of the type of camera and lens used to
be very influential on the quality of the displayed image. While the placement position
of the device will be very influential on what you want displayed on the monitor and the
purpose of planning the procurement of CCTV. Cameras, Lenses and Bracket can simply
be divided into three categories,
 Camera : fixed and moving
 Lens : fixed and zoom
 Bracket : fixed and moving (pan & tilt).
b. Indoor Speed Dome Camera 22 x Zoom

1) Speed dome camera
2) Real time video at 4CIF resolution
3) High resolution CCD Sensor
4) Auto iris, auto focus, auto white balance, black light compensation
5) Standard video compression with high compression ratio
6) Ingress Protection : IP 66 (Water proof)
7) Min illumination of 0.1 lux @ f 1,6, AGC ON
8) Lens 3.9 to 85.8 mm (22 x), the angle of view 58 to 2.2
9) Digital Zoom 16 x
o
10) Pan Range 360 endless
11) Tilt the range of 5 to 90 auto flip
12) Com. Interface RJ 45, 10/100 Mbps Ethernet interfaces.
o o
13) Operation condition – 30 C to + 65 C Humidity 90% or less
14) Complaince FCC, CE, UL, RoHS
15) Network : Cat6 Ethernet 10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX, RJ45.
c. Idoor Speed Dome Camera 36 x Zoom

1) Real time video at 4CIF resolution
2) High resolution CCD Sensor
3) Auto iris, auto focus, auto white balance, black light compensation
4) Standard video compression with high compression ratio
5) 8 Patrol, up to 32 presets per patrol
6) 4 fully programeble patterns
7) Up to 32 GB SD / SDHC card for on-board storage
9) 128 x Wide Dynamic Range Real time video at 4 CIF resolution
10) Image sensor ¼ "CCD (752 x 582 pixels)
12) Lens 3.4 to 122.4 mm (36 x), the angle of view of 57.8 to 1.7
o
15) Tilt the range of 5 to 185 auto mirror
16) Com. Interface RJ 45, 10/100 Mbps Ethernet interfaces
o o
18) Complaince FCC, CE, UL, RoHS.
d. Indoor Fixed Dome Camera

1) Up to 1.3 megapixel (1,280 x 960) Resolution
2) Progresisiv scan CMOS sensor
3) Advenced Wide Dynamic Range (ADWDR)
4) Standard Video compression with high compression ratio
5) Support dual stream, and the sub-stream for mobile survelliance
6) PoE (Power of Ethernet)
7) Up to 32 GB SD / SDHC card for on-board storage
9) 128 x Wide Dynamic Range Real time video at 4 CIF resolution.
10) Image sensor ¼ "CCD (752 x 582 pixels)
12) Lens 3.4 to 122.4 mm (36 x), the angle of view of 57.8 to 1.7
o
15) Tilt the range of 5 to 185 auto mirror
16) Com. Interface RJ 45, 10/100 Mbps Ethernet interfaces.
o o
18) Complaince FCC, CE, UL, RoHS.
e. Video Server (NVR)

Is a combination of digital devices Multiplexer and a Hard Disk Recorder that serves as
the recipient of images from several CCTV cameras and distribute to the monitor screen.
The technical capabilities as follows :
1) Capacity up to 48 Channel
2) Connectivity up to 5 MP per camera
3) Resolution VGA / HDMI Video output with 1,920 x 1,080 resolution Support live
view, storage and playback, Holiday recording schedule
4) The storage capacity of 16 nos, HDD (SATA) interface : 4 Tb x 16 sets of HDD (64 Tb)
5) 2 nos Self Adaptive Network 10/100/1000 Mbps network interfaces
6) Features :
 Multi recording types (manual, continuous, alarm, motion, motion and alarm
 Multi-level user management and operating permissions
 Support RAID 0, 1, 5, 10 storage scheme
 Recording 4 CIF @ 25 fps and up to 5 megapixel cameras.
7) High Compatibility : Software of the brand with the IP camera to

obtain high compatibility
8) Customized Layout : Layout can dikastemisasi as needed, such as

one camera, two cameras, three cameras, multiple cameras, with sizes varying,
even be a model icon, which is clicked to view the desired camera, to be placed at
will user
9) Definable Action Area : The number of layouts that much, can be easily
searched because each layout can be created names
10) Auto Layout Tour : Layout can be made sequence relocate to
another layout with a certain time interval
11) Hot Spot Monitor : Hot spot monitor will take a picture of a
camera that there are no alarms or to see clearer images / large
12) Full Screen : The camera can be selected to appear full
screen
13) Flexible and Scalable System, up to 500 cam. : The number of cameras that can be
received depends license number of the camera, which can be added at a later date
that form a server cluster up to five hundred cameras in one system
14) High Frame Rate : The frame rate is the maximum that can
ditermima in accordance with the specifications of the camera. Depending
specifications servers and IP cameras, software can give each VGA (640x480) @
15fps to 32 cameras simultaneously, with the Xeon Workstation and professional
VGA
15) Flexible Recording : Recording can be done manually or by
schedule or in the event of an alarm, resolution, compression ratio and frame rate
can be set, for each camera
16) Playback During Recording : Software can play the recording (playback),
without prejudice to the ability to keep record simultaneously
17) Search Recording by date/ time : Can search recording by time/ date
18) Camera Control : to control the movement of the camera (PTZ).
Control can be done with the mouse to click the icon, or click on the image, or can
use the Joystick
19) Supported Resolution : In accordance with the ability of the camera,
which reached 1280 x 960. (See IP camera specifications)
20) Management of Storage : Can dikastemisasi to remove old file2 if it
reaches a certain percentage of the hard-disk capacity. Every file can be
customized.
f. Keyboard
 Operating Voltage : 12-14 Volt AC/ DC
 Power : 5 Watts Nominal
 Signal Allegiant : 2 wire RS - 485, 9600 Baud, 8 bits, no parity, 1 stop bit
2 channels of audio input connectors on microphone
 NVR Signal : Wire RS - 485, 19,200 baud, 8 bits, no parity, 1 stop bit
 Console Signal : RS - 232 RTS/ CTS handshaking, 19,200 Baud, 8 bits, no

parity, 1 stop bit
 Allegiant Connection : RJ 11 data/ power
 Mux/ NVR Connection : RJ 11 data/ power.
g. TV Monitor
The monitor should be LED/ LCD size 32" for Multiscreen and Spot designed specifically
for CCTV system and can operate 24 hours continuously and have a low level of
radiation.
 Screen Size : 32/ 50 Inch color High Performance
 Model : Lighting Emitting Diode
 Resolution : 1,080 Full HD
 Input : 2 CVBS, 1 Y/ C, Audio
 Sync Format : NTSC/ PAL
 Voltage : 130-230 VAC/ 50 HZ
 Power : 40-120 Watt.
h. Housing
The house is made of metal camera that is equipped with a heater and blower for
outdoor. For Indoor do not need to be equipped with Heater and Blower but equipped
with Mounting/ Bracket.
a. The camera unit is placed according to the function and ease of maintenance (see
figures, images)
b. Central Placement Monitor supply should be placed in 24-hour guarded security
c. Camera images are placed according to plan
d. Video controller is placed in the panel on a rack 19" according to the image plan. All
cables entry/ exit box 19 rack panel" must be through a cable gland and wearing a
flexible conduit
e. Cables and Conduit
1) All cables are mounted horizontally must be installed in the cable trunking
2) All cables are mounted vertically on the shaft must be mounted on a cable ladder
3) Conduit must be clamped to the building structure with sadle clamps
4) All the wires out of the cable tray must use a flexible conduit.
f. Cable Trunking and Cable Ladder

1) All the cables must be installed horizontally
2) All the cable is plugged into the wall shaft using 3 1/2" x 2" dynabolt at a
distance of 75 cm
3) The cable tray hung on the floor of a building with 1/2" x 2" dynabolt.
4. Testing
All equipment in the CCTV system must be tested by the holding companies equipment
agency, which the company must provide a guarantee certifitation upon the operation of the
system after it turned out the test results are good. All equipment in CCTV systems installed,
both main equipment and or its accessories must obtain a certificate of authenticity from the
holder of the equipment agency.
Materials and equipment that will be installed must meet the specifications. Allowing
contractors to propose another alternative which is equivalent to the client, if the material
and equipment that is not available in the market or is no longer manufactured. New
contractor can replace materials and equipment from other products, after get approval and
written officially by the Board of Directors/ Planner/ Construction Management.
The products of materials and equipment is basically in accordance to the materials appendix
lists.
CHAPTER 6
MECHANICAL WORKS
TABLE OF CONTENT
Page
Article 1 Preface ...................................................................................................................... 1

1. References and Requirements ........................................................................... 1
2. Shop Drawings/ As Built Drawings/ Images ....................................................... 2
3. Coordination ...................................................................................................... 2
4. Implementation of The Installation .................................................................... 2
5. Testing and Commisioning ................................................................................. 3
6. Maintenance Period and Handover ................................................................... 3
7. Reports............................................................................................................... 4
8. The Responsiblity in Charge of The Implementation ......................................... 4
9. Addition/ Reduction / Changes of The Installation ............................................ 4
10. Permits – Licenses .............................................................................................. 5
11. Chiseling, Welding and Drilling........................................................................... 5
12. Routine and Special Inspections......................................................................... 5
13. Projet Site Minutes of Meeting .......................................................................... 5
Artice 2 Electrical Installation System

1. General Terms .................................................................................................... 5
2. Scope of Works .................................................................................................. 5
3. Controling .......................................................................................................... 6
4. Shop Drawings/ As Built Drawings/ Images ....................................................... 7
5. Implementation of The Installation .................................................................... 7
6. Water Supply Installation Works........................................................................ 7
7. Wastewater, Sewarage, Rain and Air Pipes Installation Inside The
Building .............................................................................................................. 9
8. Wastewater, Sewarage, Rain and Air Pipes Installation Outside
The Building ....................................................................................................... 10
9. Under Ground Pipelines and Sewarage Installation Works ................................ 10
10. Water Installation Test ....................................................................................... 11
11. Pump Machine and its Terms ............................................................................. 12
Article 3 Sewage Treatment Plan (STP) System

1. Preliminary ......................................................................................................... 15
2. STP Installation ................................................................................................... 17
3. Implementation ................................................................................................. 18
Article 4 Fire Extinguisher System

1. General Terms .................................................................................................... 20
2. Brief Description of The Scope of Works ............................................................ 21
3. Materials ............................................................................................................ 21
4. Tools/ Equipment Schedule of Fire Extinguisher ................................................ 25
5. Fire Extinguisher Products ................................................................................. 28
6. Installment ......................................................................................................... 28
7. Fire Protection System Test ............................................................................... 30
Article 5 Air Conditioning System

1. Preface ............................................................................................................... 32
2. Air Condition Installation Works ........................................................................ 33
3. Mechanical Ventilation Works ........................................................................... 36
Article 6 In-Building Transportation Installation

1. General Regulation ............................................................................................ 39
2. Scope of Works .................................................................................................. 45
3. Elevator Technical Specifications ....................................................................... 46
4. Technical Data .................................................................................................... 50
5. Testing and Commisioning ................................................................................. 51
6. Service and Maintenance ................................................................................... 51
7. Materials and Equipment Products .................................................................... 51
CHAPTER VI
MECHANICAL WORKS
Article 1 Preface
1. References and Requirements
a. Basic Installation must meet the following requirements :

1) The Indonesian National Standard (SNI) 03-7065-2005 about plumbing system
2) Decree of the Minister of Public Works 26 / PRT / M / 2008 on the technical
provisions of safeguards against fire in buildings and environment
3) The Indonesian National Standard (SNI) 03-6571-2001 about fire smoke control
systems in buildings
4) The Indonesian National Standard (SNI) 03-3939-2000 on procedures for the planning
and installation of automatic sprinkler systems to prevent fire hazards in the building
5) ASHRAE, the guide and the data book
6) SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air conditioning Contractors National Association)
7) The Indonesian National Standard (SNI) 14-0225-2011 about - General Requirements
of Electrical Installations (PUIL) in 2011
8) National Fire Protection Associates (NFPA)
9) The Indonesian National Standard (SNI) 03-6573-2001 on procedures for vertical
transportation in the building design
10) The Indonesian National Standard (SNI) 03-2453-2002, planning procedures
rainwater infiltration wells for their yards
11) The decision of the state minister of population and environment no. Kep. 05 /
MENKLH / 2014 concerning wastewater quality standard
12) The Indonesian National Standard (SNI) no. 03-7015-2014, about lightning protection
systems in buildings
13) The Indonesian National Standard (SNI) latest edition relating to the installation and
the technical requirements of mechanical and electrical work
14) Other rules issued by the competent authority, such as PLN, Dit.Jen.Bina Lindung
from the central and local levels
15) Other regulations relating to workplace safety.
b. This installation work should be carried out by :

1) A company that has an installation license from the authorized agency and has been
working on it
2) Especially for the permission of the electrical agency, the contractor shall be
registered as an AKLI (Association of Indonesian Electrical Contractors) member or
MECHANICAL WORKS Page 1

MECHANICAL WORKS page 2
Association of Electricity in accordance with the class determined or cooperating with

another company which already has the AKLI intended.
a. The shop drawings of these plans and requirements constitute a unity complementary
and equally binding.
b. The drawings of this system generally show the layout of the equipment, while the
installation must be done with due regard to the condition of the existing building and
also consider the convenience of service / maintenance if the equipment is operated
c. Architectural and Structures/ Civil Drawings should be used as a reference for the
implementation and finishing details of the installation
d. Prior to commencement of work, the Contractor shall submit the shop drawings and
details to the Construction Management to be subject inspection and approval. By
submitting the drawings, the Contractor is deemed to have studied the situation of other
installations relating to this installation
e. The Contractor shall prepare installed of the installations drawings accompanied by
Operating and Maintenance Instruction and shall be delivered to the Construction
Management at the time of the First Handover in 4 (four) copies consisting of 1 (one)
trace and 3 (three) blue prints, binding and completed with a table of contents and data
Notation.
3. Coordination
a. Contractor should cooperate with other installation contractor, so that all works can run
smoothly in accordance with the time set
b. Good coordination is necessary, so that one installation does not preclude the progress of
the other
c. If the implementation of this installation precludes another installation, all consequences
are the responsibility of the Contractor.
a. Before the implementation of this installation begins, the Contractor shall submit the
shop drawings and details to the Owner/ Board of Directors/ Construction Management
in 3 (three) copies for approval
b. The Contractor shall reexamine any size and capacity of the equipment to be installed. If
there is any doubt, the Contractor should immediately contact the Planner/ Construction
Management/ the Owner as the Task Giver. Measuring the size and/ or selection of the
wrong equipment will be the responsibility of the Contractor.
a. The Contractor shall perform all necessary tests and measurements to determine whether
the entire installation is functioning properly and can meet all the requirements
requested
b. All materials and equipment required to carry out such testing are the responsibility of
the Contractor.
6. Maintenance Period and Handover
a. This installation equipment shall be warranted for one year commencing from the date of
the First Handover
b. The maintenance period for this installation is for 6 (six) months from the date of the First
Handover
c. During this maintenance period, the Contractor is required to resolve any damages that
will occur in the absence of additional charges
d. During this maintenance period, all completed installations are still the sole responsibility
of the Contractor
e. During this maintenance period, if the Contractor does not carry out a reprimand from
the Construction Management/ Board of Directors for any necessary repairs/
replacements/ adjustments, the Construction Management/ Board of Directors as the
Owner shall be entitled to transfer the repair/ replacement/ adjustment to the other
Contractor at the cost of the Contractor of this installation
f. During this maintenance period, the installation Contractor shall train the designated
personnel of the Construction Management/ Board of Directors so as to recognize the
installation system and may perform maintenance
g. The First Handover from this installation can only be executed after there is evidence of
the inspection with good results signed by the Contractor, the Construction Management/
Board of Directors and attached with the License of Usage from the Occupational Safety
Bureau
h. The handover after the maintenance period of this installation can only be implemented
after:
1) Minutes of the second handover which states that this installation is in good
condition, signed with the Contractor and the Construction Management/ Board of
Directors
2) The Contractor has submitted all the License of Usage from the authorized
Government Agency, such as the Occupational Safety Institution and others, until the
installed installation can be used without violating the relevant agency's regulations
3) All installation drawings which is installed together with operating, instruction, and
technical maintenance manual in 6 (six) sets including 1 (one) original set have been
submitted to the Construction Management/ Board of Directors.
7. Reports
a. Daily and Weekly Reports

1) The Contractor shall make daily reports and weekly reports providing an
overview of :
a) Physical activity
b) Records and Orders of the Construction Management/ Board of Directors as the
Assignment Provider delivered orally or in written
c) Amount of the materials entry/ rejected
d) Amount of labors
e) Weather conditions, and
f) Addition/ Reduces Works.
2) The weekly report is a summary of the daily reports and after being signed by the
Project Manager must be submitted to the Construction Management/ Board of
Directors as the Assignment Giver to be known / approved.
b. Testing Report
1) The Contractor shall submit to the Construction Management/ Board of Directors as
the Assignmenter a written report on the following matters :
a) Test results of all operating requirements of the installation
b) Equipment testing results
c) Cable test results
d) And others.
2) All tests and measurements to be performed must be witnessed by the Planner /
Construction Management/ Board of Directors.
8. The Responsibility in Charge of The Implementation
a. The Contractor shall place an expert and experienced executive in charge who shall
remain in the project site, act as a representative of the Contractor and having the ability
to provide technical and responsible decisions in accepting any instructions to be given by
the Construction Management/ Board of Directors
b. The aforementioned responsible person must also be in the project site when required /
desired by the Construction Management/ Board of Directors.
9. Addition/ Reduction/ Changes of The Installation
a. Implementation of an installation deviating from the plan adjusted to the conditions of

the project site, shall have prior written approval from the Planning Consultant and the
Construction Management/ Board of Directors
b. The Contractor shall submit any drawings changes to the Construction Management/
Board of Directors as the assignor in 3 (three) copies.
c. Material change, etc., must be submitted by Contractor to the Construction

Management/ Board of Directors in written, and
d. Addition/ Reduces/ Existing Works changes must be approved by the Construction
Management/ Board of Directors in written.
10. Permits - Licenses
Arrangement of the necessary permits for the implementation of this installation and all the
expenses required responsibility of the Contractor.
11. Chiseling, Welding and Drilling
a. Chiseling for installment in accordance to it needs, whether wall, floor or else in necessary
to the installation implementation and to restore its original condition, is the Contractor
scope of works
b. Chiseling/ welding/ drilling for installment on the wall nor the floor can only be
implemented if there is consent of the Board of Directors/ Construction Management in
written.
12. Routine and Special Inspection
a. Routine and regular inspection should be carried out by the Installation Contractor
periodically and not less then every 2 (two) weeks
b. Special inspection should be carried out by the Installation Contractor, if there is a request
from the Board of Directors/ Construction Management.
13. Project Site Minutes of Meeting
Contractor reperesentatives should always be present in every project site minutes of

meeting which arrange by the Board of Directors/ Construction Management.
Article 2 Electrical Installation System
1. General Terms
The mechanical work in question is water, air and equipment installation which includes the
provision and installation.
2. Scope of Works
a. Clean Water Installation

1) Water supply obtained from Deep Well with 65 mm diameter pipe directly entered
through the Filter Unit
2) From ground water tank, the water is pumped to the roof tank air di pompakan ke
roof tank melalui elevated water pump dan dari roof tank is channeled to the sanitary
channel with gravity. For the higher ground/ floor use a booster pump
3) The main pipe of the pump according to the shop drawings and the whole distribution
of clean water is equipped with valve (control, gate, check valve and others) in
accordance with the standards required.
b. Used Water, Sewerage, Air Pipes and Rain Installation :

1) Sewerage, WC, Urinoir, and Used Water from floor drain/ sink is channeled to Sewage
Treatment Plan
2) The drainage network inside the building is equipped with air pipe (vent)
3) All plumbing and drainage installations shall be carried out in accordance with the
shop drawings and requirements/ regulations applicable either technically, licensing
or administration.
c. Sanitary Fixtures
Brand and Type of this equipment must comply with the stipulated requirements.
d. The Mian Pipe

1) All pipes in both clean water and sewage pipes enter the provided Shaft, placement of
the pipes adjusted to Shaft conditions so to facilitate the installation and repair when
there is something or to be change
2) The pipes in the Shaft, should be given a booster, support and access door for
maintenance
3) Pipe hanger must be installed firmly on the Network of Clean Water Installation,
Wastewater, Air Pipe and the Flat Duct
4) Pipe on the Floor Clean Out, Water Closet, Floor Drain and Sanitary Equipment should
be installed on a strong hanger.
3. Controling
a. Contractor required :
1) Sending the samples of materials to be used in complete
2) Submit brochures and detailed drawings of equipment to be used prior to installation
for approval by the Board of Directors/ Construction Management/ supervisor.
3) Provide good equipment for implementation such as water fitting, water pump, pipe
cutter and others.
b. If so the Board of Directors/ Construction Management doubt about the quality of certain
materials or equipment, the material will be sent to the Laboratory of Quality of Goods
Investigation at the Contractor's expense, and / or if the quality of the materials /
equipment is not in accordance with the required materials, need to be change
immediately.
c. Substances deemed unfavorable by the Board of Directors / Construction Management,

the Contractor shall dispose of the material off the project site within 1 x 24 hours, since
the denial sign is decided.
a. The contractor is obliged to make a detailed drawing (Shop Drawing) for the
implementation of the works. This image should be approved by the Board of Directors/
b. As Built Drawing & details for all works should always be in the project site every time.
The picture is clear, readable and shows recent changes
c. The size of the item and its parts, all of everything are listed in the As Built Drawings and
details. The size is an effective/ clean size, or size in the finished state, therefore in the
execution or ordering the measures must be taken into account
d. The Contractor is required to create the As Built Drawing Installation was Installed. This As
Built Drawing must be approved by the Construction Management/ Supervisor, prior to
the Handover.
a. All work must be done well by experts and skilled. For specific implementation, the
Contractor shall provide a proof declaration that the executor does have the necessary
experience and skills as required
b. Prior to carrying out the Installation Work, the Contractor is required to ensure the path
and position of the Electrical Installation, Ground System, Water and Sanitary which have
to do with this Mechanical Works, in the form of shop-drawing
c. If in the implementation of the work there is one part of installation that is difficult to
implement, the Contractor must make a written report and it is immediately discussed
with the Board of Directors/ Construction Management
d. The work may be deemed completed and accepted if it has been tested, and expressed
either in writing by the Board of Directors/ Construction Management
e. Because this work revolves, so first thing, there is a demolition work, then do the
installation in accordance with the shop drawing that has been approved.
6. Water Supply Installation Works
a. Materials
1) The type of pipe used is Galvanized Iron Pipe (GIP) medium class and must meet the
requirements of Standard BS 1387 stated with the test certificate
2) The defective pipe will be rejected
3) The fittings and other equipment materials shall be similar to the pipes and in
accordance with the standard ANSI B 16,19, Ansi B 16,3.
4) Valve diameter smaller or equal to 2" is made of copper with screw joint system,
for 2 1/2" diameter and bigger, the material is made of cast iron, With a Flanged
Suction, Flanged-end connection system.
b. Implementation
1) Pipe connection is used threaded, flange or victaulic connections according to each

size. Threaded connections must be coated with red lead cement first
2) In special sections, welded flanged connections are used, in which the connection
using this flange needs to be equipped with a Ring Type Gasket to ensure the density
and strength of the connection
3) All the last end that is not continued should be closed with cover lid or blind-flanged
4) The pipes shall be hung, the vertical pipe in the Shaft shall be clamped at a distance
every 2 m also on each branching and bend. The landfill covered of these pipes is
done after the good test results and approved by the supervisor
5) All well visible or planted pipes are required to be protected with Lead Primer, for soil
implantation coated with a good quality Water Proofing protective. Water Proofing
work should be done as well as possible, so that no part of pipe surfaces and fittings
are not exposed to Water Proofing
6) The pipe that crosses the road must be protected by concrete/ tile and covered with
sand. The depth of the pipe is at least 80 cm from the bottom surface of the stone
pavement foundation
7) The distribution pipes prior to being connected to the fixtures shall be tested with a
Hydrostatic pressure test of one and half times of the Working Pressure wherein a
minimum of 1 x 24 hours (or adjusted to the Board of Directors/ Construction
Management instructions) shall not pressure decreasing/ leak
8) Installation which with poor test results, immediately fixed. The testing costs, the
necessary equipment and the cost of repairs are borne by the Contractor
9) Pipes that penetrate the floor, concrete walls must be made sleeve/ sparing of PVC
pipe and given a seal
10) The pipes above the ceiling, the shafts and on the visible places must be painted
(sewarage pipes painted black, the air pipes painted gray, the water supply pipes
painted blue, the rain gutters painted as same as the wall color (no air pipe) with
good and proper paint
11) Before the water being in used, the water in the pipe need to be removed, then the
piping system filled with 50 mg/1 chlor solution and stays for 24 hours. After that 24
hours, rinsed the piping system with clean water.
7. Wastewater, Sewarage, Rain and Air Pipes Installation Inside The Building
a. Materials
1) The type of material used to distribute wastewater, sewage, rain and air vent pipes in
the building (above ground installation) using PVC materials. For kitchen installation
under the floor using cost iron materials
2
2) Sewage, wastewater pipes used PVC 10 kg/cm Class (AW). JIS K.6742-1979 Standard
and 4 floor down below using CIP schedule 40
2
3) Air vent pipes using PVC 10 Kg/Cm class (AW)
4) Rain riser pipes should use CIP pipe shedule 40 with a good coopling connection
5) PVC pipe connection is done with good quality Solvent Cement. Before connecting the
pipe, the part to be spliced must first be cleaned, free of dirt, water and others.
Solvent Cement should be evenly spread distributed on the part of the surface to be
connected
6) Air vent pipes at the end of the shaft must be removed from the building to run
perfectly and will not cause air polution in the warehouse.
b. The Implementation
1) On the ground floor of upright gutter pipe should be given a strong seated bearing
2) Connections between PVC pipes are given a good quality Solvent Cement approved by
the Supervisor
3) If there is a connecting between the PVC and the CIP pipe or metal fitting, then use a
threaded or flange connection with fittings such as elbow faucet, socket valve, socket
faucet, etc. and the connection is given a special glue
4) All ends of the last pipe or fittings, which are discontinued must be covered with a cap
or plug, with the same material
5) Pipes prior to splicing should be tested against leaks, this should be done before the
finishing work begin
6) PVC pipes for wastewater and sewage embedded in the ground, at any distance of
3 m shall be given a concrete bearing foundation of 1 PC + 3 sands + 5 gravel, this
foundation is also installed on the pipe and branching connection
7) Upright pipe (riser) shall be provided with concrete pads foundation at the section
connection between the upright and flat pipe on the ground floor
8) In principle the testing is done in a part by part with a maximum length of 50 m, in
which case the location of each toilet needs to be considered
9) In addition to the following conditions, all the Piping Installation Works for sewarage
wastewater, rain and air vent pipes shall comply with the following conditions :
 Placement of the pipes on the walls should be covered by finishing works
according to the as built drawings
 The pipes must be installed so that no rotten air comes out, and no air cavities, it
must be straight. For horizontal pipes must be made at least 1% (one percent)
slope
 Any directional branching is made with Y (wai) or TY (tiwai) sanitary and fitted
with a clean out hole, unless otherwise specified to the as built drawing
 At the end of the dead end is equipped with a cleanser (clean out), and required
the holes examiner (control tub)
 To avoid indoor fouling, ventilation pits, which are installed at the disposal of
sewarage and wastewater in certain places (see figure in as built drawing)
 At the end of the mains sewarage pipes, inside the shaft are combined into a
single vent pipe to the roof with a 3" diameter (or as the as built drawing )
 Ends of pipes and holes should be covered with cap/ plug during installation, this
to prevent dirt/ insects into the pipe
 PVC pipes in the ground crossing the road should be protected with medium
grade BSP metal pipes, at any distance of 3 m and at both ends of the iron pipe
bearing with concrete pads.
8. Wastewater, Sewarage, Rain and Air Pipes Installation Outside The Building
a. Rain Drainage Channel
1) Channels passing through the roads or parking areas are made of cast iron or
concrete with permitted structural requirements
2) Rain drainage and other drainage must be observed at least 1% (one percent) scope
of the drainage channel to the city channel.
b. Control Tub
The Control Tub located on the street or in the parking lot are constructed of concrete
with an aperture in accordance with the as built drawings, complemented by cap of cast
steel that can be easily opened.
9. Under Ground Pipelines and Sewarage Installation Works
a. Cut and Fill/ Soil Excavation
1) Cut and Fill/ Soil Excavation implemented for :

a) All pipes and drainage channel installation
b) All the building parts that enter into the ground such as the control tubs, septic
tank and so forth.
2) The guidelines used for the excavation are measured from the top of the pipe to the
road surface or asphalt ground plus the thick layer of sand under the pipe. The
excavation is declared completed after inspection and approved by the Supervisor
3) The things that arise in the execution (land slump and others) are the responsibility of
the Contractor and are included in the bid price, the Board of Directors/ Construction
Management as the Owner does not accept any claim / claim against what so ever
4) Ground excavation for gutter, pipes installation and its equipment shall be followed
by immediate backfilling, in accordance to what described in the following chapters of
the plan and these terms
5) Basically the excavation works of this land should follow the provisions that have
been determined.
b. Landfill/ Backfill
1) The landfil/ backfill must be in accordance with the conditions specified

2) The pipes Installation in the soil ground shall be enclosed by sand according to the
provisions of paragraph c.2 below
3) Landfill/ backfill for pipe installation, only implemented after the sanding around the
pipe that is installed has been completed; and must request the approval of the
Supervisor prior to implementation.
c. Sandfill
1) Sandfill should meet the specified requirements

2) Sandfill should be doing from the right side to the left and bottom with the thickness
of each radius of 10 cm, especially the pipes which across the road have to backfill it
around the pipe with 10 cm thickness and above it should be protected by concrete
slab or concrete tile.
10. Water Installation Test
a. Water Supply Installation Test
1) Water supply installation pipe ready to install completely

2) Prepare the water filler, tip cap, mechanical pump and pressure gauge
3) Connect between the pipes from, and to the building installation input pipe, the test
is carried out in a manner part by part of the maximum length of 50 meters
4) Upon completion of the connection between the building pipes installation and the
2
pressure pump equipment which can reach 10 kg/cm , the pipe faucet corresponding
to the installation of all positions is closed with plugs according to faucet dimensions
5) Installation pipes ready to be tested, the pressure pump is run up to 1.5 times of the
running pressure for 2 x 24 hours
6) For pressure checks can be made a list, in this list contained hourly pressure as well as
weather conditions when the pipe test is done.
b. Wastewater, Sewarage and Rain Pipes Installation Testing
1) All pipes installation ready to be installed

2) The test is carried out by filling the pipe with water which at the other end is closed
and tied it to the balloon at a certain height, and so on part by part until connected
with the drain
3) For wastewater, water is poured from the outlet pipe of monoblock and other
sanitary equipment. The process as above is done.
4) Similarly with the test of the sewage
5) This test is done floor by floor
6) As for the rain channels installation, it can be done by filling / flushing enough water
from the top floor of the bottom end closed tightly.
c. The Water Tank and its Terms
1) The water tank with the capacity according to the drawing is made of anti-leak
reinforced concrete that is given a waterproof layer with stucco and ceramic finish in
accordance with the as built drawings
2) Consists of two chamber of clean Water separated by separating wall and pit / service
pit
3) The tub serves as a water reservoir from Deep Well
4) The water reservoir is equipped with a manhole covered with a reinforced concrete
plate, equipped with an opening and a ladder
5) Water reservoir must be tested against leakage
6) In addition to the equipment mentioned above, it is also equipped with :
a) Pipes diameter 6" in the water tank
b) Water level control ex Fanal, Omron, equivalent
c) Air release pipes diameter 4"
d) Inlet pipe of PAM (Water Supply Company) with diameter 2", equipped with Float
Valve
e) Outlet pipe, adjusted to the suction pipe of the pump
f) GIP ladder medium class diameter 1" every 30 cm
g) Measuring equipment/ monitor to determine the water level in the container
h) Air circulation ventilation.
11. Pump Machine and its Terms
a. General
The Water Pump is supply the need of clean Water, Fire extinguisher and other needs
that required for the building activities.
b. Scope of Works
The scope of this works are included of provisions, installing and testing of all water
pumps (Transfer Pump, Booster, Submersible Pump) complete with necessary equipment
and the pump panels.
c. Installation
1) Prior to the commencement of the work, the execution shall examine and considering
of other work in the project, if the performance of the work of the other party may
affect the quality and smoothness of the installation of the water pump itself. In the
event of a circumstance in which the implementer is unlikely to produce the best
quality, this exercise shall notify in written to the Board Directors/ Construction
Management and submit suggestions for changes/ improvements. If that is not done,
then the implementer shall remain liable for any losses that may arise
2) The pumps used should be installed as recommended by the manufacturer
3) All water pumps with their motors must be properly mounted before they start
4) The pump is mounted on the concrete foundation according to the shop drawing. The
weight of the foundation is at least 2 times the weight of the pump. Vibration/
Damper insulation is installed between the base plate of the pump and the concrete
foundation.
5) The construction of a concrete foundation is adjusted to the base plate of the pump
to be installed and approved by the Board of Directors/ Construction Management, so
that the bolts that planted on the concrete foundation correspond to the bolt hole on
the base plate
6) All bolts and clamps shall be embedded in the foundation or elsewhere appropriately,
and for which the implementer shall provide clear information to the Board of
Directors/ Construction Management.
d. Testing
1) Prior to the First Handover of the work, the contractor shall perform tests on the
pump along with the installation and other accessories as one of the requirements
that must be met. These tests should be witnessed by the Board of Directors/
2) The final test of the pump and its installation shall produce the capacity and head
according to the specification that specified. Executors are required to provide testing
facilities.
e. Pump Working System
1) Deep Well Pump for Ground Tank filler Working System
The pump works automatically (using Electrode Level Control), when the water level
in the bottom tank is minimum, the pump works and when the water level in the
bottom tank is maximum, the pump stops working.
2) Transfer Pump System

 The Pump can runs automatically and manually
 Transfer Pump works to transfer water from the tank (GWT) to the tank
 The Pump works manually where the pump can be switched off and turned on
under all conditions without being affected by the water level in the upper and
lower tanks.
3) Submersible Pump System

 The Pump can runs automatically and manually
 The Pump should be able work automatically (using Electrode Level Control),
Where the water level in the sump tank is maximum, the pump works and when
the water level in the sump tank is minimum, the pump stop
 The Pump work manually where the pump can be switch off and turned on under
all condition without being affected by the water level in the sump tank.
4) Booster Pump (packaged)
1 (one) set of Booster Pump & Pressure Tank with capacity as per requirement,
completely installed with pressure control switch. The pump runs automatically based
on the pressure.
f. Products
1) Materials and equipment must meet the specifications of the contractor and may be
propose alternatives equivalent to the specifications of the Board of Directors/
2) The new Contractor may do the changes if it has received approval and signature
from the Board of Directors/ Construction Management
3) Materials and Equipments products are as follows :
Article 3 Sewage Treatment Plant (STP) System
1. Preliminary
a. Standards/ Rules and References :

1) National Plumbing Code
2) Planning and Maintenance of the Plumbing System (Soufyan & Morimura)
3) Wastewater Engineering : Treatment, Disposal & Reeuse (Metcalf & Eddy)
4) Regulation of Minister of Health Republic of Indonesia No. 173/Menkes/Per/VII/77,
TH.1997
5) Minister of KLH (Forestry and Environment) Decree Kep-03/Men.KLH/VI/1993.
b. Planning Criterias
In this planning, the preparation of data planning based on general data in Hospital as
well as the requirements prevailing.
c. Wastewater Treatment
1) The calculation of wastewater treatment load based on the amount of wastewater
generated by 90% of the clean water requirement for one day or STP capacity =
3
15 m /day
2) Estimated quality of wastewater :
Before processing :
 PH : 6,5 ~ 8,6
 BOD S : 350 ppm
 COD : 700 ppm
 Suspended Solid : 250 ppm
After Processing :
 PH : 6,5 ~ 8,5
 BOD S : ≤ 20 ppm
 COD : ≤ 40 ppm
 Suspended Solid : ≤ 30 ppm
d. Description of The Treatment Processing

1) Wastewater Treatment Plant (WWTP) aims to treat wastewater containing pollutants
which are expressed in loads of BOD and COD TSS and others. However, the
commonly used parameters are BOD, COD and TSS. This wastewater comes from all
existing activities and goes into the disposal network. This wastewater does not meet
the standard of water quality standard specified by authorized institution such as
ministerial decree of KL-Kep-03 / men. KLH / VI / 1993. So waste water that has not
been eligible should not be disposed of into public channels because it is expected to
pollute the environment
2) In the terms of IPAL/ WWTP, at first the wastewater passes through the screening.
Screening or filtering aims to filter out large rough suspended particles (larger than 1
cm) carried in the wastewater in order not to enter into WWTP. Wastewater is then
fed into Equalization Tub
3) Equalization Tub serves as a reservoir of incoming wastewater fluctuations and
containers of various characteristics/ properties of different wastewater such as high
PH of laundry. Fat from kitchen or bathroom. With the equalization of wastewater
weights can be homogenized (equalized) both in quality and quantity, so that the
system can run efficiently and optimally
4) From the tub of equalization the wastewater is pumped towards a Clarifier Tank that
aims to precipitate unfiltered solids on the screen. From this clarifier the waste is
visually cleaner but the pollutant load is still above the threshold, like BOD, COD etc.
Still almost the same as when the waste water comes in. From this clarifier the water
then goes into the Bioreactor
5) FBK-Bioreactor is an aerobic wastewater treatment system using Fixed Bed Cascade
System which is a patent from Germany. This system is a water treatment technology
from Germany because this system has a unique in the flow of water and the design
of bacterial homes. This system consists of a reactor and in it there are elements of
Fixed Bed or Film Media that serves as a micro organisms breeding ground. With this
system the film-forming micro organisms will stick on it, grows and expand on the
surface of the element. With this media, micro organisms can be grown with a broad
spectrum such as lipotric bacteria for fat eaters, proteolotic for protein eaters,
detergent-eating bacteria, color bacteria and so forth. In this system aeration is
needed because the micro organisms used are aerobic micro organisms
6) In the Bioreaktor, wastewater is processed in aerobic manner with high efficiency.
BOD and COD contained in wastewater with a decrease of 90 – 98 %. From the
bioreactor, the wastewater that comes out has met the quality standards in terms of
BOD and COD but sometimes still seen solids that carry and still need disinfection.
Thus continuation of processes such as advanced precipitation processes (in tank
polishing) and chlorination is still required. Wastewater that has been processed in an
overflow will flow to the polishing tank
7) Polishing tank serves to precipitate the solid or particles coming out of the Bioreactor.
From Bioreactor tank, water is pumped into mixed filter media, clean water from
mixed filter media then goes into water treatment tank and water coming out from
treated water tank already fulfill requirement determined by KPPL like BOD, COD oil
etc. This water is feasible/ allow to disposed into public channels.
e. Scope Works
1) Preparation, adjustment, tank/ tub treatment processing
2) Procurement and water pipes installation in the treatment processing tank/ tub
3) Procurement and water pipes installation that have been processed from the STP to
the channels
4) Procurement and installation of STP equipment
5) Conduct testing of the equipment, systems and providing the materials for testing
6) Monitoring the quality and the quality of all the water that treated
7) Take the responsible of the processing until perfection occurs.
2. STP Installation
a. Materials
1) Sewage Treatment Plant concists of tanks and equipment as follows :
a) STP Tank
Concists of :
 Anaerobik Contact Media

 Anaerobik Contact Media (BIO MEDIA )
 Non Clogging Difuser
 Desinfection Box
 Chlorine Set
 Manholes diameter 450
 Control Panel
 Blower
 Equalization Blower
 Aeration Blower
 Backwash Blower.
b) Discharge Pump Equipment
Concist of :
 Submersible Offluent Pump 2 (two) units

 Float Switch 3 (three) sets
 Control Panel.
2) All materials such as Treatment Tank/ Tub, Pumps, Pipes Stirrer and equipment
contained in the treatment tank should made of chemically, (acid, alkali) and
corrosion resistant materials on the outside an the inside of it.
3) Pipe Material made of = Hot Dip Galvanized.
b. Contractor Requirements
1) Contractor or Sub Contractor which performing this work shall be specialized in the
manufacture of the Sewage Treatment Plant and the sole agent of the such
equipment
2) Contractor or Sub Contractor shall perform and maintain the necesarry permits for
the execution of the work on their responsibility and costs
3) Contractor or Sub Contractor shall have a special business license for such work
4) Coordinates with other parties.
3. Implementation
a. PLanning
1) Implementation before carrying out the work must make shop drawings due to
changes/ proposals from the original drawing plan and the shop drawing must be
submitted to the Board of Directors/ Construction Management for approval
2) Before commencing the work, the Contractor shall examine and understand the
implementation of the work of the other party/ other discipline included in the
execution of this project. If the work of the other party may affect the quality and
smoothness of the construction work of the installation of the Sewage Treatment
Plant, so that the implementation is not possible to produce the best work, the
Contractor shall notify in written to the Board of Directors/ Construction
Management, and propose the changes/ improvements if this is not Done, the
Contractor or Sub Contractor remains responsible for any losses that may be incurred
3) Contractor or Sub Contractor prior to implementing the equipment installation,
should submit :
a) Technical specification brochures
b) Characteristic graphics
c) Performance dan manufacturer
d) Maintenance and Operation Manuals
e) A statement that the equipment is in a new state (Brand New)
b. Installation
1) Prior to carrying out the work should draw a shop drawing for approval from the
2) After the shop drawing are approved by the Board of Directors/ Construction
Management, so the Contractor/ Sub Contractor may perform the work
implementation
3) Processing treatment equipment and pumps, blowers installed as recommended by
the manufacturer
4) All processing equipment and pump must be carefuly aligned before start
5) Equipment, pumps and blowers mounted on the foundation according to the shop
drawings, the minimum weight of the foundation shall be 2 x from the weight of the
equipment to be installed
6) All binding bolts and clamp should be installed properly, correctly and appropriately.
c. Testing
1) Prior to the initial assignment of the main work, the contractor shall perform tests on
the equipment and its installations and systems. These tests should be witnessed by
the Board of Directors/ Construction Management
2) The final test of the equipment and its installation and the system shall produce in
accordance with the specifications and specified requirements
3) The Contractor/ Sub Contractor shall provide the testing materials as dependent of
the Contractor/ Sub Contractor.
d. As Built Drawings
1) The Contractor shall make a carefull of the implementation and adjustment on the
project site such notes and records shall be poured in a complete set of the drawing
as the drawing according to the implementation (as built drawings)
2) As Built Drawing should submitted immediately to the Board of Directors/
Construction Management after the work is complete as many as 5 (five) set.
e. Warranty
1) The Contractor/ Sub Contractor must submit “After Sales Service” warranty for
equipment installed from a sigle agent or a distributor appointed by the manufacturer
and mus br domiciled in Indonesia
2) The Contractor Kontraktor bertanggung jawab penuh terhadap pelaksanaan “After
Sales service” yang disebutkan diatas
f. Spare Part
1) The Contractors must submit to the Board of Directors/ Construction Management
spare part that need to be provided for 1 (one) year
2) The Contractor should submit the complete standard tools for each equipment unit.
g. Training
The Contractor/ Sub Contractor must provide training for operator includes :
1) The Equipment operating system
2) The Equipment maintenaces
3) Handling and taking action in case of jams and adhesives that have been processed.
h. Equipment Specifications
1) Submersible pump should be submersible corrosion resistant
2) Automatic screen should be non elogged made of stainless steel (SS304)
3) Bioreactor shoul be in a purpose and good
4) Air blower should be free maintenance type
5) Polishing tank material PVC
6) Dosing pump c/w chlorine tank
7) Main control panel free standby outdoor c/w alarm monitoring
8) All the plumbing installations using PVC with AW class and medium class galvanized.
Article 4 Fire Extinguisher System
1. General Terms
a. The work in question is about the implementation of procurement, installation and

setting of FIRE PROTECTION INSTALLATION which consists of Fire Hydrant, Fire
Extinguisher and Fire Alarm installations
b. All the works must be done well by people with skilled. For specific implementation the
Contractor shall provide a declaration proving that the executor does have such
experience and expertise
c. All goods and tools/ equipment used for the installation must be new and meet the
specified requirements. If the goods and tools/ equipment are not specified in the Work
Plan and Conditions then the tools/ equipment must be used the normal tools/
equipment
d. Following the terms of the plumbing installation work
e. During the work the Contractor must return to its original state, for example when there
is wall, floor and so on. This amendment is only implemented after obtaining written
permission from the Board of Directors/ Construction Management
f. The provision of sleeves/ sparing materials and its installing should be the responsibility of
the contractor.
2. Brief Description of The Scope of Works
This brief description of the scope of works of the fire extinguisher system are as follows :
a. Electrical drive Fire Pump

b. Diesel propulsion Fire Pump
c. Valve Connection to main Water supply source
d. Fire Water Tank equipment
e. Hydrant Box
f. Pillar Hydrant and Outdoor Hydrant Box
g. Connection to the City Fire Brigade (Siamesse Connection)
h. Light weight Fire Extinguisher (PAR/PEE)
i. Electrical affiliated connection system (eg. panel)
j. Other related works system (eg. foundation, painting, block concrete)
k. Electrical Panel, eg. electrical system dan Fire Resistence Cable
l. Fire Pump test venturi flow tube.
3. Materials
a. Fire Extinguisher Water Tank (Ground Water Tank)

1) Ground Water tank serves to provide water with a certain volume at any time
whenever needed. Ground Water Tank is the work of other party.
2) Ground Water Tank should constructed with the following hygienic construction
such as :
a) Creating insulator, so will resulting a water flows
b) Eliminated a sharp corners
c) Create a draining basin at the bottom of the tank
d) Prevent ground soil water entering the tank
e) Make the surface of the walls slippery and clean
f) Make a manhole with water tight construction
g) Make water resistance sleeve (Water proofing).
3) Ground Water Tank shall be made in two parts minimum to enable for drainage and
reparation.
4) Ground Water Tank will be made from waterproof concrete construction and it is the
works of other party.
5) Suction Pit. To minimized the volume of unflow water (water stop) in the suction pipe
pump, it must be made Suction Pit with 1000 mm width and 750 mm depth for each
tank.
6) Ground Water Tank should have these following equipment :
 Manhole
 Monkey ladder
 Vent Pipe Connector and to the outside vent
 Evaporator pipe
 Water Level Indicator
 Sleeve for inlet pipe, suction pipe, drainage pipe, power cable and so on
 Exhaust Fan.
7) Ground Water Tank water filler. In case of fire, the Ground Water Tank must be filled
quickly from several water sources and from any water supply could provides.
8) If the water level in the Ground Water Tank has risen to reach the H threshold, the
filled water must stop, in otherwise if the water drop until it reaches L, then the
Ground Water Tank must be filled.
b. Fire Extinguisher Pump

1) The Fire Extinguisher Pump must capable to supply the need of water for fire
extinguisher to the maximum extent of pumping capability at any time automatically.
2) The Fire Extinguisher Pump shall concists of one or more Main Pumps and one Jockey
Pump, for the main Pump can used Horizontal Split Case type or Centrifugal End
Suction type and Vertikal Multi Stages type for the Jockey Pump with flanged
connection and the following components such :
 Cast iron casing
 Bronze impeller
 Heavy duty steel shaft
 Mechanical seal
 Heavy duty grease lubricated bearings.
3) The Pump Motor must get the power source from PLN and Generator Set in
automatically.
4) Power source from PLN must be taken from Special Switch before the Main Switch.
5) The Fire Extinguisher Pump shall concists of the following equipment such as :
 Jockey Pump with motor
 Main Pump with motor
 Inlet and Outlet Header
 Inlet and Outlet Valves
 Check Valve against Water Hammer
 Inlet Strainers
 Power and Control Panels
 Fow Regulator
 Pressure Switch
 Pressure Gauge
 Hydraulic Connections
 Electric Connections
 Best frame
 Announciating Pump Status:
o Jockey Pump On, Indicating Lamp
o Main Pump On, Alarm Horn & Indicating Lamp
o Water Level Drop, Alarm Horn & Indicating Lamp
o Water Level too Low, Alarm Horn & Indicating Lamp.
6) The setting of the Fire Extinguisher Pump are as follows :

 If the water pressure in the down range is caused by leakage, sprinkler test or
flushing sprinkler test, until a predetermined threshold the Jockey Pump will start
and will stop automatically at the boundary of the determined pressure limit
 If the water pressure in the tissue continues to fall due to the opening of one or
more Hydrant Valves or the operation of several Sprinkler Heads, one or two
Main Pump start until stop manually by the operator when it on test or Fire
Extinguisher has been completed
 Standard Pump and Control Panel should be NFPA 20 Approve.
7) Engine Driven Fire Pump

 Engine Driven Fire Pump serves to supply the needs of fire extinguishers when the
electric pump fails or more water is needed for extinguishers
 Engine Driven Fire Pump should be tested at least once a week for an hour
 Engine Driven Fire Pump should be a specially designed package for firefighting
purposes, which among others consists of :
o Centrifugal Fire Pump
o Gasoline or Diesel Engine
o Starting device with Pully or Motor Starter
o Battery Starter and Outside Battery Charger
o Engine Speed Control Device
o Fuel Oil Tank
o Hydraulic Connections
o Electric Connections
o Control Board
o Instrumentations.
8) Branch Control Valve Set

 Branch Control Valve Set must be installed as shown in the shop drawing
 Branch Control Valve Set must be able to provide electrical signals to the alarm
control system in case of a water flow equal of one sprinkler head
 Branch Control Valve Set shall consist of the following equipment such as :
o Branch Stop Valve Lockable
o Flow Switch, Calibrated
o Test Valve Lockable
o Drain Valve Lockable.
c. Hydrant Box
Indoor Hydrant Box (Class III NFPA) shall concists of the following equipment :
1) Steel Box outdoor type, size 750 mm, 1500 mm & 250 mm painted red and White in
the words “HYDRANT” on the open-closed lid 180 mm and equipped with stopper
2) The brand for refernion is ITACHIBORI No.B-8
3) Hose rack for 40 mm hose, chromium plated bronzed with number of the reels
adjusted to box width
4) Hydrant valve chromium plated 40 mm and 65 mm connector and the valve shapes
adjusted to the position of the pipe
5) “JET” Firehose A-one type size 40 mm x 30 meter including couplings
6) Hydrant nozzle variable spray type size 40 mm.
d. Pillar Hydrant
Pillar hydrant used here is two way shart type with main valve and branch valves size 100
x 65 x 65 mm. This type of coupling should be tailored to the model used by the City Fire
Department Service Car. Each pillar hydrant must be equipped with a gate valve for easy
maintenance.
e. Fire Bridge Connection

1) Fire bridge connection which is used here is two way siamesse connection for free
standing installation with the size 100 x 65 x 65 mm
2) Siamesse connection made of bronze complete with built-in check valve and outlet
coupling in accordance with the standard used by the City Fire Department.
f. Light Weight Fire Extinguisher (PAR/ PFE)

1) PAR is provided as an initial outage facility that any building occupant may perform
2) For general area in the building provided 1 piece of PAR dry powder type with
capacity of at least 3 kg per area of 100 m2
3) For engine room provided 1 piece of PAR CO2 type with capacity 5 kg per area of
100 m2.
4. Tools/ Equipment Schedule of Fire Extinguisher
a. Electrically Powered Fire Pump
Capacity : 500 GPM

Head : 7 bar
Type : Horizontal Split Case
Impeller : Bronze
Packing : Mechanical Seal
Shaft : Steel (SAE 1045)
Bearing : Steel Ball Bearing Self Lubricated
Couple : Direct Couple
Sincronous Speed : 2900 rpm
Feed Voltage : 220 / 380 V / 3 phase / 50 Hz
Standard Motor : NEMA Standard
Rotor : Squirel Cage
Protection Class : IP 44
Insulation Class : F
Pump Power : 35 kW
Operational System : Automatic Pressure Switch Starter
Manual Stop : by The Operator
Amount : 1 unit
Pump Standard : UL / FM Standard
Pump Equipment :
o Suction Pipe and Pressure Pipe with rigid and flexible connection with
victaulic coupling as the UL / FM standard
o Manometer Suction and Pressure
o Pressure Switch
o Panel Control Pump (UL / FM Standard)
o Relief Valve Automatic Flow.
b. Jockey Pump
Capacity : 25 GPM
Head : 8 bar
Type : Vertical Multi Stage Centrifugal pump
Impeller : Cast Bronze
Packing/ Seal : Mechanical Seal
Shaft : SS 304
Bearing : Sealled Ball Bearing
Couple : Direct Couple

Sincronous speed : 2900 rpm
Feed voltage : 220 / 380 V / 3 phase / 50 Hz
Rotor : Squirel cage
Protection class : IP 44
Insulation class : F
Pump power : 7.5 kW
Operational System : Automatic pressure switch starter
Amount : 1 unit
Pump Standard : UL / FM Standard
Pump equipment :
o Suction Pipe and Pressure Pipe with rigid and flexible connection with
victaulic
o Manometer Suction and Pressure.
c. Pressure Tank
Capacity : 500 liter

Maximum Pressure : 6,5 bar
Pressure Test : 7,5 bar
Model : Cylinder Vertical
Manufacture : Lowara, Daab, Stork
Type : Membrane.
d. Pillar Hydrant with Main Valve

 Size : 65 x 65 x 100 mm
 Connection Type : Machino coupling.
e. Outdoor Hydrant Box
Size : 950 x 660 x 200 mm

Material : Mild steel ukuran 1,8 mm
Equipment : - Linen Hose dia. 65 mm x 30 mm
- Machino Coupling dia. 65 mm
- Variable Jet & Spray Nozzle dia. 40 mm
- Hose rack.
f. Indoor Hydrant Box
Size : 1300 x 750 x 200 mm

Material : Mild steel ukuran 1,8 mm
Equipment : - Linen Hose dia. 65 mm x 30 mm
- Machino Coupling dia. 65 mm

- Variable Jet & Spray Nozzle dia. 40 mm
- Hose rack.
g. Siamesse Connection
Size : 100 x 65 x 65 mm
Type : Free standing type with chromium plated finish or cast Iron free
standing type with anti-rust coating
Connection : The Coupling type mustbe adjusted to teh local Fire Service
Department
Equipment : - Stop valve
- Control Tub and cover lid.
h. Light Weight Fire Extinguisher (PAR / PEE)

1) Capacity 3 kg
 Type : Portable
 Contain : Dry powder multi purpose
2) Capacity 5 kg
 Type : Portable
 Contain : CO2
3) Capacity 25 kg
 Type : Portable
 Contain : CO2
i. Sprinkler Type : Up right & Pendant

j. Hydrant Valve Size : 1½” & 2½”
k. Main Control Valve Size : 4“, 6” & 8”
l. Spray Nozzle Size : 1½” & 2½”
m. Hose
n. Pressure Switch
o. Pressure Gauge.
5. Fire Extinguisher Products
6. Installment
a. General Terms
1) Implementation Procedures stipulated in the development regulations that must be

adhered to, among others are Public Service Fire Department, NFPA, UL, FM, unless
canceled by the Technical Terms of Mechanical Work
2) Contractor are required to :

a) Sending material samples to be used
b) Submit shop drawing which approved by the Board of Director/ Construction
Management
c) Submit brochures and detailed drawing of the equipment that will be used prior
to ordering approved by the Board of Director/ Construction Management
d) Provide good equipment for implementation such as water pass, water pump,
pipe cutters, pipe dan tube threaders, meteran, megger test, etc.
3) If the Board of Directors doubts the quality of certain materials or equipment, then
the material will be sent to the Laboratory of Quality Inquiry of Materials at the cost
of the Contractor and the equipment shall be replaced immediately if the quality is
not specified
4) Substance of the materials which declared not specified by the Board of Director/
Construction management, should be removed from the project site within 2 (two)
days by the contractor.
b. Drawings and Images
1) The Contractor shall draw up the detailed of the shop drawing for the work
implementation and its amendments as they occur
2) Must create as built drawing which specified to the implementation installed before
the First Handover
3) Shop Drawing and as built drawing (in detailed) should always be in the project site at
all times. The drawings should be very clear, readable and shows recent changes
4) The size of the subdivision, all of which are listed in the shop drawings and details.
The size is an effective/ clean size, or size in the finished state. Therefore, in the
execution or ordering of the measures should be taken into account as an effective
measure.
c. The Work Implementation
1) Prior to carrying out the installation work, the Contractor is required to know the path
and position of the electrical installation, ground system, water and sanitation
associated with the work of this fire hazard system, in the form of shop drawing
2) If in carrying out the work there is one part of the installation that is difficult to
implement. The Contractor is obliged to make a written report and it is immediately
discussed with the Board of Directors/ Construction Management
3) The work can be completed and accepted if it has been tested and stated either in
writing by the Board of Directors/ Construction Management
4) Pipe connection is used welded joint by using good quality welding electrodes, as
approved by the Board of Directors/ Construction Management
5) In pipes connections using flanges it should be equipped with a ring gasket type to
ensure the connection to leakage
6) All well-visible or planted pipes are required to be given a lead-protection priming
layer. Ground planted pipes is required to be coated again with asphalt, and wrapped
with flax wicker asphalt layer
7) Implementation of water proofing of the pipes is done prior to installation and on the
connection installment
8) Pipes are required to be tested against leakage, prior to grond plante pipes landfill
covered. The testing must be known and approved by the Board of Directors/
9) Failed tests, including the costs and equipment required for repair shall be borne by
the Contractor
10) Before the work begins The contractor shall submit the shop drawings, lists and
brochures of the materials/ equipment to be installed
11) Electrical work for hydrant installation includes automatic pump system, such as :
 From pump and it fittings up till the pump panel installation
 The Installation can be interconnect withthe fire alarm system.
12) Pipes installation must be equipped with pipe hanging, support with a certain
distance and specified
13) The depth of the planted pipes in the soil/ ground should be calculated against the
pathway that cuts the road. The pipes that cuts the road should be planted to a
minimum depth of 1.20 meters from the road surface
14) Commissioning and testing of the installed equipment shall be carried out in order to
know that the installing of the installation and equipment is good and in propper
15) Pumps can work automatically or manually and can be turned off manually
16) Every week do the tests of automatic starting equipment of the pump, the Contractor
mounted the sign board on the pump room. The pump runs for at least 15 minutes
17) The power supplied shall ensure that the electric power required to run the pump at
all times
18) In the fire pump panels should be clearly marked with the words : "DO NOT TURN
OFF THE FIRE PUMP IN THE EVEN OF A FIRE "
19) For any purpose of repair, the fire pump electrical panel shall remain in the "ON"
position
20) A warning light that there is an electric current installed with the pump so the
operator can easily see it
21) Commissioning and testing of installed equipment shall be performed to determine
that the installment of the equipment installation is good and in propper
22) The Pump must be constructed :
Type : Centrifugal, Horizontal Split-Case

standard NFPA 20, UL, FM
Casing & Cover Shaft : Cast Iron atau Cast Steel, Stainless Steel
Impeller, sleeve : Bronze Wearing rings
Shaft seal : Mechanical seal
Power Cable : 2 source cable.
23) Pumps and the motor drive connected to the direct couple
24) The Control of all motors must be standard for fire
25) The motor drives power under 3 kW at direct start (direction line), above 3 kW shall
equipped with a star delta.
7. Fire Protection System Test
a. Hydrant Pump
1) System : Automatic/ Manual
2) Concists of 2 (two) pumps : Jockey Pump & Electric Pump
3) Jockey Pump function : To stabilize the water pressure inside the pipe
installation, due to leakage or other conditions
4) Fire Pump (electrical) : Main Pump, to overcome the fire, the power from the
integrated diesel. "Start" automatically and "stop" manually
5) The Pumps stop automatically if the reservoir is in a minimum condition (empty).
b. Test Procedure
1) Before the hydrant/ sprinkler equipment is tested, first cleaned the hydrant/ sprinkler
installation pipes/ flushed and do the leakage tested first. By filling the water into the
installation with a required mechanical pump of at least 15 kg/cm 2 and there is no
decrease for 2 x 24 hours
2) If the hydrant installation pipe is in good condition (not leaking) then the checking of
other equipment can be implemented
3) Pumps Checking
a) The pump coupling and motor from the official factory
b) Checked the clutch and pump shaft with electro motor, in the ace center or not
c) The position of the pump on the foundation must be a water pass strictly or not
and the bolts are checked for saggy or loose free
d) Manually, the pump impeller (vane), should be rotated with a light hand
e) The incoming power to the pumping terminal of the pump panel is checked,
phase by phase with a voltage of 220/380 Volts
f) After that directly electrified the pump and see the rotation of the blades of the
pump. The direction of the blades should be clockwise
g) RPM checked : runs all the pumps, closed all taps
h) Checked/ measured every phase of the amperage. RPM required for this pump in
ranges of 2800 - 3000, according to what specified
i) All taps opened slowly and checked the ampere
j) And the ampere will rise up to a maximum point (full capasity as the kilo wattage
on the electro motor)
k) After the amperage is known, checked the pressure performed of each pump.
c. Testing
 Jockey pump.
The position of the tap on the test tube is opened, the water is discharged, the
water pressure will automatically decrease, and the jockey pump works, and at
some pressure the pump will stop (here the pump is set at 16.2 kg/cm2 for ON,
while 16.5 kg/cm2 for OFF).
 Main Fire Pump

o The position of the faucet in the test tube is opened, at a pressure of 16 kg/cm 2
the electric pump will ON. The position of the faucet is closed, the pressure will
drop to 12 kg/cm2 and the Diesel Pump will ON
o On this test if the system is automatic, then the selector for the panel, switch in
the automatic position
o While for the manual system, the selector switch is in manual position
o Turning it ON or OFF by pressing the push button.
Article 5 Air Conditioning System
1. Preface
a. General
The following paragraphs describe in general the provisions that need to be followed for
all sections in connection with the installation of air systems, drawings and specifications
as complementary and equally binding.
b. Publication, Code and Standard
Publications, codes and standards applicable in Indonesia shall be used as guidelines for
installation and equipment, for the publication of codes and standards not yet present in
Indonesia, Contractor shall comply with the applicable Code or Applicable Publication
standard and shall be the latest edition such as :
1) SMACNA
2) ASHRAE – Guide and Data Book
3) NFPA – 90 A
4) ARI
5) AMCA
6) And others that applies to the equipment parts that have not been listed.
c. Planning Condition
1) External air condition
 Temperature 35 oC
 Relative Humidity 55 %
2) Interior Temperature
 Temperature 24 oC ± 2 oC
 Relative Humidity 50 % - 60 %
3) Noise Criteria
 Room/ Interior 35 - 45 NC
d. Scope of Works
This installation work includes all the work of procurement and installation of Air
Conditioning, Mechanical Ventilation including all equipment and supporting facilities, to
obtain a complete and good installation and tested carefully and ready for use.
The scope of this installation work is outlined as follows :
1) Providing and installment of all Air Conditioning equipments such as : Split Wall and
Split duct type, Fan, Thermostat, Control etc.
2) Providing and installment of all installation of refrigerant pipes, condensate pipes.
Procurement and installation of interlock of air and ventilation installation system
with the available fire alarm system
3) Providing and installment of electrical resources for this installation such as cables on
AC panel
4) Carry out the work of Testing Adjusting and Balancing of all installed installations, so
the installation works perfectly, in accordance with the design criteria
5) Procurement of installation of all necessary civil works for this installation as listed
and described in this document
6) Educate and train the officers appointed by the owner on the ways to run and
maintain this installation, so that the officer can actually run and maintain the
installation properly
7) Submit drawings, manuals on how to run and maintain as well as complete technical
data on installed installation equipment
8) Perform maintenance of this installation periodically during the maintenance period
9) Provide warranty on the machine/ equipment installed
10) Perform the work or other provisions contained in this document in an addendum.
2. Air Condition Installation Works
a. Equipment Spesifications
The main components of each Air Condition Unit should be at least :
1) Outdoor Unit :
a) Compressor
b) Air Cooled Condenser
c) Condenser Fan
d) Motor Fan
e) Auxiliary Component
2) Indoor Unit :
a) Cooling Coil
b) Cooling Coil Fan
c) Auxiliary Component
d) Air Filter
1.a. Compressor
Compressor used reciprocating compressors of hermetic or semi-hermetic types or
scroll compressor types, and must be mounted on frames using a spring vibration
isolator.
Compressor unit should be equipped with :

 Thermal & current sensitive overload divices for Compressor protection
 Valve on discharged and suction.
1.b. Condenser
Air cooled condenser from copper pipe with aluminum fins. Condensing unit cabinet
must be weatherproof made of BJLS and painted with baked enamel, with the colors
which will specified later.
1.c. Condenser Fan

The condenser fan must be propeller type and must be in balance both static and
dynamic and must be coupled directly with an electric motor. Condenser fan must be
protected by wire guard (factory standard).
1.d. Condenser Fan Motor

Fan motor condenser must :
 Totally enclosed air cooled
 Weather proof
 Bearing on electric motors are equipped with a permanent lubrication system.
2.a. Cooling Coil

 Cooling coil mounted on the indoor unit is a type of direct expansion (DX) made
of copper pipe by using aluminum fins. Expansion valve mounted on the cooling
coil distributor and expansion valve sensor bulb must be attached to the suction
line for refrigerant control
 Fan coil unit is also equipped with sight glass, solenoid valve, filter dryer and oil
trap.
2.b. Drain Pan

Drain pan mounted on indoor unit for condensate drain. Drain pan should be
isolated at the bottom to prevent condensation. Drain pan material must be made of
anti-rust material. Each in-door unit must be equipped with a drain pump.
2.c. Cooling Coil Fan

 Fan used must be centrifugal type with double inlet and already in the form of
forward curved aluminum blade. The fan wheel should be in balance both static
and dynamic
 The fan house should be made of galvanized steel. Fan must be able to overcome
the water filter, cooling coil, damper at the desired airflow capacity.
2.d. Cooling Coil Fan Motor

The motor fan must have a permanent lubrication system on its bearings. Motor for
fan must be equipped with adjustable pulley. The electric motor must be built in.
The factory is installed the electrical motor inside the indoor unit.
2.e. Control and Protection System

 The control system must be the factory built in and assembled, tested at the
manufacturer. The AC unit control system consists of and is not limited to :
o Compressor motor overload protection
o High-low pressure cut outs
o Fan motor relay
o Starting & running capacitors
o Time delay relay to prevent compressor against start/stop stering
o Control Circuit fuse and terminal block.
 The control system is equipped with Thermostat which equipped with on/off
switch, pilot lamp (s), cooling coil fan speed controller
 The start/stop system for the AC unit allows for on/off remote and operating/
fault signal
 Each Air-Conditioning unit supplied from the factory is filled with R-22
Refrigerant.
b. Project Site Implementation/ Contractor
1) Air-conditioning units which comes into the project site shall be inspected for :
a) There is no damage due to delivering
b) Refrigerant is nor reducing
c) Refrigerant piping inside the unit should not leak.
2) If there is damage or deficiency then the contractor must make improvements. If the
damage is rather severe then the contractor has to replace it with a new one. All the
costs are the contractor responsibility.
3) Every each of the outdoor unit mounted shall be supplied neoprene pad on the base
seat unit, for vibration dampening
4) The size of neoprene pad is determined by the unit weight. Neoprene pad should be a
factory production with catalogs and characteristics
5) The outdoor unit installation should be attached strong enough to the wall or ceiling,
either on the wall partition or the permanent wall.
6) Outdoor Unit Installations :
a) The installation of an outdoor unit is placed at an elevation to the floors with a
minimum height of 20 cm, so as not to be exposed to rainwater puddles
b) Outdoor laying must meet the manufacturer's requirements for distances against
walls, anti-theft and so on
c) Placement of outdoor units should allow people to move freely, easily perform
maintenance.
7) Refrigerant addition :
a) The Contractor shall supply the refrigerant addition and fill it in the installation of
refrigerant piping in both indoor and outdoor units as well as in the piping that
connects it
b) The addition of refrigerant volume should be viewed based on the amount of
excess pipeline length. The number of refrigerants must be in accordance with
the manufacturer's requirements.
8) Piping Installations
a) Refrigerant pipes which connecting out-door units and in-door units must be
made of copper complete with 25 mm thick insulation and with a density of
3
35 kg/m . The insulating material must be made of polyethelene
b) The indoor drain pipe AC unit must be made of PVC, VP class complete with
3
25 mm thick insulation and 35 Kg/m density. The insulating material is made of
polyethelene thermaflex.
9) Data unit AC
The data of the AC unit is in the attached list in the as built drawing whether the type
and capacity. If at the time of booking of the units listed on the table there found any
difference, then the selected unit is the closest upon it.
3. Mechanical Ventilation Works
a. General
1) The following is generally about ventilation and ventilator, for other specific technical
specifications are in accordance with those specified in each specification
2) Ventilation apparatus shall be installed as specified in the as built drawings and/ or as
required below. All mechanical ventilation should meet local requirements, in
coordination and/ or applicable regulations
3) The Contractor shall provide and install the fan (and in accordance with the as built
drawings and specifications). All fan specified below, which has been tested for it
static or dynamic balanced and tested by the manufacturer. Having the fan installed
should not cause excessive noise, nc max. 40. All fans mount it with rubber around it
(vibration damper) before installing
4) The entire fan must be approved for use by the consultant before installation work
can be done.
b. Scope of Works
The mechanical ventilation work in question is the installment of the installation with its
equipment which includes the provision, installation and testing.
c. Installation System
1) Materials and Equipment

a. Materials and equipment must meet the specifications of the contractor and if its
might to propose alternatives which equivalent to the Consultant Management/
the Board of Directors specifications
b. The new Contractor can do the changes if it has got approval and signature from
the Board of Directors / Construction Management.
c. Products of the materials and equipment are as follows :
2) Project Site Implementation
a) Fan
 All fan must have a pilot light and on/ off switch at the location/ panel shown
in the as built drawing and can be monitored and/ or remotely from the
control panel center room
 Axial type Fan should be dampened (Silencer) and equipped with 4 meters of
deep insulation (as shown on as built drawing)
 Fan with 1 Hp power or smaller can be "single phase"
 Fan is a type of axial and ceiling type or specified in the as built drawing.
b) Mechanical Ventilation Ducting
(1) All necessary mechanical ventilation ducting is to be in accordance with the

Air Ducting matter (the chimney) of both the engine, the shape and the
material. All mechanical ventilation ducting need not be isolated
(2) The Contractor shall perform all ducting work with metal sheet material in
accordance with the stipulations prescribed by SMACNA
(3) The ducting system of galvanized iron sheet or a good given reinforcement
sheet and is supported/ hung on a sturdy construction.
(4) The duct material thickness is as follows :
(5) All rectangular duct shall be hung with the following conditions :
(6) All ducts with side size greater than 20" shall be cross-broken and reinforced
with steel. The reinforcing steel frame to be mounted on the sides of the
duct shall meet the following conditions :
(7) To hang a duct as above, that duct should not be attached with support and
must be given a bulk or (ring) washer of copper or non-metallic material
(8) A sharp turn (90 degrees) shall be provided with a guide angle (vanes) in the
form of an appropriate aerodynamic profile
(9) Curves with inner radius smaller than the duct side, curves should be given
single thickness vanes
(10) All ducts shall be made with a flat plate connection on the inside and neat
on the outside. The connections should be as close as possible (air tight)
with removal being made unidirectional and no flange protruding in the
airflow
(11) The as built drawings of the duct plan should be followed exactly and the
size of the duct should only be changed with the approval of the Project
Manager to keep the ceiling height unchanged
(12) In each main branch of the duct must be mounted the damper volume of
"Butter Fly" or "Multiple Balde" type
(13) On duct return PAC side and Fan must be installed fire damper.
c) Grille
(1) Grille made of Aluminum material is dianodized in accordance with the

request
(2) Installation of the grille should be exact based on the as built drawing
(3) All grille should be fitted tightly and given rubber sealing or gasket
(4) The existing grille and register sizes should be adjusted to the
circumstances, the size may be changed as long as the size of the miners is
equal to or greater.
d. Special Requirement
All the provisions contained in the lay-out drawing and the details are binding. All terms
listed are unified specifications.
Article 6 In-Building Transportation Installation
1. General Regulation
a. Installation Terms
Installment of this installation must basically meet the following rules :
1) SNI 03-6573-2001 Procedure of vertical transportation system design in the building

(elevator)
2) SNI 05-6040-1999 General requirements of Passengers Elevator Construction on the
run with Motor Traction
3) SNI 03-0000-2005 Construction of Freight/ Stuff Elevator
4) General Regulations of the Electrical Installation 2011 ( P.U.I.L Th.2011 )

5) National Fire Protection Associates (NFPA)
6) Other standards and regulations permitted by the competent authority
7) Guidelines for Supervision of Electrical Installation 1978
8) Regulation of Department of Labor (DEPNAKER)
9) Regulation of The Provincial Governor of The Special Capital Region of Jakarta
No.200 2015
10) International Regulation/ Standard relating to elevator installation and not
contradicting to Local and General Regulations in Indonesia, namely : BS, JIS, DIN
and so on
11) ASME A 17.1-2013 Safety Code for Elevators dan Escalators
12) Basis of Directive, Party Owner / Management.
b. As Built Drawing
1) The as built drawings of these plans and requirements constitute a unity that is
complementary and equally binding
2) The as built drawings of this system show in general the layout of the equipment,
while the installation must be done with due regard to the condition of the existing
building
3) The Architectural Structural/ Civil drawings, or interior should be used as reference
for implementation.
c. Coordination
1) The contractor of this installation should cooperate with other contractors, so that all
work can run smoothly in accordance with the time specified
2) Good coordination is necessary, so that one installation does not interrupting other
installations
3) If the installment of this installation inhibits other installations, then all the
consequences are the responsibility of the Contractor.
d. Implementation of The Installation

1) Prior to the implementation of the installation, the Contractor shall submit the shop
drawings and details to the Project Manager/ Consultant Planner in 4 (four) copies for
approval
2) The definition of shop drawing is the drawing that guides the implementation,
complete with the dimensions of equipment, the distance of equipment with each
other, the distance to the wall and equipment, dimensions of the accessories used.
The Project Manager reserves the right to reject the shop drawings that do not follow
the above provisions
3) Examples of interior finishing of trains and door frames should be submitted to the
Owner/ Board of Directors/ Construction Management as the Assignor/ Planner for
approval of the form and color
4) The Contractor shall reexamine any size and capacity of the equipment to be
installed. If there is any doubt the Contractor should immediately contact the Project
Manager.
e. Approval of Materials, Equipment and Document that included

1) General
 Within a maximum period of 14 (fourteen) days after receipt of the Work Order
Document (SPK), and prior to commencing the installation of equipment or
materials, the Contractor shall submit a list of shop drawing schedules, a list of
equipment and materials to be used on the Project for approval by the Owner/
Board of Directors/ Construction Management/ Consultant Planner
 The Owner/ Board of Directors/ Construction Management as the Assignor is not
responsible for the material samples to be used and all expenses related to these
submissions and samples/ documents.
2) Shop Drawing
 The contractor must submit the shop drawing along with the details and pieces
required for inspection and approval
 By submitting the shop drawings this means that the Contractor has studied the
local field situation, Stuctures, Architects drawings as well as other installation
drawings.
3) Equipment and Material List

 A complete list of equipment and materials to be used on this Project must be
submitted for approval by the Owner/ Board of Directors/ Construction
management/ Consultant Planner with accompanying brochures complete with
technical data, performance of the equipment
 List of equipment and materials submitted must conform to the technical
specifications.
f. Materials and Equipment

1) General
All equipment of the materials or components must be new and in accordance with
the brochures published and in accordance with the specifications as described in the
drawings and the products that are still in market circulation and produced regularly.
2) Equipment and Any Similar Materials

For equipments and similar materials which the use and functions are the same shall
be the manufacture products (branding products), thus providing interchangeable
possibilities
3) Equipment and Materials Replacement

 All equipment and materials submitted in the tender must be in compliance with
the specifications even in the tender when there is a possibility that there are any
equipment and materials that have not met the specification but must be fulfilled
in accordance with the specification if it has been designated as the Contractor of
the implementation
 For equipment and materials that meet the specifications, because an inevitable
must be replaced, the replacement must be of equal or better to be approved by
the Construction Management/ Consultant Planner
 If the Owner/ Board of Directors/ Construction management as the Procuring
Entity proves that the replacement of the equipment and/ or materials is equal or
better, the costs associated with the proof must be borne by the Contractor.
4) Engineering Works
 The contractor for this work should carefully examine all contract documents for
any conditions that might affecting this work
 All support materials, armature and other bonds or other purposes not
specifically designated or required shall be furnished at no additional cost.
g. As-Built Drawing Installation

1) The Contractor shall submit 1 (one) set of as-built drawings in the form of transparent
drawings (Sephia) and 3 (three) sets of blue printed drawings. This as-built drawing is
complete for all installed installations on this project along with detailed drawings and
snippets
2) As-built drawing should shows the exact location and position of all reference parts of
the used installation such as columns, walls and so forth
3) The Contractor shall present to a set of blueprints of the Contract drawings to the
deviations, developments and revisions that occurred during the execution
4) On any "as-built" drawings, it should be listed :
 Name of The Project
 Name of The Owner
 Name of The Planner Consultant
 Name of The Supervisory Consultant
 The tittle of The Shop Drawings/ and The Part of The Buildong
 Name of The Contractor
 Number of The Drawings
 Date.
h. Responsible for The Implementation

1) The Contractor of this installation shall place an expert and experienced executive in
charge who shall remain in the project site, act as a representative of the Contractor
and having the ability to provide technical and responsible decisions in accepting any
instructions to be given by the Construction Management/ Board of Directors
2) The person in charge of this implementation shall be a permanent employee of this
elevator manufacturer with working experience in installation for at least 8 (eight)
years
3) The person in charge should also be in the work place/ project site when required/
desired by the Project Manager.
i. Project Site Responsibility in Charge

1) Daily and Weekly Reports
Contractors are required to make daily reports and weekly reports that provide an
overview of :
 Physical Activity
 Notes and instructions from the Owner/ Board of Directors/ Construction
Management as the Assignor which delivered either orally or in written
 Numbers/ Amount of entered/ rejected materials
 Total of the manpower
 Added/ reduced the project works.
The weekly report is a summary of the daily reports and after being signed by the
Project Manager must be submitted to the Owner/ Board of Directors/ Construction
Management as the Assignment Giver to be known/ approved.
2) Testing Reports
The installation contractor must submit to the Owner/ Board of Directors/
Construction Management/ Planner Consultant in 3 (three) copies of the following
matters :
 Test results of all operating requirements of the installation
 Equipment test results
 Cables test results
 etc.
All tests and measurements carried out must be witnessed by the Project Manager.
j. Warranty
1) All equipment, materials and the work quality must be guaranteed for 1 (one) year
commencing from the First Handover date
2) Since the First Handover until the warranty period ends, in case of damage or failure
of the installation work, the Contractor shall replace or repair damages at his own
expense
3) If there is damage to the equipment so that it needs to be repaired or replaced, the
warranty shall remain in effect since the replacement or repair
4) In case of damage to the main equipment (eg, motor drive) then the motor must be
replaced with the new equipment and not try to fix the wiring by re-wiring it.
k. Maintenace Period and Handover

1) The maintenance period for this installation is for 6 (six) months from the moment of
First Handover
2) During this maintenance period the Contractor of this installation is required to repair
and execute imperfect parts of the work for which it has not been or has been warned
in advance without any additional cost
3) During this maintenance period, all completed installations are still the sole
responsibility of the Contractor
4) The Contractor shall submit the complete documents upon the First Handover in the
form of :
a) As-built drawing (see paragraph. 1.7)
b) Brosur-brosur peralatan dan kontrol yang berisi antara lain :
 technical brochures (for work implementation, curves)
 maintenance manual
 operational manual
 electrical wiring/ control
c) The names of the equipment suppliers and the controlers who involved in the
project, complete with addresses, telephone numbers and the contact persons
d) Testing Reports Data
e) Equipment and installation guarantee certificate
f) Spare parts and tools.
All point from a until f should be bundled in with paper covered and delivered in
3 (three) sets.
l. Addition/ Reduction/ Changes Installation

1) Implementation of an installation deviating from a plan adapted to site conditions.
Must be consulted first with the Owner/ Board of Directors/ Construction
Management/ Planner Consultant
2) The installation contractor shall submit each drawings of any changes to the Owner/
Board of Directors/ Construction Management/ Planner Consultant in 3 (three) copies
3) Materials changes, etc., must be instructed by the Project Manager in written prior to
implementation. And the addition/ reduction/ existing changes must be approved by
the Owner/ Board of Directors/ Construction Management/ Planner Consultant in
written.
m. Permits – Licenses
Arrangement of the necessary permits for the implementation and testings of this
installation, all the expenses required responsibility of the Contractor.
n. Chiseling, Welding and Drilling

1) Wall, floor chiseling and so forth required in the implementation of this installation
shall be returned to their original condition and shall be the scope of this installation
work
2) Chiseling/ welding/ drilling for installment can only be implemented if there is
consent of the Board of Directors/ Construction Management in written.
o. Routine and Special Inspection

1) Routine inspection during maintenance period shall be carried out by the installation
Contractor periodically and at minimum 2 (two) times a week
2) Special inspection in maintenance time shall be carried out by the Contractor of this
installation, if there is a request from the Board of Directors/ Construction
Management and or if there is any disturbance in this installation
3) The executive technician of this work must have arrived in the project site if there is
any interruption within 1 x 24 hours from the time of the call. If not, then repairs may
be made to others party with all expenses borne by the Contractor.
p. Electrical Installation Works

1) Electrical installation work which including of this work is a complete electrical
installation system so that this installation can run well and safe, so that at the First
Handover of the installation must be able to be used by the Owner
2) All equipment planned in this installation is work at 50 Hz - 2 Hz and 220/380
volt < 5%.
2. Scope of Works
a. This installation work includes all the work of procurement and installation of Vertical
Transportation Installation consisting of 1 (one) complete passenger elevator unit
including all equipment and supporting facilities, so as to obtain a complete and good
installation and tested carefully and ready for use
b. Procurement and installation of all elevator equipment such as : traction motors, control
systems and settings, power supply system, railing, roping and others
c. Procurement and installation of all rail and rope installations
d. Procurement and installation of all control installations
e. Procurement and installation of air ventilation system in engine room
f. Procurement and installation of communication and fire alarm systems
g. Procurement and installation of electrical power resources for this installation such as
cables and panels
h. Carry out the testing and adjusting work of all installed installations, so the installation
works perfectly
i. Procurement and installation of all civil works required for this installation as specified
and described in this document
j. Repair all damages and finishing caused by this installation work
k. Conducting training for officers designated by the Owners on the ways to run and
maintain this installation, so that the officer can actually run and maintain the installation
properly
l. Submit drawings, proof of instructions on how to run and maintenance as well as
complete technical data on installed installation equipment
m. Conduct maintenance of this installation periodically during the maintenance period
n. Provide employment or other conditions contained in this document and its addendum.
3. Elevator Technical Specifications
a. Construction
1) Platform. The elevator platform should be made of substrate steel frame and floor
coated steel plate according to owner's choice. The passenger carriage platform will
be mounted on a supported rubber cushion on a steel frame and mounted on an
elevator frame to form an intercellar intercity and railway frame insulation cushion
2) Safety. Safety should be made of a flexible "guide clamp" a type that does not
require a lever of keys or special tools to release it. Safety should be installed on the
bottom of the lower chassis and driven by a "centrifugal speed governor" placed in
the engine room and arranged to stop the elevator if the speed when the elevator
going down increasing by stopping the flow of the power from the motor and pulling
the brakes
3) Counterweight. The counterweight made of cast iron shall be placed in the
structural steel framework, using "guideshoes" as a guide. Guideshoes weighs as
much as an elevator weight plus approximately 45% of the required load for
passenger/ freight
4) Idler Sheave. The compensation of the towing weight is attached to the bottom of
the elevatro frame and the passing load under the "idler sheave" in the pit. There
shall be a safeguarding of voltage for these compensating ropes. Idler sheave must
operate in steering with a tightly positioned steering structure. There should be an
adjustable mounting button, which will disconnect the elevator power flow when the
"idler sheave" passes the distance limit by the strap line
5) Buffer. The Buffer shall be oil type buffer and the counterweight complete with the
supporting pipe and the reinforcement grip shall be provided if necessary. For the
counterweight can used "gravity return" buffer type
6) Stoper. To stop the elevator on the stopping floors shall be used an automatic free-
stop device from the usual operation system on the elevator. The end limit button on
the elevator-driven "Hoistway" must stop the elevator and prevent abnormal
operation when the elevator goes through the area from the normal stopping device
7) Guide Shoes. The Guide shoes type with automatic lubrication should be mounted
on the top and side of the carriage and on the counterweight frame.
b. Motor Drive
1) Elevator machine insulation shall be of the "B" class isolation, having two speeds of
the "single worm geared traction" type, with motors, "gearing" and "drive sheave"
brakes mounted on the base plate of cast iron or structural steel
2) The driving machine shall be supplied from AC voltage source 380/220 Volt, 3 phases,
50 Hz with VVVF (Variable Voltage Variable Frequency) control system. Gear used is
"no friction" gear type. To isolate the engine from the structure there should be a
rubber pad or other vibration damper
3) The used brakes should be installed with the electrically spring released and work
directly and automatically if the power flow is interupted. To control the start, stop
and speed of the motor and automatically run the brake when the power jam or for
equipment safety, must use electro magnetic control device. This controller shall be
enclosed in a cabinet of black enamelled metal plate and sufficiently ventilated and
has openings for attainment
4) The steel “Worm” must be integrated with the “worm shaft” and “ball bearing thrust“
to receive the worm input of both directions, the “worm gear” must be made of
copper and precisely welded and bolted on the "gear spider". "Drive sheave" should
be curved according to the size and number of the towing string. "Roller" or "metal
bearing" must be of a friction-proof type and equipped with a lubrication system.
"Deflector sheave" made of cast iron complete with supporters and "metal guards”
5) The motor shall be of "reversible" type with "high starting torgue and low starting
current" and shall be specially designed for elevator use. The motor winding shall
have a class "B" insulation mounted on steel beams separated from the floor by
rubber or neoprene pads. The motor must meet the requirements to operate
o
continuously at full load with a maximum temperature rise of 50 C. There should be
necessary knobs and protective equipment, including a safeguard against thermal
loads for the "remote control" of the generator
6) Automatic reversing "leveling" shall be provided to reduce the speed of time
approaching the discontinuation floor automatically adjusting the landing alignment
to a precision of approximately 6 mm, regardless of operating device, strap strain,
"over travel" and “under travel”. This "landing level" must be maintained as long as
the elevator is in the leveling area, unaffected by the load
7) Power cables shall be fireproof type with a moisture resistant outer layer and in the
metal conduit, metal tubing or wire duct according to the need for connection.
"Traveling cable" should have an outer layer of fire resistance, moisture resistance
between elevator from "hoistway". These cables must be hung to free the individual
structures from excessive tensile stress
8) The keys of the inspection button should be provided in the carriage which will stop
the operation of the operating equipment inside the elevator and run the operating
equipment above the elevator. There should also be a fixture, mounted between the
“crosshead” and the “hoistway” door and inside there is a stop button to run the
control knobs above the carriage. Operation on the elevator must be with continuous
pressure on the steering button and at once the "safety operating button". There
should be no operation from the top of the carriage unless all contacts from the
electric door are closed.
c. Elevator Door
1) The entrance for the "hoistway" of the passenger elevator shall be horizontal type
and open on the side opening, complete with "closer" mounted on each door panel
2) The frame should be made of furniture steel with the thick of 1.6 mm with "integral
square trim", welded on three corners, mounted to the lower threshold and held at
the edge. The door should be as thick as 32 mm, reinforced with a complete vertical
steel frame filled with silencer and fire retardant materials
3) Doors should be provided to accept all operating mechanisms, "hardware" and
equipped with “non-metalic guides”
4) The lower thread is made of alluminium, supported in steel armature, which is fitted
to the floor and has a dent (machine-made) that leads to the door. To support the
hanger, 2,3 mm steel is used along the doorway and is strongly armored to the frame.
The cover plate is 1,2 mm thick and can be loosened along the doorway. "Struts" or
"closer” elbows extend from the lower threshold to the above beam of 50 mm x 50
mm x 4 mm
5) All doors are driven by a direct-current motor mounted on the elevator with
"movement machined" at different speeds so could reach the end of the door
together. The operating mechanism should be set for human power operations if
supply is Interupted and taken from the best quality, working smoothly and specially
planned for elevators
6) “Loading edge” should be attached to the doors to instantly open the door if blocked
and instantly closed back when the obstruction is removed
7) The door should automatically open when the elevator arrives at the height of the
landing and closes automatically after a certain time or when the elevator is sent to
another height
8) The doors should open at a speed of 45,72 cm per second, and close at 30,48 cm per
second, and stay closed if the elevator in brakes
9) “Fascia” passenger elevators shall be made of steel as thick as 1,6 mm long as wide as
the opening width, and shall be mounted on the lower threshold of the door and top
of the "Toe guard" frame made of 1,6 mm steel, extending as wide as opening and
shall be attached to the bottom of the lower threshold and slope towards the lower
wall. The dust cover made of 1,6 mm steel stretches the width of the door and is
mounted on the framework of the top floor door.
d. Elevator Carriage
1) For passenger elevator, ceilings and doors should be made of steel panels with
"factory baked enamel finish"
2) On passenger elevator "Entrance Column", "Cover Base", and "Hand Rail" must be
made of stainless steel
3) Lighting in the passenger elevator shall be fluorescent tube type with "light troughs"
4) Ventilation for passenger elevator is with single speed blower with "plenum" channel.
To sterilize the air entering this carriage must be installed germicidal ultraviolet lamps
in the channel under the "blower".
e. Setting System
1) Elevator must have "Simplex" automatic operation. The carriage that stop at the
landing must turn on the room lights indicating which way the elevator will move.
There should be a "circuit" to allow the elevator back to the parking station (bottom
floor or other floors which in concerned)
2) On The "Circuit" control should include "time delay non interferences" to allow
opening time for elevator and "hoistway" doors before the elevator can be sent to
another landing. Termination recorded by the landing achieved in each direction of it
travel. All upward calls should be answered if the elevator goes upwards, and all calls
down must be answered when the elevator moves down
3) Each carriage shall have an operating panel containing a series of elevator-call
buttons with integral lighting associated with the served landing, emergency stop
button, emergency caller bell button, door opening button and door closing knob. The
cabin for service should contain the service button, the inspection button, the
required elevator button. This cabinet should have a locked door and a hinged "finish"
in accordance with the elevator operation panel. The front plate should be made of
stainless steel
4) On the intermediate floors a fixture should be provided from the "landing" buttons,
each containing up and down buttons, and on the end floors there is a single button.
Each button must be integralally illuminated, and lit when the call is recorded and off
when the carriage answers the call. The metal parts of the "fixture" visible button
must be made of stainless steel.
f. Finishing
1) All metal surfaces of door, frame, fascia, dust cover and "toe guard" must be finished
with "baked enamel" with color approved by Board of Directors / Planner
2) Structural steel, thresholds and other metals used in this installation shall be covered
with a single layer of black enamel after the installation, in addition to the
manufacture standard plant layers.
g. Safety Device
On all elevators must have the following safety devices :
1) Termination of motor power when brake thyristor is removed
2) Termination of motor power in case of over travel down or up
3) Mechanical brake works automatically when the motor power is disconnected
4) Mechanical braking shall ensure smooth delays for any condition of speed and load
5) Manual operation to open the door in case of power supply interruption
6) Power termination in case of overload
7) Safety gear that works when there is damage to the rope suspension and should be
able to stop the elevator
8) In the event of a power supply failure there must be a backup power that can bring
the lift cart to the nearest floor and can open the door with spare power. The elevator
must be equipped with "Automatic Rescue Device" (ARD)
9) In case of fire, the elevator cart should go to the ground floor and open the doors and
the fire lift must remain operational (in this case the passenger lift also serves as a fire
lift)
10) To save energy, if the elevator stops/ returns to the parking floor after a while there is
no call then the lights and fan in the elevator must be inactive, and when there is a
"call", the lights and fan should be lit up instantly.
4. Technical Data
a. Service Lift/ Fire Escape Lift (Lift 1)
 Type : Traction Gear
 Control System : AC – Variable Voltage Variable Frequency
 Operating System : Simplex
 Capacity : 1600 kg
 Speed : 90 meter/minute
st th
 Serving : 1 - 6 (6 stop)
 Power Sources : 380 volt, 3 phases, 50 Hz
 Lighting/ Fan : 220 volt, 1 phase, 50 Hz
 Door : Centre opening automatic sliding door
 Car Inside : 1.600 mm x 2.500 mm
 Hoistway : 2.500 mm x 3.200 mm.
b. Passanger Lift (Lift 2)

 Type : Traction Gear
 Control System : AC – Variable Voltage Variable Frequency
 Operation System : Simplex
 Capacity : 1.000 kg/15 persons
 Speed : 90 meter/minute
st th
 Serving : 1 - 6 (6 stop)
 Power Sources : 380 volt, 3 phases, 50 Hz

 Lighting/ Fan : 220 volt, 1 phase, 50 Hz
 Door : Centre opening automatic sliding door
 Car Inside : 1.600 mm x 1.500 mm
 Hoistway : 2.500 mm x 2.200 mm.
After the elevator is installed and being operational, before submitted/ handed over to the
Owner must be tested in advance to obtain satisfactory performance and all costs incurred
for the test borne by the Contractor, the things that must be checked and tested are :
a. Safety Devices
1) Phase protection relay
2) Motor over current switch
3) Generator switch
4) Landing door inter locking
5) Up and down over travel limit
6) Up and down terminal stopping devices
7) Car and cartop emergency switch
8) Pit switch.
b. 100 % load of the loading test for motor current testing and leveling every floor
1) Loading test 125 %
2) Speed governor test
3) Safety gear test.
6. Service and Maintenance
a. The Contractor shall open a regular maintenance service and provide maintenance on
each elevator for 1 (one) year from the date of Second Handover
b. This maintenance work should not be transferred to other agencies, and includes periodic
checks by adjusting experts, lubrication and replacement of spare parts necessary for
operational perfection of the elevators
c. For maintenance after the Second Handover will be held contract service and
maintenance separately and will separate from this contract.
a. Materials and equipment installed must meet the specifications. The Contractor may file
one of the list of materials and equipment according to the Owner/ Board of Directors/
Consultant Management's list of equipment, if the materials and equipment products
specified in the specification are not on the market or are no longer produced. The new
Contractor may replace the equipment from other new products after get an official and
written approval from the Owner/ Board of Directors/ Planner Consultant/ Consultant
Management
b. The materials and equipment product in question is in accordance with the material list
attachment.

Workplan and Technical Requirements

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Workplan and Technical Requirements

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

CHAPTER 1

Article 1 General ........................................................................................................................ 1

Article 2 Site Cleaning up ........................................................................................................... 1

Article 3 Site Remeasurement ................................................................................................... 1

Article 4 Basic Benchmark ......................................................................................................... 2

Article 5 Building Shelf (Bouwplank).......................................................................................... 2

Article 6 Water and Electricity Supply ....................................................................................... 2

Article 7 Fire Fighting Equipment .............................................................................................. 2

Article 8 Drainage ..................................................................................................................... 3

Article 9 Contractor Office and Workplace Area ....................................................................... 3

1. To secure the location of any disturbance.

Article 2 Site Cleaning up

Article 3 Site Remeasurement

Article 4 Basic Benchmark

PRELIMINARY WORKS Page 1

2. The standard of benchmark is made of a concrete of at least 20 X 20 cm, firmly

Article 5 Delimiter Board of The Work Implementation Site Area (Bouwplank)

Article 6 Water and Electricity Supply

Article 7 Fire Fighting Equipments

Article 9 Contractor Office and Workplace Area

Article 1 Soil, Excavation And Landfill Works ............................................................................. 1

Article 2 Sandfill/ Sand Hoarding Works .................................................................................... 2

Article 3 Lane Concrete Works .................................................................................................. 3

Article 4 Foundation Structural Works ...................................................................................... 4

Article 5 Concrete Works ......................................................................................................... 16

Article 7 Steel Structures ......................................................................................................... 27

Article – 1 Soil, Excavation and Landfill Works

STRUCTURAL WORKS Page 1

Article 2 Sand Work

Article 3 Lane Concrete Works

3. Terms of The Work Implementation

Article 4 Foundation Structural Works

1. Stone/ Rock Foundation

2. Bore Pile Foundation Works

b. Project Site Introduction

c. Project Site Measurements

f. Implementation of Making the Bore Piles

2) The first stage is drilling work

a) This work is absolutely necessary to be done by the contractor because the

g. Reinforced Rebar Steel

i. Drill Position Tolerance

j. The Making Drill Bore Masts in Order

k. Chiseling Displays Head of Drill Pill & As Built Drawing

l. Excavation Material Waste

m. Back-fill/ Soil Recurrence

n. Tidy Up The Reins

o. Drill Poles Disclaimer

p. Drill Pole Making and Drilling Record

Drilling records must include but not limited to :

1) Drilling Data/ Drilling The Holes

q. Reinforced Concrete Work Tests

r. Technical Specification of The Drill Poles

3. Pilling/ Pile Cap Foundation Works

b. Pilling/ Erection Terms and Conditions

W = Carrying capacity of the pile (tons)

 The total amount of temporary elastic compression of pile, helmet and

c. Bore Pile Specification

1) In principle using prestressed concrete piles, Dimensions of pile sizes according to

d. Pile Punch Cuttings

e. Dynamic Pole Carrying Capacity Test

 Location of the Pole in test

Article 5 Concrete Works

1. General Terms and Condition

a. Concrete construction requirements, technical terms and conditions, concrete